Toshiba H9 Operation Manual 1 58682 000

H9 to the manual 41132777-595e-43cc-8d51-e4c15e31d696

2014-12-13

: Toshiba Toshiba-H9-Operation-Manual-130783 toshiba-h9-operation-manual-130783 toshiba pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 289 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

H9 ADJUSTABLE SPEED DRIVE
Installation and Operation
Manual
H9 ADJUSTABLE SPEED DRIVE
Installation and Operation Manual
Document Number: 58682-000
Date: February, 2008
Introduction
Congratulations on the purchase of the new H9 True Torque Control2 Adjustable Speed Drive (ASD).
The H9 True Torque Control2 Adjustable Speed Drive is a solid-state AC drive that features True
Torque Control2. Toshiba’s Vector Control Algorithm enables the motor to develop high starting torque
and provide compensation for motor slip, which results in smooth, quick starts and highly efficient
operation. The H9 ASD uses digitally-controlled pulse width modulation. The programmable functions
may be accessed via the easy-to-use menu or via the Direct Access Numbers (see page 76). This feature,
combined with Toshiba’s high-performance software, delivers unparalleled motor control and reliability.
The H9 ASD is a very powerful tool, yet surprisingly simple to operate. The user-friendly Electronic
Operator Interface (EOI) of the H9 ASD has an easy-to-read graphical LCD screen. There is also a read-
only LED display with enhanced visibility that can be read from a greater distance. The EOI provides
superior viewing features for the user and easy access to the many monitoring and programming features
of the H9 ASD.
The motor control software is menu-driven, which allows for easy access to the motor control parameters
and quick changes when required.
To maximize the abilities of your new H9 ASD, a working familiarity with this manual will be required.
This manual has been prepared for the H9 ASD installer, user, and maintenance personnel. This manual
may also be used as a reference guide or for training. With this in mind, use this manual to develop a
system familiarity before attempting to install or operate the device.
Important Notice
The instructions contained in this manual are not intended to cover all details or variations in equipment
types, nor may they provide for every possible contingency concerning the installation, operation, or
maintenance of this equipment. Should additional information be required contact your Toshiba
representative.
The contents of this manual shall not become a part of or modify any prior or existing agreement,
commitment, or relationship. The sales contract contains the entire obligation of Toshiba International
Corporation. The warranty contained in the contract between the parties is the sole warranty of Toshiba
International Corporation and any statements contained herein do not create new warranties or modify the
existing warranty.
Any electrical or mechanical modifications to this equipment without prior written consent of
Toshiba International Corporation will void all warranties and may void the UL/CSA listing or
other safety certifications. Unauthorized modifications may also result in a safety hazard or
equipment damage.
Misuse of this equipment could result in injury and equipment damage. In no event will Toshiba
Corporation be responsible or liable for direct, indirect, special, or consequential damage or injury
that may result from the misuse of this equipment.
About This Manual
This manual was written by the Toshiba Technical Publications Group. This group is tasked with
providing technical documentation for the H9 Adjustable Speed Drive. Every effort has been made to
provide accurate and concise information to you, our customer.
At Toshiba we are continuously searching for better ways to meet the constantly changing needs of our
customers. E-mail your comments, questions, or concerns about this publication to
Technical-Publications-Dept@TIC.TOSHIBA.com.
Manual’s Purpose and Scope
This manual provides information on how to safely install, operate, maintain, and dispose of your
H9 Adjustable Speed Drive. The information provided in this manual is applicable to the
H9 Adjustable Speed Drive only.
This manual provides information on the various features and functions of this powerful cost-saving
device, including
• Installation,
• System operation,
• Configuration and menu options, and
• Mechanical and electrical specifications.
Included is a section on general safety instructions that describe the warning labels and symbols that are
used. Read the manual completely before installing, operating, performing maintenance, or disposing of
this equipment.
This manual and the accompanying drawings should be considered a permanent part of the equipment
and should be readily available for reference and review. Dimensions shown in the manual are in metric
and/or the English equivalent.
Because of our commitment to continuous improvement, Toshiba International Corporation reserves the
right, without prior notice, to update information, make product changes, or to discontinue any product
or service identified in this publication.
Toshiba International Corporation (TIC) shall not be liable for direct, indirect, special, or
consequential damages resulting from the use of the information contained within this manual.
This manual is copyrighted. No part of this manual may be photocopied or reproduced in any form
without the prior written consent of Toshiba International Corporation.
© Copyright 2008 Toshiba International Corporation.
TOSHIBA® is a registered trademark of the Toshiba Corporation. All other product or trade references
appearing in this manual are registered trademarks of their respective owners.
Reliability in motion® is a registered trademark of the Toshiba Corporation.
All rights reserved.
Printed in the U.S.A.
Contacting Toshiba’s Customer Support
Center
Toshiba’s Customer Support Center can be contacted to obtain help in resolving any Adjustable Speed
Drive system problem that you may experience or to provide application information.
The center is open from 8 a.m. to 5 p.m. (CST), Monday through Friday. The Support Center’s toll free
number is US (800) 231-1412/Fax (713) 466-8773 — Canada (800) 527-1204.
You may also contact Toshiba by writing to:
Toshiba International Corporation
13131 West Little York Road
Houston, Texas 77041-9990
Attn: ASD Product Manager.
For further information on Toshiba’s products and services, please visit our website at
www.toshiba.com/ind/.
TOSHIBA INTERNATIONAL CORPORATION
H9 Adjustable Speed Drive
Please complete the Warranty Card supplied with the H9 ASD and return it to Toshiba by prepaid mail. This will
activate the 12 month warranty from the date of installation; but, shall not exceed 18 months from the shipping
date.
Complete the following information and retain for your records.
Model Number: ______________________________________________________________________
Serial Number: ______________________________________________________________________
Project Number (if applicable): __________________________________________________________
Date of Installation: __________________________________________________________________
Inspected By: ______________________________________________________________________
Name of Application: ______________________________________________________________
Table of Contents
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual i
General Safety Information.............................................................................................. 1
Safety Alert Symbol..................................................................................................... 1
Signal Words ................................................................................................................1
Special Symbols ........................................................................................................... 2
Equipment Warning Labels.......................................................................................... 2
Qualified Personnel......................................................................................................2
Equipment Inspection................................................................................................... 3
Handling and Storage................................................................................................... 3
Disposal........................................................................................................................3
Installation Precautions .................................................................................................... 4
Location and Ambient Requirements...........................................................................4
Mounting Requirements...............................................................................................4
Conductor Routing and Grounding..............................................................................5
Power Connections.......................................................................................................6
Protection .....................................................................................................................6
System Integration Precautions .......................................................................................7
Personnel Protection.....................................................................................................7
System Setup Requirements.........................................................................................8
Operational and Maintenance Precautions.....................................................................9
Motor Characteristics .....................................................................................................10
Motor Autotuning....................................................................................................... 10
Pulse Width Modulation Operation............................................................................ 10
Low Speed Operation.................................................................................................10
Overload Protection Adjustment................................................................................ 10
Operation Above 60 Hz..............................................................................................10
Power Factor Correction ............................................................................................11
Light Load Conditions ...............................................................................................11
Motor/Load Combinations .........................................................................................11
Load-produced Negative Torque ...............................................................................12
Motor Braking ............................................................................................................12
H9 ASD Characteristics..................................................................................................13
Over-current Protection.............................................................................................. 13
ASD Capacity............................................................................................................. 13
Using Vector Control ................................................................................................. 13
Installation and Connections..........................................................................................14
Installation Notes........................................................................................................ 14
Mounting the H9 ASD ...............................................................................................15
Connecting the H9 ASD.............................................................................................16
Power Connections .............................................................................................16
System Grounding............................................................................................... 18
Lead Length Specifications.................................................................................20
I/O and Control...........................................................................................................21
Terminal Descriptions......................................................................................... 22
I/O Circuit Configurations .................................................................................. 25
Typical Connection Diagram..............................................................................26
Startup and Test ..................................................................................................27
ii H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Electronic Operator Interface........................................................................................28
EOI Operation ............................................................................................................28
EOI Remote Mounting............................................................................................... 28
EOI Features...............................................................................................................29
LED Display .......................................................................................................30
LCD Display ....................................................................................................... 31
Keypad Remote Mounting .........................................................................................33
Remote Keypad Required Hardware .................................................................. 33
Keypad Installation Precautions..........................................................................33
Keypad Remote Mounting w/o the ASD-MTG-KIT..........................................34
Keypad Remote Mounting using the ASD-MTG-KIT .......................................35
Command Mode and Frequency Mode Control...........................................................36
Command Control (F003)..........................................................................................36
Frequency Control (F004)..........................................................................................37
Command and Frequency Control Selections..................................................... 37
Override Operation.....................................................................................................38
Command and Frequency-Control Override Hierarchy......................................38
Command Control Selections ............................................................................. 39
Frequency Control Selections .............................................................................39
System Configuration and Menu Options.....................................................................41
Root Menus ................................................................................................................41
Frequency Command Mode................................................................................41
Monitor Mode .....................................................................................................43
Program Mode Menu Navigation .......................................................................46
System Operation ............................................................................................................70
Initial Setup ................................................................................................................70
Startup Wizard Parameters.........................................................................................70
Startup Wizard Parameter Requirements............................................................71
Operation (Local) .......................................................................................................73
Default Setting Changes............................................................................................. 74
Save User Settings...................................................................................................... 75
Direct Access Parameter Information...........................................................................76
Direct Access Parameters/Numbers...........................................................................76
Alarms, Trips, and Troubleshooting ...........................................................................246
Alarms and Trips...................................................................................................... 246
User Notification Codes ...........................................................................................247
Alarms ......................................................................................................................247
Trips/Faults...............................................................................................................250
Viewing Trip Information.................................................................................255
Clearing a Trip .................................................................................................. 255
Enclosure Dimensions and Conduit Plate Information .............................................256
Enclosure Dimensions..............................................................................................256
Current/Voltage Specifications ....................................................................................263
Cable/Terminal/Torque Specifications........................................................................265
Short Circuit Protection Recommendations...............................................................267
Dynamic Braking Resistor Wire/Cable Specifications ..............................................268
H9 ASD Optional Devices............................................................................................. 270
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 1
General Safety Information
DO NOT attempt to install, operate, maintain or dispose of this equipment until you have read and
understood all of the product safety information and directions that are contained in this manual.
Safety Alert Symbol
The Safety Alert Symbol indicates that a potential personal injury hazard exists. The symbol is
comprised of an equilateral triangle enclosing an exclamation mark.
Signal Words
Listed below are the signal words that are used throughout this manual followed by their descriptions
and associated symbols. When the words DANGER, WARNING, and CAUTION are used in this
manual they will be followed by important safety information that must be carefully followed.
The word DANGER preceded by the safety alert symbol indicates that an imminently hazardous
situation exists that, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury to personnel.
The word WARNING preceded by the safety alert symbol indicates that a potentially hazardous
situation exists that, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury to personnel.
The word CAUTION preceded by the safety alert symbol indicates that a potentially hazardous
situation exists which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury.
The word CAUTION without the safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation exists
which, if not avoided, may result in equipment and property damage.
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
CAUTION
2H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Special Symbols
To identify special hazards, other symbols may appear in conjunction with the DANGER, WARNING
and CAUTION signal words. These symbols indicate areas that require special and/or strict adherence
to the procedures to prevent serious injury to personnel or death.
Electrical Hazard Symbol
A symbol which indicates a hazard of injury from electrical
shock or burn. It is comprised of an equilateral triangle
enclosing a lightning bolt.
Explosion Hazard Symbol
A symbol which indicates a hazard of injury from exploding
parts. It is comprised of an equilateral triangle enclosing an
explosion image.
Equipment Warning Labels
DO NOT attempt to install, operate, perform maintenance, or dispose of this equipment until you have
read and understood all of the product labels and user directions that are contained in this manual.
Warning labels that are attached to the equipment will include the exclamation mark within a triangle.
DO NOT remove or cover any of these labels. If the labels are damaged or if additional labels are
required, contact your Toshiba sales representative for additional labels.
Labels attached to the equipment are there to provide useful information or to indicate an imminently
hazardous situation that may result in serious injury, severe property and equipment damage, or death if
safe procedures or methods are not followed as outlined in this manual.
Qualified Personnel
Installation, operation, and maintenance shall be performed by Qualified Personnel Only. A Qualified
Person is one that has the skills and knowledge relating to the construction, installation, operation, and
maintenance of the electrical equipment and has received safety training on the hazards involved (Refer
to the latest edition of NFPA 70E for additional safety requirements).
Qualified Personnel shall:
• Have carefully read the entire manual.
• Be familiar with the construction and function of the H9 ASD, the equipment being driven, and the
hazards involved.
• Be able to recognize and properly address hazards associated with the application of motor-driven
equipment.
• Be trained and authorized to safely energize, de-energize, ground, lockout/tagout circuits and
equipment, and clear faults in accordance with established safety practices.
• Be trained in the proper care and use of protective equipment such as safety shoes, rubber gloves,
hard hats, safety glasses, face shields, flash clothing, etc., in accordance with established safety
practices.
• Be trained in rendering first aid.
For further information on workplace safety visit www.osha.gov.
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 3
Equipment Inspection
• Upon receipt of the equipment inspect the packaging and equipment for shipping damage.
• Carefully unpack the equipment and check for parts that were damaged during shipping, missing
parts, or concealed damage. If any discrepancies are discovered, it should be noted with the carrier
prior to accepting the shipment, if possible. File a claim with the carrier if necessary and
immediately notify your Toshiba sales representative.
•DO NOT install or energize equipment that has been damaged. Damaged equipment may fail
during operation resulting in equipment damage or personal injury.
• Check to see that the rated capacity and the model number specified on the nameplate conform to
the order specifications.
• Modification of this equipment is dangerous and should only be performed by factory trained
representatives. When modifications are required contact your Toshiba sales
representative.Inspections may be required before and after moving installed equipment.
• Inspections may be required before and after moving installed equipment.
• Keep the equipment in an upright position.
• Contact your Toshiba sales representative to report discrepancies or for assistance if required.
Handling and Storage
• Use proper lifting techniques when moving the H9 ASD; including properly sizing up the load,
getting assistance, and using a forklift if required.
• Store in a well-ventilated covered location and preferably in the original carton if the equipment
will not be used upon receipt.
• Store in a cool, clean, and dry location. Avoid storage locations with extreme temperatures, rapid
temperature changes, high humidity, moisture, dust, corrosive gases, or metal particles.
• The storage temperature range of the H9 ASD is -13° to 158° F (-9.4° to 70° C).
• Do not store the unit in places that are exposed to outside weather conditions (i.e., wind, rain, snow,
etc.).
• Store in an upright position.
Disposal
Never dispose of electrical components via incineration. Contact your state environmental agency for
details on disposal of electrical components and packaging in your area.
4H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Installation Precautions
Location and Ambient Requirements
• The Toshiba H9 ASD is intended for permanent installations only.
• Installation should conform to the 2005 National Electrical Code — Article 110 (NEC)
(Requirements For Electrical Installations), all regulations of the Occupational Safety and
Health Administration, and any other applicable national, regional, or industry codes and
standards.
• Select a mounting location that is easily accessible, has adequate personnel working space, and
adequate illumination for adjustment, inspection, and maintenance of the equipment (refer to 2005
NEC Article 110-13).
• A noncombustible insulating floor or mat should be provided in the area immediately surrounding
the electrical system.
•DO NOT mount the H9 ASD in a location that would produce catastrophic results if it were to fall
from its mounting location (equipment damage or injury).
•DO NOT mount the H9 ASD in a location that would allow it to be exposed to flammable
chemicals or gases, water, solvents, or other fluids.
• Avoid installation in areas where vibration, heat, humidity, dust, fibers, steel particles, explosive/
corrosive mists or gases, or sources of electrical noise are present.
• The installation location shall not be exposed to direct sunlight.
• Allow proper clearance spaces for installation. Do not obstruct the ventilation openings. Refer to
the section titled Installation and Connections on pg. 14 for further information on ventilation
requirements.
• The ambient operating temperature range of the H9 ASD is 14° to 104° F (-10° to 40° C).
• See the section titled Installation and Connections on pg. 14 for additional information on installing
the drive.
Mounting Requirements
• Only Qualified Personnel should install this equipment.
• Install the unit in a secure and upright position in a well-ventilated area.
• A noncombustible insulating floor or mat should be provided in the area immediately surrounding
the electrical system at the place where maintenance operations are to be performed.
• As a minimum, the installation of the equipment should conform to the 2005 National Electrical
Code — Article 110 (NEC), OSHA, as well as any other applicable national, regional, or industry
codes and standards.
• Installation practices should conform to the latest revision of NFPA 70E Electrical Safety
Requirements for Employee Workplaces.
• It is the responsibility of the person installing the H9 ASD or the electrical maintenance personnel
to ensure that the unit is installed in an enclosure that will protect personnel against electric shock.
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 5
Conductor Routing and Grounding
• Use separate metal conduits for routing the input power, output power, and control circuits and each
shall have its own ground cable.
• A separate ground cable should be run inside the conduit with the input power, output power, and
and control circuits.
•DO NOT connect CC to earth ground.
•Use IICC terminal as the return for the V/I input.
• Always ground the unit to prevent electrical shock and to help reduce electrical noise.
• It is the responsibility of the person installing the H9 ASD or the electrical maintenance personnel
to provide proper grounding and branch circuit protection in accordance with the 2005 NEC and
any applicable local codes.
The Metal Of Conduit Is Not An Acceptable Ground.
Grounding Capacitor Switch
The H9 ASD is equipped with leak reduction capacitors which are used to reduce the EMI leakage via
the 3-phase power-input circuit and for compliance with the Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive
(EMC).
The effective value of the capacitor may be increased, reduced, or removed entirely via the Selector
Switch, Switching Bar, or the Switching Screw — the type used is typeform-specific.
The Grounding Capacitor Switch allows the user to quickly change the value of the leakage-reduction
capacitance of the 3-phase input circuit without the use of tools.
See the section titled Power Connection Requirements on pg. 17 for more on the Grounding Capacitor.
See figures 4, 5, 6, and 7 on pg. 19 an electrical depiction of the leakage-reduction functionality of the
Grounding Capacitor and the methods used to set the capacitance value.
The H9 ASD is equipped with a noise reduction capacitor which is used to reduce the noise of the 3-
phase input circuit. The capacitor may be removed from the circuit electrically using the Grounding
Capacitor Switch (see Figure 2 on pg. 16).
The switch has a push-pull activation mechanism. From the front of the unit, push the actuator to place
the noise reduction capacitor into the circuit. Pull the actuator to remove the noise reduction capacitor
from the circuit.
WARNING
6H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Power Connections
Contact With Energized Wiring Will Cause Severe Injury Or Death.
• Turn off, lockout, and tag out all power sources before connecting the power wiring to the
equipment.
• After ensuring that all power sources are turned off and isolated in accordance with established
lockout/tag out procedures, connect three-phase power source wiring of the correct voltage to the
correct input terminals and connect the output terminals to a motor of the correct voltage and type
for the application (refer to NEC Article 300 – Wiring Methods and Article 310 – Conductors For
General Wiring). Size the branch circuit conductors in accordance with NEC Table 310.16.
• If multiple conductors are used in parallel for the input or output power and it is necessary to use
separate conduits, each parallel set shall have its own conduit (i.e., place U1, V1, W1, and a ground
wire in one conduit and U2, V2, W2 and a ground wire in another) (refer to NEC Article 300.20
and Article 310.4). National and local electrical codes should be referenced if three or more power
conductors are run in the same conduit (refer to 2005 NEC Article 310 adjustment factors).
• Ensure that the 3-phase input power is Not connected to the output of the H9 ASD. This will
damage the H9 ASD and may cause injury to personnel.
•DO NOT install the H9 ASD if it is damaged or if it is missing any component(s).
•DO NOT connect resistors across terminals PA – PC or PO – PC. This may cause a fire.
• Ensure the correct phase sequence and the desired direction of motor rotation in the Bypass mode
(if applicable).
• Turn the power on only after attaching and/or securing the front cover.
Protection
• Ensure that primary protection exists for the input wiring to the equipment. This protection must be
able to interrupt the available fault current from the power line. The equipment may or may not be
equipped with an input disconnect (option).
• All cable entry openings must be sealed to reduce the risk of entry by vermin and to allow for
maximum cooling efficiency.
• Follow all warnings and precautions and do not exceed equipment ratings.
• External dynamic braking resistors must be thermally protected.
• It is the responsibility of the person installing the H9 ASD or the electrical maintenance personnel
to setup the Emergency Off braking system of the H9 ASD. The function of the Emergency Off
braking function is to remove output power from the drive in the event of an emergency. A
supplemental braking system may also be engaged in the event of an emergency. For further
information on braking systems, see parameters F250 and F304.
Note: A supplemental emergency stopping system should be used with the H9 ASD.
Emergency stopping should not be a task of the H9 ASD alone.
• Follow all warnings and precautions and do not exceed equipment ratings.
DANGER
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 7
System Integration Precautions
The following precautions are provided as general guidelines for the setup of the H9 ASD within the
system.
• The Toshiba H9 ASD is a general-purpose product. It is a system component only and the system
design should take this into consideration. Please contact your Toshiba sales representative for
application-specific information or for training support.
• The Toshiba H9 ASD is part of a larger system and the safe operation of the H9 ASD will depend
on observing certain precautions and performing proper system integration.
• A detailed system analysis and job safety analysis should be performed by the systems designer
and/or systems integrator before the installation of the H9 ASD component. Contact your Toshiba
sales representative for options availability and for application-specific system integration
information if required.
Personnel Protection
• Installation, operation, and maintenance shall be performed by Qualified Personnel Only.
• A thorough understanding of the H9 ASD will be required before the installation, operation, or
maintenance of the H9 ASD.
• Rotating machinery and live conductors can be hazardous and shall not come into contact with
humans. Personnel should be protected from all rotating machinery and electrical hazards at all
times.
• Insulators, machine guards, and electrical safeguards may fail or be defeated by the purposeful or
inadvertent actions of workers. Insulators, machine guards, and electrical safeguards are to be
inspected (and tested where possible) at installation and periodically after installation for potential
hazardous conditions.
•DO NOT allow personnel near rotating machinery. Warning signs to this effect shall be posted at or
near the machinery.
•DO NOT allow personnel near electrical conductors. Human contact with electrical conductors can
be fatal. Warning signs to this effect shall be posted at or near the hazard.
• Personal protection equipment shall be provided and used to protect employees from any hazards
inherent to system operation.
• Follow all warnings and precautions and do not exceed equipment ratings.
WARNING
8H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
System Setup Requirements
• When using the H9 ASD as an integral part of a larger system, it is the responsibility of the
H9 ASD installer or maintenance personnel to ensure that there is a fail-safe in place, i.e., an
arrangement designed to switch the system to a safe condition if there is a fault or failure.
• System safety features should be employed and designed into the integrated system in a manner
such that system operation, even in the event of system failure, will not cause harm or result in
personnel injury or system damage (i.e., E-Off, Auto-Restart settings, System Interlocks, etc.).
• The programming setup and system configuration of the H9 ASD may allow it to start the motor
unexpectedly. A familiarity with the Auto-restart settings are a requirement to use this product.
• Improperly designed or improperly installed system interlocks may render the motor unable to start
or stop on command.
• The failure of external or ancillary components may cause intermittent system operation, i.e., the
system may start the motor without warning.
• There may be thermal or physical properties, or ancillary devices integrated into the overall system
that may allow for the H9 ASD to start the motor without warning. Signs at the equipment
installation must be posted to this effect.
• Power factor improvement capacitors or surge absorbers must not be installed on the output of the
H9 ASD.
• Use of the built-in system protective features is highly recommended (i.e., E-Off, Overload
Protection, etc.).
• The operating controls and system status indicators should be clearly readable and positioned
where the operator can see them without obstruction.
• Additional warnings and notifications shall be posted at the equipment installation location as
deemed required by Qualified Personnel.
• Follow all warnings and precautions and do not exceed equipment ratings.
• If a secondary magnetic contactor (MC) or an ASD output disconnect is used between the H9 ASD
and the load, it should be interlocked to halt the H9 ASD before the secondary contact opens. If the
output contactor is used for bypass operation, it must be interlocked such that commercial power is
never applied to the H9 ASD output terminals (U, V, W).
• When using an ASD output disconnect the ASD and the motor must be stopped before the
disconnect is either opened or closed. Closing the output disconnect while the 3-phase output of the
ASD is active may result in equipment damage or injury to personnel.
CAUTION
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 9
Operational and Maintenance
Precautions
• Turn off, lockout, and tag out the main power, the control power, and instrumentation connections
before inspecting or servicing the drive, or opening the door of the enclosure.
• Turn off, lockout, and tag out the main power, the control power, and instrumentation connections
before proceeding to disconnect or connect the power wiring to the equipment.
• The capacitors of the H9 ASD maintain a residual charge for a period of time after turning the ASD
off. The required time for each ASD typeform is indicated with a cabinet label and a Charge LED.
Wait for at least the minimum time indicated on the enclosure-mounted label and ensure that the
Charge LED has gone out before opening the door of the ASD once the ASD power has been
turned off.
• Turn the power on only after attaching (or closing) the front cover and Do Not remove the front
cover of the H9 ASD when the power is on.
•Do Not attempt to disassemble, modify, or repair the H9 ASD. Call your Toshiba sales
representative for repair information.
• Do not place any objects inside of the H9 ASD.
• If the H9 ASD should emit smoke or an unusual odor or sound, turn the power off immediately.
• The heat sink and other components may become extremely hot to the touch. Allow the unit to cool
before coming in contact with these items.
• Remove power from the H9 ASD during extended periods of non-use.
• The system should be inspected periodically for damaged or improperly functioning parts,
cleanliness, and to ensure that the connectors are tightened securely.
WARNING
10 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Motor Characteristics
Listed below are some variable speed AC motor control concepts with which the user of the
H9 Adjustable Speed Drive should become familiar.
Motor Autotuning
Motor production methods may cause minor differences in the motor operation. The negative effects of
these differences may be minimized by using the Autotune feature of the H9 ASD. Autotuning is a
function of the H9 ASD that measures several parameters of the connected motor and places these
readings in a stored table. The software uses the information in the table to help optimize the response of
the ASD to application-specific load and operational requirements. The Autotuning function may be
enabled for automatic tuning, configured manually at F400, or disabled.
The measured parameters include the rotor resistance, the stator resistance, the required excitation
inductance, rotational inertia values, and leakage inductance values.
Pulse Width Modulation Operation
The H9 ASD uses a sinusoidal Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) control system. The output current
waveform generated by the ASD approaches that of a perfect sine wave; however, the output waveform is
slightly distorted. For this reason, the motor may produce more heat, noise, and vibration when operated
by an ASD, rather than directly from commercial power.
Low Speed Operation
Operating a general-purpose motor at lower speeds may cause a decrease in the cooling ability of the
motor. Reducing the torque requirement of the motor at lower speeds will decrease the generated heat at
lower speeds.
When the motor is to be operated at low speed (less than 50% of full speed) and at the rated torque
continuously, a Toshiba VF motor (designed for use in conjunction with an ASD) is recommended.
Overload Protection Adjustment
The H9 ASD software monitors the output current of the system and determines when an overload
condition occurs. The overload current level is a percentage of the rating of the motor. This function
protects the motor from overload.
The default setting for the overload detection circuit is set to the maximum rated current of the ASD at the
factory. This setting will have to be adjusted to match the rating of the motor with which the ASD is to be
used. To change the overload reference level, see Motor Overload Protection Level 1 on pg. 182.
Operation Above 60 Hz
A motor produces more noise and vibration when it is operated at frequencies above 60 Hz. Also, when
operating a motor above 60 Hz, the rated limit of the motor or its bearings may be exceeded; this may void
the motor warranty.
Contact the motor manufacturer for additional information before operating the motor above 60 Hz.
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 11
Power Factor Correction
DO NOT connect a power factor correction capacitor or surge absorber to the output of the H9 ASD.
If the ASD is used with a motor that is equipped with a capacitor for power factor correction, remove the
capacitor from the motor.
Connecting either of these devices to the output of the ASD may cause the ASD to malfunction and trip,
or the output device may cause an over-current condition resulting in damage to the device or the ASD.
Light Load Conditions
When a motor is operated under a continuous light load (i.e., at a load of less than 50% of its rated
capacity) or it drives a load which produces a very small amount of inertia, it may become unstable and
produce abnormal vibration or trips because of an over-current condition. In such a case, the carrier
frequency may be lowered to compensate for this undesirable condition (see Program ⇒ Special ⇒
Carrier Frequency ⇒ PWM Carrier Frequency).
Note: When operating in the Vector Control mode the carrier frequency should be set to
2.2 kHz or above.
Motor/Load Combinations
When the H9 ASD is used in combination with one of the following motors or loads, it may result in
unstable operation.
• A motor with a rated capacity that exceeds the motor capacity recommended for the ASD.
• An explosion-proof motor.
When using the ASD with an explosion-proof motor or other special motor types, lower the carrier
frequency to stabilize the operation. DO NOT set the carrier frequency below 2.2 kHz if operating the
system in the vector control mode.
Note: When operating in the Vector Control mode the carrier frequency should be set to
2.2 kHz or above.
• If the motor that is coupled to a load that has a large backlash or a reciprocating load, use one of the
following procedures to stabilize its operation.
• Adjust the S-pattern acceleration/deceleration setting,
• If in the Vector control mode, adjust the response time, or
• Switch to the Constant Torque control mode.
12 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Load-produced Negative Torque
When the H9 ASD is used with a load that produces negative torque (an overhauling load), the over-
voltage or over-current protective functions of the ASD may cause nuisance tripping.
To minimize the undesirable effects of negative torque the dynamic braking system may be used. The
dynamic braking system converts the regenerated energy into heat that is dissipated using a braking
resistor. The braking resistor must be suitably matched to the load. Dynamic braking is also effective in
reducing the DC bus voltage during a momentary over-voltage condition.
If under extreme conditions the dynamic braking system or a component of this system were to fail, the
dynamic braking resistor may experience an extended over-current condition. The DBR circuit was
designed to dissipate excessive amounts of heat and if the extended over-current condition were allowed
to exceed the circuit parameters, this condition could result in a fire hazard.
To combat this condition, the 3-phase input may be connected using contactors that are configured to open
in the event of an extended DBR over-current condition or an internal circuit failure. Using a thermal
sensor and/or overload protection as the 3-phase input contactor drive signal, the contactors will open and
remove the 3-phase input power in the event of an extended DBR over-current or system over-voltage
condition.
Motor Braking
The motor may continue to rotate and coast to a stop after being shut off due to the inertia of the load. If an
immediate stop is required, a braking system should be used. The two most common types of motor
braking systems used with the H9 ASD are DC Injection Braking and Dynamic Braking.
For further information on braking systems, see DC Injection Braking on pg. 124 and Dynamic Braking
on pg. 136.
CAUTION
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 13
H9 ASD Characteristics
Over-current Protection
Each H9 ASD model was designed for a specified operating power range. The H9 ASD will incur a trip if
the design specifications are exceeded.
However, the H9 ASD may be operated at 100% of the specified output-current range continuously or at
120% for a limited amount of time as indicated in the section titled Current/Voltage Specifications on pg.
263. Also, the Stall Prevention Level may be adjusted to help with nuisance over-current trips (see F601).
When using the H9 ASD for an application that controls a motor which is rated significantly less than the
maximum current rating of the ASD, the over-current limit (Thermal Overload Protection) setting will
have to be changed to match the FLA of the motor. For further information on this parameter, see Motor
Overload Protection Level 1 on pg. 182.
ASD Capacity
The H9 ASD must not be used with a motor that has a significantly larger capacity, even if the motor is
operated under a small load. An ASD being used in this way will be susceptible to a high-output peak
current which may result in nuisance tripping.
Do not apply a level of input voltage to an ASD that is beyond that which the ASD is rated. The input
voltage may be stepped down when required with the use of a step-down transformer or some other type
of voltage-reduction system.
Using Vector Control
Using Vector Control enables the system to produce very high torque over the entire operating range
even at extremely low speeds. Vector Control may be used with or without feedback. However, using
feedback increases the speed accuracy for applications requiring precise speed control.
See F015 on pg. 81 for further information on using Vector Control.
14 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Installation and Connections
The H9 True Torque Control2 Adjustable Speed Drive may be set up initially by performing a few
simple configuration settings. To operate properly, the ASD must be securely mounted and connected to
a power source (3-phase AC input at the R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3 terminals). The control terminals of the
H9 ASD may be used by connecting the terminals of the Terminal Board to the proper sensors or
signal input sources (see the section titled I/O and Control on pg. 21
and
Figure 9 on pg. 24).
System performance may be further enhanced by assigning a function to the output terminals of the
Terminal Board and connecting the terminals to the proper indicators or actuators (relays, contactors,
LEDs, etc.).
Note: The optional H9 ASD interface boards may be used to expand the I/O functionality of
the H9 ASD.
Installation Notes
When a brake-equipped motor is connected to the H9 ASD, it is possible that the brake may not release
at startup because of insufficient voltage. To avoid this, DO NOT connect the brake or the brake
contactor to the output of the H9 ASD.
If an output contactor is used for bypass operation, it must be interlocked such that commercial power is
never applied to the output terminals of the H9 ASD (U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3).
DO NOT apply commercial power to the H9 ASD output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3.
If a secondary magnetic contactor (MC) is used between the output of the H9 ASD and the motor, it
should be interlocked such that the ST – CC connection is disconnected before the output contactor is
opened.
DO NOT open and then close a secondary magnetic contactor between the H9 ASD and the motor
unless the ASD is off and the motor is not rotating.
Note: Re-application of power via a secondary contact while the H9 ASD is on or while the
motor is still turning may cause ASD damage.
The H9 ASD input voltage should remain within 10% of the specified input voltage range. Input
voltages approaching the upper or lower limit settings may require that the overvoltage and
undervoltage stall protection level parameters be adjusted. Voltages outside of the permissible tolerance
should be avoided.
The frequency of the input power should be ±2 Hz of the specified input frequency.
DO NOT use an ASD with a motor that has a current rating that is higher than the rated current of the
ASD.
The H9 ASD is designed to operate NEMA B motors. Consult with your sales representative before
using the ASD for special applications such as with an explosion-proof motor or applications with a
piston load.
Disconnect the H9 ASD from the motor before megging or applying a bypass voltage to the motor.
Interface problems may occur when an ASD is used in conjunction with some types of process
controllers. Signal isolation may be required to prevent controller and/or ASD malfunction (contact
your Toshiba sales representative or the process controller manufacturer for additional information
about compatibility and signal isolation).
CAUTION
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 15
Use caution when setting the output frequency. Over speeding a motor decreases its ability to deliver
torque and may result in damage to the motor and/or the driven equipment.
Not all H9 ASDs are equipped with internal primary power input fuses (HP dependent). When
connecting two or more drives that have no internal fuse to the same power line as shown in Figure 1,
select a circuit-breaking configuration that will ensure that if a short circuit occurs in ASD 1, only
MCCB2 trips, not MCCB1. If it is not feasible to use this configuration, insert a fuse between MCCB2
and ASD 1.
Mounting the H9 ASD
— The following thermal specifications apply to the 230- and the 460-volt ASDs ONLY —
Install the unit securely in a well ventilated area that is out of direct sunlight.
The process of converting AC to DC, and then back to AC produces heat. During normal ASD
operation, up to 5% of the input energy to the ASD may be dissipated as heat. If installing the ASD in a
cabinet, ensure that there is adequate ventilation.
DO NOT operate the H9 ASD with the enclosure door open.
The ambient operating temperature rating of the 3.0 to 20 HP H9 ASD is 14° to 104° F (-10° to 40° C).
The ambient operating temperature rating of the 25 HP and above H9 ASDs is 14° to 122° F (-10° to
50° C). If the ASD is being operated above its specified range derate the ASD and in accordance with
the Carrier Frequency/Derating specifications listed in Figure 31 on pg. 190 — and provide a minimum
clearance space of 20 cm above and below the ASD from any obstruction.
The aforementioned thermal specifications apply to the 230- and the 460-volt ASDs.
When installing adjacent ASDs horizontally Toshiba recommends that there be at least 5 cm of space
between adjacent units. However, horizontally mounted ASDs may be installed side-by-side with no
space in between the adjacent units — Side-by-side installations require that the top cover be removed
from each ASD.
For 150 HP ASDs and above, a minimum of 50 cm of space is required above and below adjacent units
and any obstruction.This space is the recommended minimum space requirement for the H9 ASD and
ensures that adequate ventilation is provided for each unit. More space will provide a better
environment for cooling (see the section titled Enclosure Dimensions and Conduit Plate Information on
pg. 256 for additional information on mounting space requirements).
Note: Ensure that the ventilation openings are not obstructed.
Figure 1. Typical circuit breaker configuration.
CAUTION
16 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Connecting the H9 ASD
Refer to the section titled Installation Precautions on pg. 4 and the section titled Lead Length
Specifications on pg. 20 before attempting to connect the H9 ASD and the motor to electrical power.
Power Connections
Contact with the 3-phase input or output terminals may cause an electrical shock
resulting in injury or loss of life.
See Figure 20 on pg. 26 for a system I/O connectivity schematic.
An inductor (DCL) may be connected across the PO and PA/+ terminals to provide additional filtering.
When not used, a jumper must be connected across these terminals (see Figure 20 on pg. 26).
PA/+ and PB are used for the DBR connection if using a braking resistor.
PC/- is the negative terminal of the DC bus.
R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3 are the 3-phase input supply terminals for the H9 ASD.
U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 are the output terminals of the H9 ASD that connect to the motor.
The location of the Charge LED for the smaller typeform ASD is provided in Figure 2. The Charge
LED is located on the front door of the enclosure of the larger ASDs.
Figure 2. Typical H9 ASD input/output terminals and the Grounding Capacitor Switch.
DANGER
DANGER
Charge LED
Grounding Capacitor Switch — Pull for Small capacitance/Push for Large capacitance.
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 17
Power Connection Requirements
Connect the 3-phase input power to the input terminals of the H9 ASD at R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3 (see
Figure 3 for the typical electrical connection scheme). Connect the output of the ASD to the motor from
the ASD terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3. The input and output conductors and terminal lugs used
shall be in accordance with the requirements listed in the section titled Current/Voltage Specifications
on pg. 263.
If multiple conductors are used in parallel for the input or output power and it is necessary to use
separate conduits, each parallel set shall have its own conduit and not share its conduit with other
parallel sets — i.e., place U1, V1, and W1 in one conduit and U2, V2, and W2 in another (refer to NEC
Article 300.20 and Article 310.4). National and local electrical codes should be referenced if three or
more power conductors are run in the same conduit (refer to 2005 NEC Article 310 adjustment factors).
Note: National and local codes should be referenced when running more than three
conductors in the same conduit.
Install a molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) or fuse between the 3-phase power source and the H9
ASD in accordance with the fault current setting of the H9 ASD and 2005 NEC Article 430.
The H9 ASD is designed and tested to comply with UL Standard 508C. Modifications to the ASD
system or failure to comply with the short circuit protection requirements outlined in this manual may
disqualify the UL rating. See Table 22 on pg. 267 for typeform-specific short circuit protection
recommendations.
As a minimum, the installation of the H9 ASD shall conform to 2005 NEC Article 110, the
Occupational Safety and Health Administration requirements, and to any other local and regional
industry codes and standards.
Note: In the event that the motor rotates in the wrong direction when powered up, reverse
any two of the three H9 ASD output power leads (U, V, or W) connected to the motor.
Figure 3. H9 ASD/Motor typical connection scheme.
18 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
System Grounding
Proper grounding helps to prevent electrical shock and to reduce electrical noise. The H9 ASD is
designed to be grounded in accordance with Article 250 of the 2005 NEC or Section 10/Part One of
the Canadian Electrical Code (CEC).
The grounding conductor shall be sized in accordance with Article 250-122 of the NEC or Part One-
Table 6 of the CEC.
The Metal Of Conduit Is Not An Acceptable Ground.
The input, output, and control lines of the system shall be run in separate metal conduits and each shall
have its own ground conductor.
ASDs produce high-frequency noise — take steps to avoid the negative effects of noise. Listed below
are some examples of measures that will help to combat noise problems.
•DO NOT install the input power and output power wires in the same duct or in parallel with each
other, and do not bind them together.
•DO NOT install the input/output power wires and the wires of the control circuit in the same duct
or in parallel with each other, and do not bind them together.
• Use shielded wires or twisted wires for the control circuits.
• Ensure that the grounding terminals (G/E) of the H9 ASD are securely connected to ground.
• Connect a surge suppressor to every electromagnetic contactor and every relay installed near the
ASD.
• Install noise filters as required.
The Grounding Capacitor Switch and the 3-phase input and output terminals are shown on pg. 16 (see
pg. 5 for more information on the Grounding Capacitor Switch).
Grounding Capacitor
The Grounding Capacitor plays a role in minimizing the effects of leakage current through the ASD
system and through ground paths to other systems. Leakage current may cause the improper operation
of earth-leakage current breakers, leakage-current relays, ground relays, fire alarms, and other sensors
— and it may cause superimposed noise on CRT screens.
The Grounding Capacitor Switch allows the user to quickly change the value of the leakage-reduction
capacitance of the 3-phase input circuit. See figures 4, 5, 6, and 7 on pg. 19 for an electrical depiction of
the leakage-reduction functionality and the methods used to change the capacitance value. The method
used is typeform-specific.
If using a 460-volt 5 HP ASD or a 460-volt ASD that is in the range of 7.5 HP to 25 HP, and the U/T1,
V/T2, and W/T3 connections to the motor are 100 meters or more in length, the ASD Carrier
Frequency must be set to 4 kHz or less when activating or deactivating the Grounding Capacitor
Switch. ASD overheating may occur if the Carrier Frequency is set above 4 kHz when activating or
deactivating the Grounding Capacitor Switch.
See pg. 5 for more information on the Grounding Capacitor Switch and pg. 16 for the location.
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 19
Figure 4. The Grounding Capacitor Switch is
used on typeforms 230-volt 0.5 HP to 10 HP
and the 25 and 30 HP/460-volt 1.0 HP to
250 HP.
The value may be set to Maximum (default
setting) or to zero by pushing or pulling the
switch actuator, respectively.
Figure 5. The Grounding Capacitor
Switch is used on typeforms 230-volt
15 HP to 20 HP and the 40 HP to 60
HP/460-volt 30 HP to 100 HP.
The value may be set to Large
(default setting) or Small by pushing
or pulling the switch actuator,
respectively.
Figure 6. The Grounding Capacitor Bar is
used on typeforms 230-volt 75 HP and the
100 HP/460-volt 125 HP and the 150 HP.
The value may set to Large or Small (default
setting) by connecting or disconnecting the
switching bar, respectively.
Figure 7. The Grounding Capacitor Screw is
used on typeforms 460-volt 175 HP and
above.
The value may set to Large or Small (default
setting) by placing the screw in the A position
or by placing the screw in the B position,
respectively.
20 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Lead Length Specifications
Adhere to the NEC and any local codes during the installation of ASD/Motor systems. Excessive lead
lengths may adversely effect the performance of the motor. Special cables are not required. Lead lengths
from the ASD to the motor in excess of those listed in Table 1 may require filters to be added to the output
of the ASD. Table 1 lists the suggested maximum lead lengths for the listed motor voltages.
Note: Contact Toshiba for application assistance when using lead lengths in excess of those
listed.
Exceeding the peak voltage rating or the allowable thermal rise time of the motor
insulation will reduce the life expectancy of the motor.
When operating in the Vector Control mode the carrier frequency should be set to
2.2 kHz or above.
Table 1.
Model PWM Carrier
Frequency
NEMA MG-1-1998 Section IV Part 31
Compliant Motors2
230 Volt All 1000 feet
460 Volt < 5 kHz 600 feet
≥ 5 kHz 300 feet
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 21
I/O and Control
The H9 ASD can be controlled by several input types and combinations thereof, as well as operate within
a wide range of output frequency and voltage levels. This section discusses the H9 ASD control methods
and supported I/O functions.
The Terminal Board supports discrete and analog I/O functions and is shown in Figure 9 on pg. 24. Table
2 lists the names, functions, and the settings (default settings of programmable terminals) of the input and
output terminals of the Terminal Board.
Note: To use the input lines of the Terminal Board to provide Run commands the Command
Mode setting must be set to Terminal Block.
Figure 20 on pg. 26 shows the typical connection diagram for the H9 ASD system.
Table 2. Terminal Board terminal names and functions.
Term. Name Input/Output Function (Default setting if programmable)
(see Terminal Descriptions on pg. 22)Circuit Config.
ST
Discrete Input
Connect to CC
to activate
(Sink mode).
Standby — Multifunctional programmable discrete input. Activation required
for normal ASD operation.
Figure 10 on pg. 25.
RES Reset — Multifunctional programmable discrete input. Resets ASD.
FForward — Multifunctional programmable discrete input.
RReverse — Multifunctional programmable discrete input.
S1 Preset Speed 1 — Multifunctional programmable discrete input.
S2 Preset Speed 2 — Multifunctional programmable discrete input.
S3 Preset Speed 3 — Multifunctional programmable discrete input.
S4 Preset Speed 4 — Multifunctional programmable discrete input.
O1A/B (OUT1)
Switched
Output
Low Speed — Multifunctional programmable discrete output. Figure 16 on pg. 25.
O2A/B (OUT2)Reach Frequency — Multifunctional programmable discrete output.
FLC Fault relay (common).
Figure 19 on pg. 25.
FLB Fault relay (N.C.).
FLA Fault relay (N.O.).
RR
Analog Input
Multifunction programmable analog input (0.0 to 10 volt input — 0 Hz to
Maximum Frequency). Reference CCA.Figure 11 on pg. 25.
RX Multifunctional programmable analog input (-10 to +10 VDC input —
0 to ±Maximum Frequency). Reference CCA.Figure 12 on pg. 25.
V/I
(Select V or I
via SW301)
V — Multifunctional programmable isolated analog voltage input
(0 to 10 VDC input — 0 to Maximum Frequency output). Reference IICC.Figure 13 on pg. 25.
I — Multifunctional programmable isolated analog current input (0 [4] to
20 mADC input — 0 to Maximum Frequency output). Reference IICC.
AM
Analog
Output
Current output that is proportional to the magnitude of the function assigned
to this terminal (see Table 6 on pg. 239). Reference CC.
Figure 18 on pg. 25
FM Current or voltage output that is proportional to the magnitude of the function
assigned to this terminal (see Table 6 on pg. 239). The output selection is set
at F681. Reference CC.
SU+ DC Input Externally-supplied 24 VDC backup control power (1.1 A max.). Reference CC.
P24 DC Output 24 VDC (200 mA max.) output. Reference CCA.Figure 14 on pg. 25.
PP 10.0 VDC/10 mA voltage source for the external potentiometer. CCA Ref. Figure 15 on pg. 25.
FP Pulsed Output Frequency Pulse — Multifunctional programmable output pulse train of a
frequency based on the output frequency of the ASD (see Table 6 on pg. 239). Figure 17 on pg. 25.
IICC —Return for the V/I input terminal. Do Not connect to
Earth Gnd or to
each other.
CCA —Return for the RR, RX, P24, and the PP terminals.
CC —Return for discrete input terminals and the SU+ input terminal.
22 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Terminal Descriptions
Note: The programmable terminal assignments may be accessed and changed from their
default settings as mapped on pg. 46 or via the Direct Access method: Program ⇒
Direct Access ⇒ applicable parameter number. See the section titled Program Mode
Menu Navigation on pg. 46 for the applicable Direct Access parameter numbers.
For further information on terminal assignments and default setting changes, see the
sections titled Default Setting Changes on pg. 74 and Terminal on pg. 47.
Note: See the section titled Cable/Terminal/Torque Specifications on pg. 265 for the H9
ASD conductor and terminal electrical specifications.
Note: Programmable terminals will not retain their settings indefinitely in the event of a
power loss. Connect an external +24VDC supply to the SU+ terminal to retain the
programmable settings in the event of Control Power loss (see Figure 20 on pg. 26).
ST — The default setting for this terminal is the Standby mode controller. As the default setting, this
terminal must be activated for normal system operation. The ST terminal is activated by connecting CC
to this terminal (Sink mode). When deactivated the Not Ready to Run icon is displayed on the LCD
screen as shown in Figure 22. on pg. 31.This input terminal may be programmed to any one of the
functions that are listed in Table 5 on pg. 236 (see F113).
RES — The default setting for this terminal is Reset. The RES terminal is activated by connecting CC
to this terminal (Sink mode). A momentary connection to CC resets the ASD and any fault indications
from the display. Reset is effective when faulted only. This input terminal may be programmed to any
one of the functions that are listed in Table 5 on pg. 236 (see F114).
F — The default setting for this terminal is the Forward Run Command. The F terminal is activated
by connecting CC to this terminal (Sink mode). This input terminal may be programmed to any one of
the functions that are listed in Table 5 on pg. 236 (see F111).
R — The default setting for this terminal is the Reverse Run Command. The R terminal is activated
by connecting CC to this terminal (Sink mode). This input terminal may be programmed to any one of
the functions that are listed in Table 5 on pg. 236 (see F112).
S1 — The default setting for this terminal is the Preset Speed #1 Command. The S1 terminal is
activated by connecting CC to this terminal (Sink mode). This input terminal may be programmed to
any one of the functions that are listed in Table 5 on pg. 236 (see F115).
S2 — The default setting for this terminal is the Preset Speed #2 Command. The S2 terminal is
activated by connecting CC to this terminal (Sink mode). This input terminal may be programmed to
any one of the functions that are listed in Table 5 on pg. 236 (see F116).
S3 — The default setting for this terminal is the Preset Speed #3 Command. The S3 terminal is
activated by connecting CC to this terminal (Sink mode). This input terminal may be programmed to
any one of the functions that are listed in Table 5 on pg. 236 (see F117).
S4 — The default setting for this terminal is the Preset Speed #4 Command. The S4 terminal is
activated by connecting CC to this terminal (Sink mode). This input terminal may be programmed to
any one of the functions that are listed in Table 5 on pg. 236 (see F118).
RR — The default function assigned to this terminal is the Frequency Mode 1 setting. The RR
terminal accepts a 0 – 10 VDC input signal that is used to carry out the function assigned to this
terminal. This input terminal may be programmed to control the speed or torque of the motor via an
amplitude setting or regulate by setting a limit. The gain and bias of this terminal may be adjusted for
application-specific suitability (see F210 – F215). See Figure 20 on pg. 26 for an electrical depiction of
the RR terminal. This terminal references CCA.
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 23
RX — The default function assigned to this terminal is the Torque Command setting. The RX terminal
accepts a ±10 VDC input signal that is used to carry out the function assigned to this terminal. This
input terminal may be programmed to raise or lower the speed or torque of the motor via an amplitude
setting or this terminal may be used to regulate the speed or torque of a motor by setting a limit. The
gain and bias of this terminal may be adjusted for application-specific suitability (see F216 – F221). See
Figure 20 on pg. 26 for an electrical depiction of the RX terminal. This terminal references CCA.
V/I (I) — The function of the I input is to receive a 0 – 20 mA input signal that controls a 0 – 80 Hz
output. This is an isolated input terminal. This terminal is identified as V/I on the terminal board and
may be programmed to control the speed or torque of the motor. This terminal cannot be used when
using the V input function. SW301 must be set to I to receive a current input signal at this terminal and
is the default setting from the factory (see Figure 9 on pg. 24). This terminal references IICC. Scaling
of the V/I terminal is accomplished via F201 – F206. The gain and bias of this terminal may be adjusted
for application-specific suitability (see F470 and F471).
V/I (V) — The function of the V input terminal is to receive a 0 – 10 VDC input signal that controls a
0 – 80 Hz output. This is an isolated input terminal. This terminal is identified as V/I on the terminal
board and may be programmed to control the speed or torque of the motor. This terminal cannot be used
when using the I input. SW301 must be set to V to receive a voltage input signal at this terminal (see
Figure 9 on pg. 24). This terminal references IICC. Scaling of the V/I terminal is accomplished via
F201 – F206. The gain and bias of this terminal may be adjusted for application-specific suitability
(F470 and F471).
SU+ — Externally supplied +24 VDC ± 10% @ 1.1 A (minimum) backup control power. This terminal
references CC.
P24 — +24 VDC @ 200 mA power supply for customer use. This terminal references CCA.
PP — The function of output PP is to provide a 10 VDC/10 mADC output that may be divided using a
potentiometer. The tapped voltage is applied to the RR input to provide manual control of the RR
programmed function. This terminal references CCA.
O1A/B (OUT1A/B) — The default function assigned to this terminal is Output Low Speed. This
output may be programmed to provide an indication (open or closed) that any 1 of the functions that are
listed in Table 8 on pg. 241 has taken place. This function may be used to signal external equipment or
to activate the brake (see F130). The OUT1 terminal is rated at 2 A/120 VAC and 2 A/30 VDC.
O2A/B (OUT2A/B) — The default function assigned to this terminal is ACC/DEC Complete. This
output may be programmed to provide an indication (open or closed) that any 1 of the functions that are
listed in Table 8 on pg. 241 has taken place. This function may be used to signal external equipment or
to activate the brake (see F131). The OUT2 terminal is rated at 2A/120 VAC and 2A/30 VDC.
FP — The default function of this output terminal is to output a series of pulses at a rate that is a
function of the output frequency of the ASD. As the output frequency of the ASD goes up so does the
FP output pulse rate. This terminal may be programmed to provide an output pulse rate that is
proportional to any one of the items listed in Table 6 on pg. 239. For further information on this terminal
see F676 on pg. 196.
AM — This output terminal produces an output current that is proportional to the magnitude of the
function assigned to this terminal. The available assignments for this output terminal are listed in Table
6 on pg. 239. For further information on this terminal see F670 on pg. 194.
FM — This output terminal produces an output current or voltage that is proportional to the magnitude
of the function assigned to this terminal. The available assignments for this output terminal are listed in
Table 6 on pg. 239. For further information on this terminal see F005 on pg. 78. The Voltage/Current
output selection is performed at F681.
SU+
P24
PP
24 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
FLC — FLC is the common leg of a single-pole double-throw form C relay. The FL relay is the Fault
Relay by default, but may be programmed to any one of the conditions listed in Table 8 on pg. 241. For
further information on this terminal see F132 and Figure 8.
FLB — The normally-closed leg of the FL relay.
FLA — The normally-open leg of the FL relay.
Note: The FLA, FLB, and FLC contacts are rated at 2A/120 VAC and 2A/30 VDC.
Figure 8. FLA, FLB, and FLC switching contacts shown in the de-energized state.
Figure 9. Terminal Board. Sink Source
See the section titled Terminal Descriptions on pg. 22 for terminal descriptions.
See the section titled Cable/Terminal/Torque Specifications on pg. 265 for information on the proper
cable/terminal sizes and torque specifications when making Terminal Board connections.
FLC
FLB
FLA
Note: The relay is shown in the Faulted or de-energized condition.
During normal system operation the relay connection is FLC-
to-FLA.
J101
TB1
TB2
TB3
J100
SW200
TB4
SW301
RES
CC
F
R
S1
S2
S3
S4
CC
ST
FP
+SU
Ensure that the ground screw is securely in place to
prevent arcing, intermittent operation, or system
failure.
1 to 2 = Sink
2 to 3 = Source
1 to 2 = System Supplied
2 to 3 = Ext. Supplied
(24V)
V/I Switch
See Figure 20 on pg. 26 for more information on the Terminal Board connections.
Half/Full Duplex Switch
CAUTION
S4
RS485 4-Wire Communication
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 25
I/O Circuit Configurations
Figure 10. Discrete Input. Figure 11. RR Input.
Figure 12. RX Input. Figure 13. V/I Isolated Input.
Figure 14. P24 Output. Figure 15. PP Output.
Figure 16. OUT1/OUT2 Output. Figure 17. FP Output.
Figure 18. AM/FM Output. Figure 19. Fault Relay (shown faulted).
26 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Typical Connection Diagram
Figure 20. The H9 ASD typical connection diagram.
Note: The AM, FM, and the +SU analog terminals are referenced to CC.
Note: The RR, RX, P24, and the PP analog terminals are referenced to CCA.
Note: The isolated V/I analog terminal references IICC.
Note: When connecting multiple wires to the PA, PB, PC, or PO
terminals, do not connect a solid wire and a stranded wire to the
same terminal.
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 27
Startup and Test
Before turning on the ASD ensure that:
•R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3 are connected to the 3-phase input power.
•U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 are connected to the motor.
• The 3-phase input voltage is within the specified tolerance.
• There are no shorts and all grounds are secured.
• All personnel are at a safe distance from the motor and the motor-driven equipment.
28 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Electronic Operator Interface
The H9 ASD Electronic Operator Interface (EOI) is comprised of an LED display, an LCD display, two
LEDs, a rotary encoder, and five keys. These items are described below and their locations are provided in
Figure 21. on pg. 29.
EOI Operation
The EOI is the primary input/output device for the user. The EOI may be used to monitor system
functions, input data into the system, perform diagnostics, and view performance data (e.g., motor
frequency, bus voltage, torque, etc.).
The software used with the H9 ASD is menu driven; thus, making it a select and click environment. The
operating parameters of a motor may be selected and viewed or changed using the EOI (or via
communications).
EOI Remote Mounting
The EOI may be mounted remotely using the optional ASD-MTG-KIT9. The kit contains all of the
hardware required to mount the EOI of the 9-Series ASD remotely.
System operation and EOI operation while using the remotely-mounted EOI are the same as with the
ASD-mounted configuration.
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 29
EOI Features
Figure 21. The H9 ASD Electronic Operator Interface features.
LED Display — Displays the running frequency, and active Fault and/or active Alarm information.
Rotary Encoder — Used to access the H9 ASD menu selections, change the value of a displayed
parameter, and performs the Enter key function. Turn the Rotary Encoder either clockwise or
counterclockwise to perform the Up or Down functions of the displayed menu selection. Press the Rotary
Encoder to perform the Enter (select) function.
LCD Display — Displays configuration information, performance data (e.g., output frequency, bus
voltage, torque, etc.), diagnostic information, and LED Display information in expanded normal text.
Local|Remote Key — Toggles the system to and from the Local and Remote modes. The
Local|Remote Key is disabled while the Fault screen is displayed. The LED is on when the system is in
the Local Command mode. The Local mode allows the Command and Frequency control functions to
be carried out via the EOI.
The Remote mode enables the Command and Frequency control functions to be carried out via the
Terminal Board, RS485, Communication Board, or Pulse Input. The selection may be made via
Program ⇒ Fundamental ⇒ Standard Mode Selection ⇒ Command Mode and Frequency Mode 1,
respectively.
The availability of Local mode control (Command and Frequency control) may be disabled via Program
⇒ Utilities ⇒ Prohibition ⇒ Local/Remote Key Command Override and Local/Remote Key
Frequency Override. The availability of the Local mode of operation may be reinstated by changing this
setting or performing a Reset (see F007).
ESC Key — The Escape key returns the system to the previous level of the menu tree, toggles between
the EOI Command screen and the Frequency Command screen, or cancels changes made to a field if
pressed while still in the reverse video mode (dark background/light text). The 3 functions are menu-
specific.
Run Key — Issues the Run command while in the Local mode. The Run key LED Illuminates green
while stopped or red while running to alert personnel.
Mode Key — Provides a means to access the three root menus. Pressing the Mode Key key repeatedly
loops the system through the three root menus (see Figure 27 on pg. 41). While looping through the root
menus, the Program menu will display the root menu screen or the Program sub-menu item being
accessed prior to pressing the Mode key.
LCD Display
Rotary Encoder
Local/Remote
Mode
Key
Press for Enter Key
Escape Key
Stop|Reset Key
Key (LED)
Run Key
(LED)
LED Display
LED / LCD Display
}
01:14
Selected
Number
item:
(01)
of items:
(14)
Program
Terminal...
Direct Access...
Utilities...
Protection...
Fundamental...
30 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Stop|Reset Key — This key has three functions.
1. Issues the Off command (decelerates to Stop at the programmed rate) if pressed once while in the
Local mode.
2. Initiates an Emergency Off Fault if pressed twice quickly from the Local or Remote modes. The
Emergency Off function terminates the H9 ASD output and applies the brake if so configured.
3. Resets active Faults and/or active Alarms if pressed twice quickly. The source of the Fault or
Alarm must be determined and corrected before normal ASD operation can resume.
Run Key Status LED — Illuminates green while stopped or red while running.
LED Display
The LED display is used to display the output frequency, active alarms and/or active faults.
If there are no active alarms or faults, the output frequency is displayed.
During an active alarm, the display toggles to and from the running frequency and the active alarm.
During an active fault, the fault is displayed.
LED Character/Font Information
Characters displayed on the LED display will be of
the seven-segment format. Not all alpha-numeric
characters are available or used with the LED
display.
Listed are the seven-segment characters used at the
LED display along with the same characters as
they are displayed on the LCD Display.
LED/LCD Display Information
LED LCD LED LCD
AA11
bb22
CC33
dd44
EE55
FF66
GG77
HH88
II99
JJ00
LL
MM
nn
OO
PP
b
q
rr
SS
tt
UU
vv
yy
--
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 31
LCD Display
The LCD Display is the primary user input/output information center. Parameter settings may be viewed
or changed using the LCD display module of the EOI. To view or change a parameter setting using the
LCD display, press the Mode key until the Program menu is displayed. Turn the Rotary Encoder until
the desired Primary Menu item is within the cursor block. Press the Rotary Encoder to select the item
from the Primary Menu (repeat the press-to-select for submenu items).
See the section titled Default Setting Changes on pg. 74 for more information on changing parameter
settings.
Upon reaching the desired parameter selection the current setting may be viewed, or it may be changed by
pressing the Rotary Encoder and the setting will take on the reverse video format (dark background/light
text). Turn the Rotary Encoder to change the parameter setting. Press the ESC key while the new
parameter setting is in the reverse video mode to exit the selection without saving the change or press the
Rotary Encoder while the parameter setting is in the reverse video mode to accept the new setting.
Repeated ESC key entries at any time takes the menu back one level each time the ESC key is pressed
until the Frequency Command screen is reached. Further ESC entries will toggle the system to and from
the Frequency Command screen and the EOI Command menu.
Note: Changes carried out from the EOI Command screen will be effective for EOI-
controlled ASD operation only. See the section titled EOI Command Mode on pg. 42 for
further information on EOI Command Mode operations.
Primary Menus of the LCD Display
The three Primary screens of the LCD display are displayed while accessing the associated operating
mode: the Frequency Command, Monitor, and the Program Menu screens.
Figure 23. Monitor Screen Items (see pg. 43 for more on the Monitor Screen items).
Figure 24. Program Menu Items (see pg. 46 for more on the Program Menu Screen).
Speed Reference %
Speed Reference Hz
User-selected
Monitored Parameters (see
Not-Ready-to-Run
Indicator (ST-to-CC required)
Ready-to-Run Indicator
appears when ST is connected
to CC
Shows discrete I/O terminal status when not in alarm mode.
Main Monitor Selections on pg. 45)
Figure 22. Frequency Command Screen Items.
Forward Run Active
Reverse Run Active
Discrete I/O terminal status or
alarm condition
Item Number 1 of 43
Speed at Trip (if applicable)
Active Frequency
Active DC Bus Voltage
Monitored items
Command Active output Current
ASD Output Voltage
Screen Name (only 5 items listed)
Active Frequency
Primary Menu Items
Screen Name
Item Number 1 of 15
Program Menu items
{
(only 5 items listed)
Program
Fundamental...
Terminal...
Direct Access...
Utilities...
Startup Wizard...
01:15
32 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
LED/LCD Display Installation Note
When installing the LED/LCD display module of the EOI ensure that the left side of the display is
inserted first with the top and bottom catches (see Phillips screws at underside of display) securely in
place. This ensures the proper alignment and electrical connection of the CNX connector of the LED/
LCD display module PCB. Then gently hold the display in place while securing the Phillips mounting
screw.
If improperly seated, the periphery of the LED/LCD display module will not be flush with the front panel
surface and the unit will not function properly.
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 33
Keypad Remote Mounting
The H9 ASD may be controlled from a remotely-mounted keypad. For safety and application-specific
reasons, some ASD installations will warrant that the operator not be in the vicinity during operation or
that the keypad not be attached to the ASD housing. The keypad may be mounted either with or without
the optional Remote Mounting Kit (P/N ASD-MTG-KIT). The ease of installation is enhanced by the
Remote Mounting Kit (P/N 58333) which allows for keypad placement and easier cable routing.
Remote mounting will also allow for multiple keypad mountings at one location if controlling and
monitoring several ASDs from a central location is required.
The keypad can operate up to 9 feet away from the ASD. A keypad extender cable is required for remote
mounting. The keypad extender cable is available in a 9-ft. length and may be ordered through your sales
representative.
The optional dust cover (P/N ASD-BPC) may be used to cover the front panel opening of the ASD
housing after removing the keypad.
Remote Keypad Required Hardware
Keypad Mounting Hardware
• EOI Remote-mount Housing — P/N 58333 (included with 230-volt 40-HP and above; and with the
460-volt 75 HP and above)
• 6-32 x 5/16” Pan Head Screw — P/N 50595 (4 ea.)
• #6 Split-Lock Washer — P/N 01884 (4 ea.)
• #6 Flat Washer — P/N 01885 (4 ea.)
Bezel Plate Mounting Hardware
• Bezel Plate — P/N 52291
• 10-32 Hex Nut — P/N 01922 (4 ea.)
• #10 Split-Lock Washer — P/N 01923 (4 ea.)
• #10 Flat Washer — P/N 01924 (4 ea.)
• Dust Cover — P/N ASD-BPC (Optional)
Extender Cable
• ASD-CAB10F: Cable, 9 ft.
Keypad Installation Precautions
Install the unit securely in a well ventilated area that is out of direct sunlight using the four mounting holes
of the rear of the keypad. The ambient temperature rating for the keypad is 14° to 104° F (-10° to 40° C).
• Select a mounting location that is easily accessible by the user.
• Avoid installation in areas where vibration, heat, humidity, dust, metal particles, or high levels of
electrical noise (EMI) are present.
• Do not install the keypad where it may be exposed to flammable chemicals or gases, water, solvents,
or other fluids.
• Turn on the power only after securing the front cover to the ASD.
34 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Keypad Remote Mounting w/o the ASD-MTG-KIT
Note: See Figure 25 for the dimensions and the item locations referenced in steps 1 through 5.
1. At the keypad mounting location, mark the 3.80” by 3.56” hole and the four 7/32” screw holes.
2. Cut the 3.80” by 3.56” rectangular hole.
3. Drill the four 7/32” screw holes.
4. Attach and secure the EOI to the front side of the mounting location using the four 6-32 x 5/16” pan
head screws, the #6 split lock washers, and the #6 flat washers.
5. Connect the extension cable.
Keypad Dimensions (mounting)
Figure 25. Keypad Mounting Dimensions.
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 35
Keypad Remote Mounting using the ASD-MTG-KIT
Note: See Figure 26 for the dimensions and the item locations referenced in steps 1 through 6.
1. At the keypad mounting location, mark the 4.60” by 4.50” hole and the four 11/32” screw holes.
2. Cut the 4.60” by 4.50” rectangular hole.
3. Drill the four 11/32” holes for the Bezel Plate mount.
4. Attach and secure the Bezel plate to the front side of the mounting location using the four 10-32
hex nuts, #10 split lock washers, and the #10 flat washers.
5. Attach and secure the keypad to the front side of the Bezel plate using the four 6-32 x 5/16” pan
head screws, #6 split lock washers, and the #6 flat washers.
6. Connect the extension cable.
Keypad ASD-MTG-KIT Dimensions (mounting)
Figure 26. Keypad Bezel Plate Mounting Dimensions.
36 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Command Mode and Frequency Mode
Control
Command control includes instructions such as Stop, Run, Jog, etc. The source of the Command
signal must be established for normal operation.
Frequency commands control the output speed of the H9 ASD. The source of the frequency (speed)
control signal must be established for normal operation.
The source of the command control and speed control may be either internal or external. Once the
source signal is selected for either function, the system may be configured to use the selected signal all
of the time or switch under user-defined conditions.
Command and Frequency control may be carried out using any one of several control methods (signal
sources) or combinations thereof. In the event that multiple control commands are received, the signal
sources are assigned priority levels. The primary control method for Command and Frequency control
uses the settings of F003 and F004, respectively.
Command Control (F003)
The Command Mode selection of F003 establishes
the primary source of the command input for the ASD.
However, the Override feature may supersede the
F003 setting as indicated in Table 3.
Table 3 on pg. 38 shows the hierarchy of the control
sources managed by the Override function. The level
of the control item on the hierarchy is listed from left
to right, most to least, respectively. As indicated in the
table, the Override setting may supersede the F003 setting.
Placing the EOI in the Local mode selects the RS485 (2-wire) as the Command Mode control source.
Local mode operation may be superseded by other Override settings.
Example: With the EOI set to Local, Communication Board input or RS485 (4-wire) input will
supersede EOI control input.
The remaining control sources may be placed into the override mode using communications.
The source of the Command control signal may be selected by:
•The F003 setting,
• Placing an item from the list below in the Override mode via communications, or
• Placing the EOI in the Local mode (places only the RS485 [2-wire] or the RS485 [4-wire] in the
Override mode).
Possible Command signal source selections include the following:
• Terminal Block (default),
• EOI Keypad,
• RS485,
• Communication Option Board, or
•F003 setting (is used if no signal sources are in the Override mode).
Note: The Terminal Board is placed in the Override mode by assigning a discrete terminal
to Command Terminal Board Priority and connecting the terminal to CC. Once
activated (Run command required), the Terminal Board settings will be used for
Override Command control (F, R, Preset Speeds, etc.).
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 37
Frequency Control (F004)
The Frequency Mode 1 (or the Frequency Mode 2)
setting establishes the user-selected source of the
frequency-control input for the H9 ASD. The signal
source selected here is used for speed control unless
the Reference Priority Selection parameter is
configured to switch this setting automatically (see
F200) or if the Override feature is enabled.
Table 3 on pg. 38 shows the hierarchy of the control
sources managed by the Override function. The level of the control item on the hierarchy is listed from
left to right, most to least, respectively. As indicated in the table, the Override setting may supersede
the selection at F004.
Placing the EOI in the Local mode selects the RS485 (2-wire) as the Frequency Mode 1 control
source. Local mode operation may be superseded by other Override settings.
Example: With the EOI set to Local, the Communication Board input or the RS485 (4-wire) input
will supersede EOI control input.
The remaining control sources may be placed into the override mode using communications.
The source of the Frequency control signal may be selected by:
•The F004 setting,
• Placing an item from the list below in the Override mode via communications, or
• Placing the EOI in the Local mode (places only the RS485 [2-wire] in the Override mode).
Possible Frequency control source selections include the following:
• Communication Board,
• RS485,
• EOI Keypad,
• Terminal Block (the default setting), or
•F004 setting (used if no other items are in the Override mode).
Note: The Terminal Board is placed in the Override mode by assigning a discrete terminal
to V/I Terminal Priority and connecting the terminal to CC. Once the discrete
terminal is activated, V/I is used as the Terminal Board Override control item.
Command and Frequency Control Selections
The user may select only one Command source and only one source for Frequency control. The
default settings for Command and Frequency control are Terminal Block and RR, respectively.
The H9 ASD has a command register for each item listed as a Command or Frequency source. The
registers store the Override setting for each control source. The registers are continuously scanned to
determine if any of the listed items are in the Override mode.
For each scan cycle, the command registers of the control sources are scanned for the Override setting
in the order that they are listed in Table 3. The first item of the Command section and the first item of
the Frequency section detected as being in the Override mode will be used for Command and
Frequency control, respectively. If no items are detected as being in the Override mode, the settings of
F003 and F004 will be used for Command and Frequency control, respectively.
38 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Any or all of the Command and Frequency control input sources may be placed in the Override
mode.
Placing the H9 ASD in the Local mode (Local/Remote LED on) via the EOI places the RS485 (2-wire)
control selection in the Override mode for Command and Frequency input (see the section titled
Override Operation on pg. 38 for the proper setting). The Local/Remote control Override feature for
Command and Frequency (or either) may be enabled/disabled at Program ⇒ Utilities ⇒ Prohibition
⇒ Local/Remote Key (Command or Frequency) Override.
Communications may be used to place the remaining Command and eligible Frequency control input
sources in the Override mode. Once placed in the Override mode this setting is valid until it is
cancelled, the power supply is turned off, or the H9 ASD is reset.
Override Operation
The signal sources of Table 3 are scanned from left to right in the order that they are listed to determine
which input sources are in the Override mode (active Command or Frequency command present). The
first item detected as having the Override function turned on is the selection that is used for Command or
Frequency control input.
The Override control setting supersedes the setting of the Command mode setting (F003) and the
Frequency mode setting (F004). However, the F003 and F004 settings will be used in the event that the
register scan returns the condition that none of the listed items have the Override feature turned on or a
discrete input terminal is set to Serial/Local Switch and is activated.
Command and Frequency-Control Override Hierarchy
Table 3 lists the input conditions and the resulting output control source selections for Command and
Frequency control Override operation.
The H9 ASD software reads the memory locations of the listed control sources from the left to the right.
The first item to be read that has the Override feature turned on will be used for Command or Frequency
control.
Table 3. Command and Frequency control hierarchy.
1 2 3 4 5 6 Priority Level
Forced F003/
F004 by I/P
Terminal
(assign to Serial/
Local Switch)
Comm.
Board RS485
(4-wire) RS485
(2-wire) Terminal Board
(Binary/BCD Input) F003/F004 Command/
Frequency Mode
1X X X X X F003/F004 Setting
01X X X X Communication Board
0 0 1X X X RS485 (4-wire)
0 0 0 1X X RS485 (2-wire)
0 0 0 0 1XTerminal Board
0 0 0 0 0 F003/F004
Setting F003/F004 Setting
Note: 1 = Override feature is turned on for that control input source; 0 = Override Off; X = Don’t Care.
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 39
Command Control Selections
The following is a listing with descriptions of the
Command Mode (F003) selections (Program ⇒
Fundamental ⇒ Standard Mode Selection ⇒ Command
Mode Selection).
Settings:
0 — Terminal Block
Allows for Command control input via the
Terminal Board.
2 — EOI Keypad
This setting is used for EOI command control.
3 — RS485 (4-wire)
Use this setting if using a remotely-mounted EOI for command control. Connect the EOI to the
RJ45 connector of the Terminal Board.
4 — Communication Option Board
Use this setting if using the optional Communication Board for command control.
Frequency Control
Selections
The following is a listing with descriptions of the
Frequency Mode (F004) selections (Program ⇒
Fundamental ⇒ Standard Mode Selection ⇒
Frequency Mode 1).
Settings:
1 — V/I
This selection is used when a 0 to 10-volt DC
analog input or a 0 – 20 mA DC current input
is used as the speed control input. Only one input signal type may be used at a time. Set SW301
to the desired signal type.
2 — RR
This selection is used for a 0 to 10-volt DC analog input signal.
3 — RX
This selection is used for a -10 to +10-volt DC analog input signal.
5 — EOI Keypad
This setting is used for EOI frequency control.
6 — RS485 (4-wire)
Use this setting if using a remotely-mounted EOI for frequency control. Connect the EOI to the
RJ45 connector of the Terminal Board.
7 — Communication Option Board
Use this setting if using the optional Communication Board for frequency control.
8 — RX2 Option (AI1)
This selection is used for a -10 to +10-volt DC analog input signal.
(Default)
(Default)
40 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
9 — Option V/I
This setting allows for the use of the optional voltage/current frequency-control interface.
10 — UP/DOWN Frequency
A discrete terminal may be configured to increase or decrease the speed of the motor by
momentarily connecting the assigned terminal to CC. See F264 on pg. 128 for further
information on this feature.
11 — Pulse Input Option
This setting is used to allow the system to use a pulsed input for frequency control. See PG
Input Point 1 Setting on pg. 122 for further information on this feature.
12 — Pulse Input (motor CPU)
This setting is used to allow the system to use a pulsed input for frequency control. See PG
Input Point 1 Setting on pg. 122 for further information on this feature.
13 — Binary/BCD Input Option
Allows for discrete terminal to be used for frequency-control input.
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 41
System Configuration and Menu Options
Root Menus
The Mode key accesses the three primary modes of the H9 ASD: the Frequency Command mode, the
Monitor mode, and the Program mode. From either mode, press the Mode key to loop through to the
other two modes (see Figure 27). While in the Frequency Command mode, pressing the ESC key
toggles the menu to and from the EOI Command mode and the Frequency Command mode.
The Alarm or Fault information will be displayed in the event of an active Alarm or Fault. Alarm text
will be displayed on the Frequency Command screen and on the LED screen when active. Fault
information will be displayed via the Fault screen. See Alarms and Trips on pg. 246 for more information
on Alarms and Trips.
Note: EOI Command mode changes made when accessed via the method shown in Figure 27
are effective for EOI control Only.
Figure 27. H9 ASD Root Menu Navigation.
Frequency Command Mode
Frequency Setting
While operating in the Local mode (Local LED is illuminated on the front panel), the running frequency
of the motor may be set from the Frequency Command screen. Using the Rotary Encoder, enter the
Frequency Command value, connect ST to CC, and provide a Run command (F and/or R) and then
press the Run key. The motor will run at the Frequency Command speed and may be changed while
running. See Figure 22. on pg. 31 and Operation (Local) on pg. 73 for more information on the Frequency
Command mode.
42 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
EOI Command Mode
The EOI Command mode is accessed by pressing the ESC key from the Frequency Command screen.
The control settings of the EOI Command menu are effective for EOI control only.
The EOI Command mode provides quick access to the following menu parameters:
Direction — Forward or Reverse.
Stop Pattern — The Decel Stop or Coast Stop settings determines the method used to stop the
motor when using the Stop|Reset key of the EOI. The Decel Stop setting enables the Dynamic
Braking system setup at F304 or the DC Injection Braking system setup at F250, F251, and F252.
The Coast Stop setting allows the motor to stop at the rate allowed by the inertia of the load.
Note: The Stop Pattern setting has no effect on the Emergency Off settings of F603.
V/f Group — 1 of 4 V/f profiles may be selected and run. Each V/f profile is comprised of 4 user
settings: Base Frequency, Base Frequency Voltage, Manual Torque Boost, and Electronic
Thermal Protection. Expanded descriptions of these parameters may be found in the section titled
Direct Access Parameter Information on pg. 76.
Accel/Decel Group — 1 of 4 Accel/Decel profiles may be selected and run. Each of the Accel/
Decel profiles is comprised of 3 user settings: Acceleration, Deceleration, and Pattern. Expanded
descriptions of these parameters may be found in the section titled Direct Access Parameter
Information on pg. 76 (or see F009).
Feedback in Panel Mode — This feature enables or disables the PID feedback function.
Torque Limit Group — This parameter is used to select 1 of 4 preset positive torque limits to apply
to the active motor (of a multiple motor configuration). The settings of profiles 1 – 4 may be setup at
F441, F444, F446, and F448, respectively.
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 43
Monitor Mode
The Monitor mode allows the user to monitor motor performance variables, control settings, and
configuration data during motor operation. There are 43 items that may be monitored from this mode. The
items are listed and described below.
Note: The Monitor mode is a read-only mode. The settings cannot be changed from the
Monitor mode. For information on how to change the values, see the section titled
Default Setting Changes on pg. 74.
Note: Any two of the Underlined monitored items may be selected for display at the
Frequency Command screen while running via Program
⇒
Utilities
⇒
Main
Monitor Selections.
Note: The F701 setting will determine if the Current and Voltage values displayed appear
as A (Amps) or V (Voltage), or if the value is shown as a % (percentage) of the ASD
rating.
Frequency at Trip — Display the at-trip frequency.
Frequency Reference — Displays the Frequency Setpoint (also called the Commanded
Frequency).
Output Current — Displays the Output Current as a percentage of the rated capacity of the H9
ASD.
DC Bus Voltage — Displays the Bus Voltage as a percentage of the rated capacity of the H9 ASD.
Output Voltage — Displays the Output Voltage as a percentage of the rated capacity of the H9
ASD.
AM Output — Displays the AM output terminal value for the function assigned to the AM terminal.
FM Output — Displays the FM output terminal value for the function assigned to the FM terminal.
Motor OL (Overload) Real — Displays the real-time Motor Overload value as a percentage of
the rated capacity of the motor.
Motor OL (Overload) Trip — Displays the Motor Overload Trip value as a percentage of the
rated capacity of the motor.
Motor Load — Displays the real-time Motor Load as a percentage of the rated capacity of the
motor.
ASD OL (Overload) Real — Displays the real-time ASD Overload as a percentage of the rated
capacity of the H9 ASD.
ASD OL (Overload) Trip — Displays the ASD Overload Trip value as a percentage of the rated
capacity of the ASD.
ASD Load — Displays the ASD Load as a percentage of the rated capacity of the H9 ASD.
Run Time — Displays the Cumulative Run Time in hours.
Compensation Frequency — Displays the Output Frequency after the application of the slip
compensation correction value (Post Compensation Frequency).
DBR OL (Overload) Real — Displays the real-time DBR Overload value as a percentage of the
Dynamic Braking Resistor capacity.
DBR OL (Overload) Trip — Displays the DBR Overload Trip value as a percentage of the
Dynamic Braking Resistor capacity.
DBR Load — Displays the DBR Load as a percentage of the Dynamic Braking Resistor capacity.
Feedback (inst) — Provides a status of the Real Time Feedback in Hz.
Feedback (1 second) — Provides a status of the 1-Second Averaging feedback in Hz.
44 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Torque — Displays the Output Torque as a percentage of the rated capacity of the H9 ASD.
Torque Reference — Displays the Torque Reference as a percentage.
Torque Current — Displays the torque-producing current value.
Excitation Current — Displays the current value required to produce the excitation field.
PID Feedback — Provides a status of the PID Real Time Feedback in Hz.
Input Power — Displays the Input Power in Kilowatts (Kw).
Output Power — Displays the Output Power in Kilowatts (Kw).
Pattern Group Number — Displays the active Pattern Run Group Number.
Pattern Group Cycle — Displays the cycle number of the active Pattern Run Group.
Pattern Group Preset — Displays the active Preset Speed being run of the active Pattern Run
Group.
Pattern Time — Displays the remaining time for the active Pattern Run Group.
RR — Displays the RR input value as a percentage of the full range of the RR value (potentiometer
input).
*V/I — Displays the V/I input setting as a percentage of the full range of the V/I value.
Note: The isolated V/I input terminal may receive Current or Voltage to control the
output speed or the output torque. The input signal type must be selected at SW301
on the Terminal Board.
The V input setting of SW301 is used for the 0 – 10 VDC analog input signal and
the I input setting of SW301 is used for the 0 – 20 mA analog input signal. Either
may be used as a frequency or torque command source. See parameter F201 for
more information on the setup of this terminal.
On the LCD display the V/I terminal is listed as the VI/II terminal (the additional
letter I is used to indicate “input.”).
RX — Displays the RX input setting as a percentage of the full range of the RX value (-10 to
+10 VDC input).
RX2 Option (AI1) — Displays the RX2 input setting as a percentage of the full range of the RX2
value.
Note: The RX2 function is available on the Expansion IO Card Option 1 option board
(P/N ETB003Z) only.
Trip Code — Displays None if there are no errors, or displays one of the associated Fault Codes
listed in Table 14 on page 250 if there is an active Fault (e.g., E = Emergency Off).
Past Trip #1 — This function records and displays the last trip incurred. Subsequent trips will
replace Past Trip #1. As trip records are replaced they are shifted to the next level of the Past Trip
locations until being deleted (i.e., Past Trip #1 is moved to Past Trip #2 and then to #3 until being
shifted out of #4). Once shifted out of Past Trip #4 the record is deleted. If no trips have occurred
since the last reset, None is displayed for each trip record.
Past Trip #2 — Past Trip information.
Past Trip #3 — Past Trip information.
Past Trip #4 — Past Trip information.
Note: An improper H9 ASD setup may cause some trips — reset the H9 ASD to the
Factory Default settings before pursuing a systemic malfunction (Program ⇒
Utilities ⇒ Type Reset ⇒ Reset to Factory Settings).
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 45
Direction — Displays the Direction command (forward/reverse).
Discrete Input Terminals — Displays the status (Activated = reverse video) of the discrete input
terminals of the Terminal Board.
Discrete Output Terminals — Displays the status (Activated = reverse video) of the discrete
output lines of the Terminal Board.
Main Monitor Selections
Two (2) Monitor Mode items may be selected from the Main Monitor Selections screen to be displayed
on the Frequency Command screen while the H9 ASD is running.
The selected items, along with their real-time values, are displayed on the Frequency Command screen
while running. Not all Monitor Mode items are available for display on the Frequency Command
screen. The available items are underlined on pg. 43 and pg. 44.
Any two of the underlined items may be selected from the listing at Program ⇒ Utilities ⇒ Main
Monitor Selections. Select an item from the Monitor #1 listing and another item from the Monitor #2
listing to be displayed as shown in Figure 22. on pg. 31.
46 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Program Mode Menu Navigation
The following table lists the menu items of the Program mode and maps the flow of the menu selections.
The Parameter Numbers for the listed functions are provided where applicable.
The functions listed may be accessed (and changed) as mapped below or via the Direct Access method:
Program ⇒ Direct Access ⇒ Applicable Parameter Number.
Program Mode Menu Navigation
Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name Parameter
Number
STARUP WIZARD See the section titled Initial Setup on pg. 70 for Startup Wizard Requirements.
FUNDAMENTAL
Fundamental
Accel/Decel #1
Settings
Automatic Acceleration/Deceleration F000
Acceleration Time 1 F009
Deceleration Time 1 F010
Acceleration/Deceleration Suspended Function F349
Acceleration Suspend Frequency F350
Acceleration Suspend Time F351
Deceleration Suspend Frequency F352
Deceleration Suspend Time F353
Frequency Settings
Maximum Frequency F011
Upper Limit Frequency F012
Lower Limit Frequency F013
V/f Pattern F015
Time Limit for Lower Limit Frequency Operation F256
Motor Set #1
Automatic Torque Boost F001
Base Frequency 1 F014
Manual Torque Boost 1 F016
Motor Overload Protection Level 1 F600
Standard Mode
Selection
Command Mode F003
Frequency Mode 1 F004
Forward/Reverse Run F008
Frequency Priority F200
Frequency Mode 2 F207
Frequency Mode Priority Switching Frequency F208
FM Output Terminal Function F005
FM Output Terminal Adjustment F006
ro
gra
m
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 47
TERMINAL
Terminal
Analog Output
Terminals
FM Output Gradient Characteristic F682
FM Bias Adjustment F683
FM Voltage/Current Output Switching F681
AM Output Terminal Function F670
AM Output Terminal Adjustment F671
AM Output Gradient Characteristic F685
AM Bias Adjustment F686
MON 1 Terminal Meter Selection F672
MON 1 Terminal Meter Adjustment F673
MON 1 Output Gradient Characteristic F689
MON 1 Bias Adjustment F690
MON 1 Voltage/Current Output Switching F688
MON 2 Terminal Meter Selection F674
MON 2 Terminal Meter Adjustment F675
MON 2 Output Gradient Characteristic F692
MON 2 Bias Adjustment F693
MON 2 Voltage/Current Output Switching F691
Selection of OUT Terminal F669
Pulse Output Function F676
Pulse Output Frequency F677
Input Special
Functions
Forward/Reverse Run Priority When Both Are Activated F105
Input Terminal Priority F106
16-Bit Binary/BCD Input F107
V/I Analog Input Broken Wire Detection Level F633
Input Terminal Delays
Input Terminal 1 (F) Response Time F140
Input Terminal 2 (R) Response Time F141
Input Terminal 3 (ST) Response Time F142
Input Terminal 4 (RES) Response Time F143
Input Terminal 5–12 Response Time F144
Input Terminal 13–20 Response Time F145
Program Mode Menu Navigation
Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name Parameter
Number
48 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
TERMINAL
Input Terminals
Always ON Terminal Function F110
Input Terminal 1 (F) Function F111
Input Terminal 2 (R) Function F112
Input Terminal 3 (ST) Function F113
Input Terminal 4 (RES) Function F114
Input Terminal 5 (S1) Function F115
Input Terminal 6 (S2) Function F116
Input Terminal 7 (S3) Function F117
Input Terminal 8 (S4) Function F118
Input Terminal 9 (LI1) Function F119
Input Terminal 10 (LI2) Function F120
Input Terminal 11 (LI3) Function F121
Input Terminal 12 (LI4) Function F122
Input Terminal 13 (LI5) Function F123
Input Terminal 14 (LI6) Function F124
Input Terminal 15 (LI7) Function F125
Input Terminal 16 (LI8) Function F126
Input Terminal 17 (B12) Function F164
Input Terminal 18 (B13) Function F165
Input Terminal 19 (B14) Function F166
Input Terminal 20 (BI5) Function F167
Virtual Input Terminal Selection 1 F973
Virtual Input Terminal Selection 2 F974
Virtual Input Terminal Selection 3 F975
Virtual Input Terminal Selection 4 F976
Line Power Switching
Commercial Power/ASD Switching Output F354
Commercial Power/ASD Switching Frequency F355
ASD Side Switching Delay Time F356
Commercial Power Side Switching Delay Time F357
Commercial Power Switching Frequency Hold Time F358
Program Mode Menu Navigation
Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name Parameter
Number
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 49
TERMINAL
Output Terminals
Output Terminal 1 (OUT1) Function F130
Output Terminal 2 (OUT2) Function F131
Output Terminal 3 (FL) Function F132
Output Terminal 4 (OUT3) Function F133
Output Terminal 5 (OUT4) Function F134
Output Terminal 6 (R1) Function F135
Output Terminal 7 (OUT5) Function F136
Output Terminal 8 (OUT6) Function F137
Output Terminal 9 (R2) Function F138
Output Terminal 10 (R3) Function F168
Output Terminal 11 (R4) Function F169
Reach Settings
Low Speed Signal Output Frequency F100
Speed Reach Frequency F101
Speed Reach Detection Band F102
DIRECT ACCESS
Direct Access
Parameter Number Input N/A
Unknown Numbers Accepted
UTILITIES
Utilities
Display Parameters
Automatic Function Selection F040
Voltage/Current Display Units F701
Free Unit Multiplication Factor F702
Free Unit F703
Free Unit Display Gradient Characteristic F705
Free Unit Display Bias F706
Change Step Selection 1 F707
Change Step Selection 2 F708
Prohibition
Write Parameter Lockout F700
Command Mode/Frequency Mode Lockout F736
Lockout All Keys F737
Local/Remote Key Command Override N/A
Local/Remote Key Frequency Override
Trace Trace Selection F740
Program Mode Menu Navigation
Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name Parameter
Number
50 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
UTILITIES
Trace
Trace Cycle F741
Trace Data 1 F742
Trace Data 2 F743
Trace Data 3 F744
Trace Data 4 F745
Alarm Prohibition
(prohibits an EOI alarm
display ONLY — alarm
still activated)
Over-current Alarm
N/A
ASD Overload Alarm
Motor Overload Alarm
Over-Heat Alarm
Over-Voltage Alarm
Main Power Under-Voltage Alarm
Reserved (POFF) Alarm
Under-Current Alarm
Over-Torque Alarm
Braking Resistor Overload Alarm
Cumulative Run Timer Alarm
DeviceNet/Profibus/CC-Link Alarm
RS485 Communication
Main Power Under-Voltage Alarm
Stop After Instantaneous Power-off Alarm
Stop After Lower Limit Continuous Time
Light Load Alarm
Heavy Load Alarm
Maintenance Timer Alarm
Over-Torque Alarm
Soft Stall Alarm
Type Reset Reset F007
Real-time Clock Setup Set Real-time Clock N/A
Trip History (read-only) Trip Number N/A
Trip Type
Program Mode Menu Navigation
Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name Parameter
Number
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 51
UTILITIES
Trip History
(read-only)
Frequency at Trip
N/A
Output Current
Output Voltage
Direction
Frequency Reference
DC Voltage
Discrete Input Terminals
Discrete Output Terminals
Run Timer
Post Compensation Frequency
Speed Feedback (real-time)
Speed Feedback (1 second)
Torque Feedback
Torque Reference
Torque Current
Excitation Current
PID Feedback
Motor Overload Ratio
ASD Overload Ratio
DBR Overload Ratio
Motor Load
ASD Load
DBR Load
Input Power
Output Power
Changed From Default Changed Parameters N/A
Contrast Contrast Adjustment N/A
Version (read-only)
H9 EOI (Ver:DB)
N/AASD Type
CPU Code Version
Program Mode Menu Navigation
Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name Parameter
Number
52 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
UTILITIES
Version (read-only)
CPU Code Revision
N/A
MC Version
MC Revision
Main Board EEPROM Version
Main Monitor
Selections
Monitor #1
Monitor #2
View Trace Data View Trace Data
PROTECTION
Protection Abnormal Speed
Settings
Abnormal Speed Detection Time F622
Over-speed Detection Frequency Upper Band F623
Over-speed Detection Frequency Lower Band F624
Base Frequency
Voltage Supply Voltage Correction F307
DC Injection Braking
DC Injection Braking Start Frequency F250
DC Injection Braking Current F251
DC Injection Braking Time F252
Forward/Reverse DC Injection Braking Priority F253
Motor Shaft Stationary Control F254
Dynamic Braking
Dynamic Braking Enable F304
Dynamic Braking Resistance F308
Continuous Dynamic Braking Capacity F309
Braking Resistance Overload Time (10 Times rated
torque) F639
Emergency Off
Settings
Emergency Off F603
Emergency DC Injection Braking Control Time F604
Low Current Settings
Low-current Trip F610
Low-current Detection Current F611
Low-current Detection Time F612
Low-current Detection Hysteresis Width F609
Overload Motor Overload Protection Configuration F017
Overload Reduction Start Frequency F606
Program Mode Menu Navigation
Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name Parameter
Number
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 53
PROTECTION Overload Motor 150% Overload Time Limit F607
ASD Overload F631
Overtorque
Parameters
Overtorque Trip F615
Overtorque Detection Level During Power Running F616
Overtorque Detection Level During Regenerative
Braking F617
Overtorque Detection Time F618
Overtorque Detection Hysteresis F619
Phase Loss ASD Output Phase Loss Detection F605
ASD Input Phase Loss Detection F608
Retry/Restart
Auto Restart Enable F301
Number of Times to Retry F303
Ridethrough Time F310
Random Mode F312
Stall
Overvoltage Limit Operation F305
Stall Prevention Factor 1 F416
Power Running Stall Continuous Trip Detection Time F452
Stall Prevention During Regeneration F453
Stall Prevention Level F601
Overvoltage Limit Operation Level F626
Trip Settings Retain Trip Record at Power Down F602
Undervoltage/
Ridethrough
Regenerative Power Ridethrough Mode F302
Synchronized Deceleration Time F317
Synchronized Acceleration Time F318
Undervoltage Trip F627
Undervoltage (trip alarm) Detection Time F628
Regenerative Power Ridethrough Control Level F629
Special Protection
Parameters
Short Circuit Detection at Start F613
Cooling Fan Control F620
Cumulative Operation Time Alarm Setting F621
Brake Answer Wait Time F630
Program Mode Menu Navigation
Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name Parameter
Number
54 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
FREQUENCY
Frequency
Analog Filter Analog Input Filter F209
Forward/Reverse
Disable Forward/Reverse Disable F311
Jog Settings
Jog Frequency F260
Jog Stop Pattern F261
Panel Operation Jog Mode F262
UP/DOWN Frequency
Functions
UP/DOWN Up Response Time F264
UP/DOWN Up Frequency Step F265
UP/DOWN Down Response Time F266
UP/DOWN Down Frequency Step F267
Initial UP/DOWN Frequency F268
Initial UP/DOWN Frequency Rewriting F269
V/I Settings Option V/I Terminal Voltage/Current Selection (AI2
option board input) F109
Preset Speeds
Preset Speed 1 F018
Preset Speed 2 F019
Preset Speed 3 F020
Preset Speed 4 F021
Preset Speed 5 F022
Preset Speed 6 F023
Preset Speed 7 F024
Preset Speed 8 F287
Preset Speed 9 F288
Preset Speed 10 F289
Preset Speed 11 F290
Preset Speed 12 F291
Preset Speed 13 F292
Preset Speed 14 F293
Preset Speed 15 F294
Program Mode Menu Navigation
Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name Parameter
Number
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 55
FREQUENCY
Speed Reference
Setpoints
V/I Input Point 1 Setting F201
V/I Input Point 1 Frequency F202
V/I Input Point 2 Setting F203
V/I Input Point 2 Frequency F204
RR Input Point 1 Setting F210
RR Input Point 1 Frequency F211
RR Input Point 2 Setting F212
RR Input Point 2 Frequency F213
RX Input Point 1 Setting F216
RX Input Point 1 Frequency F217
RX Input Point 2 Setting F218
RX Input Point 2 Frequency F219
RX2 Option (AI1) Input Point 1 Setting F222
RX2 Option (AI1) Input Point 1 Frequency F223
RX2 Option (AI1) Input Point 2 Setting F224
RX2 Option (AI1) Input Point 2 Frequency F225
BIN Input Point 1 Setting F228
BIN Input Point 1 Frequency F229
BIN Input Point 2 Setting F230
BIN Input Point 2 Frequency F231
PG Input Point 1 Setting F234
PG Input Point 1 Frequency F235
PG Input Point 2 Setting F236
PG Input Point 2 Frequency F237
V/I Input Bias F470
V/I Input Gain F471
RR Input Bias F472
RR Input Gain F473
RX Input Bias F474
RX Input Gain F475
Program Mode Menu Navigation
Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name Parameter
Number
56 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
FREQUENCY
Speed Reference
Setpoints
RX2 Option (AI1) Input Bias F476
RX2 Option (AI1) Input Gain F477
V/I Input Bias (AI2 option board input) F478
V/I Input Gain (AI2 option board input) F479
SPECIAL
Special
Acc/Dec #1 – #4
Settings
Acceleration Time 2 F500
Deceleration Time 2 F501
Acc/Dec Pattern 1 F502
Acc/Dec Pattern 2 F503
Acceleration Time 3 F510
Deceleration Time 3 F511
Acc/Dec Pattern 3 F512
Acceleration Time 4 F514
Deceleration Time 4 F515
Acc/Dec Pattern 4 F516
Acc/Dec Special
Acc/Dec Pattern 1 – 4 F504
Acc/Dec Switching Frequency 1 F505
S-Pattern Acceleration Lower Limit Adjustment F506
S-Pattern Acceleration Upper Limit Adjustment F507
S-Pattern Deceleration Lower Limit Adjustment F508
S-Pattern Deceleration Upper Limit Adjustment F509
Acc/Dec Switching Frequency 2 F513
Acc/Dec Switching Frequency 3 F517
Carrier Frequency PWM Carrier Frequency F300
Carrier Frequency Control Mode F316
Crane/Hoist Settings
Light Load/High Speed Operation F328
Light Load/High Speed Learning Function F329
Light Load/High Speed Operation Frequency F330
Light Load/High Speed Operation Switching Lower
Limit Frequency F331
Light Load/High Speed Operation Load Wait Time F332
Light Load/High Speed Operation Detection Time F333
Program Mode Menu Navigation
Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name Parameter
Number
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 57
SPECIAL
Crane/Hoist Settings
Light Load/High Speed Heavy Load Detection Time F334
Switching Load Torque During Power Running F335
Heavy Load Torque During Power Running F336
Heavy Load Torque During Constant Power Running F337
Switching Load Torque During Regeneration Braking F338
V/f Five Point Setting
V/f 5-Point Setting Frequency 1 F190
V/f 5-point Setting Voltage 1 F191
V/f 5-Point Setting Frequency 2 F192
V/f 5-Point Setting Voltage 2 F193
V/f 5-Point Setting Frequency 3 F194
V/f 5-Point Setting Voltage 3 F195
V/f 5-Point Setting Frequency 4 F196
V/f 5-Point Setting Voltage 4 F197
V/f 5-Point Setting Frequency 5 F198
V/f 5-Point Setting Voltage 5 F199
Frequency Control
Start Frequency F240
Run Frequency F241
Run Frequency Hysteresis F242
End Frequency F243
Special Parameters
0 Hz Dead Band Signal F244
0 Hz Command Output F255
Exciting Strengthening Coefficient F415
Annual Average Ambient Temperature F634
Rush Current Suppression Relay Activation Time F635
PTC 1 Thermal Selection F637
PTC 2 Thermal Selection F638
Jump Frequencies
Jump Frequency 1 F270
Jump Frequency 1 Bandwidth F271
Jump Frequency 2 F272
Jump Frequency 2 Bandwidth F273
Program Mode Menu Navigation
Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name Parameter
Number
58 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
SPECIAL Jump Frequencies Jump Frequency 3 F274
Jump Frequency 3 Bandwidth F275
Operation Panel
Parameters
Operation Command Clear Selection With Standby
Terminal Off F719
Panel Stop Pattern F721
Panel Torque Command F725
Panel Tension Torque Bias F727
Panel Load Sharing Gain F728
Panel Override Multiplication Gain F729
Panel Frequency Lockout F730
Panel Emergency Off Lockout F734
Panel Reset Lockout F735
Traverse
Traverse Selection F980
Traverse Acceleration Time F981
Traverse Deceleration Time F982
Traverse Step F983
Traverse Jump Step F984
MOTOR
Motor
Motor Set #2
Motor Set #2 Base Frequency F170
Motor Set #2 Base Frequency Voltage F171
Motor Set #2 Manual Torque Boost F172
Motor Set #2 Overload Protection Level F173
Motor Set #3
Motor Set #3 Base Frequency F174
Motor Set #3 Base Frequency Voltage F175
Motor Set #3 Manual Torque Boost F176
Motor Set #3 Overload Protection Level F177
Motor Set #4
Motor Set #4 Base Frequency F178
Motor Set #4 Base Frequency Voltage F179
Motor Set #4 Manual Torque Boost F180
Motor Set #4 Overload Protection Level F181
PM Motor PM Motor Constant 1 (d axis inductance) F498
PM Motor Constant 2 (q axis inductance) F499
Program Mode Menu Navigation
Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name Parameter
Number
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 59
MOTOR PM Motor Step-Out Detection-current Level (for PM motors) F640
Step-Out Detection-current Time (for PM motors) F641
Vector Motor Model
Autotune 1 F400
Slip Frequency Gain F401
Autotune 2 F402
Motor Rated Capacity (nameplate) F405
Motor Rated Current (nameplate) F406
Motor Rated RPM (nameplate) F407
Base frequency Voltage 1 F409
Motor Constant 1 (torque boost) F410
Motor Constant 2 (no load current) F411
Motor Constant 3 (leak inductance) F412
Motor Constant 4 (rated slip) F413
TORQUE
Torque
Manual Torque Limit
Settings
Power Running Torque Limit 2 Level F444
Regenerative Braking Torque Limit 2 Level F445
Power Running Torque Limit 3 Level F446
Regenerative Braking Torque Limit 3 Level F447
Power Running Torque Limit 4 Level F448
Regenerative Braking Torque Limit 4 Level F449
Setpoints
V/I Input Point 1 Rate F205
V/I Input Point 2 Rate F206
RR Input Point 1 Rate F214
RR Input Point 2 Rate F215
RX Input Point 1 Rate F220
RX Input Point 2 Rate F221
RX2 Option (AI1) Input Point 1 Rate F226
RX2 Option (AI1) Input Point 2 Rate F227
Torque Control
Braking Mode F341
Torque Bias Input F342
Panel Torque Bias F343
Panel Torque Gain F344
Program Mode Menu Navigation
Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name Parameter
Number
60 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
TORQUE
Torque Control
Release Time F345
Creeping Frequency F346
Creeping Time F347
Braking Time Learning Function F348
Torque Command F420
Tension Torque Bias Input (torque control) F423
Load Sharing Gain Input F424
Forward Speed Limit Input F425
Forward Speed Limit Input Level F426
Reverse Speed Limit Input F427
Reverse Speed Limit Input Level F428
Torque Limit Settings
Power Running Torque Limit 1 F440
Power Running Torque Limit 1 Level F441
Regenerative Braking Torque Limit 1 F442
Regenerative Braking Torque Limit 1 Level F443
Acceleration/Deceleration Operation After Torque Limit F451
Torque Speed
Limiting
Speed Limit (torque = 0) Center Value Reference F430
Speed Limit (torque = 0) Center Value F431
Speed limit (torque = 0) Band F432
Allow Specified Direction ONLY F435
FEEDBACK
Feedback
Drooping Control
Drooping Gain F320
Speed at 0% Drooping Gain F321
Speed at F320 Drooping Gain F322
Drooping Insensitive Torque F323
Drooping Output Filter F324
Feedback Settings
PID Control Switching F359
PID Feedback Signal F360
PID Feedback Delay Filter F361
PID Feedback Proportional Gain F362
PID Feedback Integral Gain F363
Program Mode Menu Navigation
Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name Parameter
Number
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 61
FEEDBACK
Feedback Settings
PID Deviation Upper Limit F364
PID Deviation Lower Limit F365
PID Feedback Differential Gain F366
Process Upper Limit F367
Process Lower Limit F368
PID Control Wait Time F369
PID Output Upper Limit F370
PID Output Lower Limit F371
Process Increasing Rate F372
Process Decreasing Rate F373
Speed PI Switching Frequency F466
Override Control Adding Input Selection F660
Multiplying Input Selection F661
PG Settings
Number of PG Input Pulses F375
Number of PG Input Phases F376
PG Disconnection Detection F377
Simple Positioning Completion Range F381
Current Control Proportional Gain F458
Speed Loop Proportional Gain F460
Speed Loop Stabilization Coefficient F461
Load Moment of Inertia 1 F462
Second Speed Loop Proportional Gain F463
Second Speed Loop Stabilization Coefficient F464
Load Moment of Inertia 2 F465
MY FUNCTION My Function Selection My Function Operating Mode F977
My Function Unit 1
Input Function Target 1 F900
Input Function Command 1 F901
Input Function Target 2 F902
Input Function Command 2 F903
Input Function Target 3 F904
Output Function Assigned F905
Program Mode Menu Navigation
Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name Parameter
Number
62 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
MY FUNCTION
My Function Unit 2
Input Function Target 1 F906
Input Function Command 1 F907
Input Function Target 2 F908
Input Function Command 2 F909
Input Function Target 3 F910
Output Function Assigned F911
My Function Unit 3
Input Function Target 1 F912
Input Function Command 1 F913
Input Function Target 2 F914
Input Function Command 2 F915
Input Function Target 3 F916
Output Function Assigned F917
My Function Unit 4
Input Function Target 1 F935
Input Function Command 1 F936
Input Function Target 2 F937
Input Function Command 2 F938
Input Function Target 3 F939
Output Function Assigned F940
My Function Unit 5
Input Function Target 1 F941
Input Function Command 1 F942
Input Function Target 2 F943
Input Function Command 2 F944
Input Function Target 3 F945
Output Function Assigned F946
My Function Unit 6
Input Function Target 1 F947
Input Function Command 1 F948
Input Function Target 2 F949
Input Function Command 2 F950
Input Function Target 3 F951
Output Function Assigned F952
Program Mode Menu Navigation
Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name Parameter
Number
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 63
MY FUNCTION
My Function Unit 7
Input Function Target 1 F953
Input Function Command 1 F954
Input Function Target 2 F955
Input Function Command 2 F956
Input Function Target 3 F957
Output Function Assigned F958
My Function Data
My Function Percent Data 1 F918
My Function Percent Data 2 F919
My Function Percent Data 3 F920
My Function Percent Data 4 F921
My Function Percent Data 5 F922
My Function Frequency Data 1 F923
My Function Frequency Data 2 F924
My Function Frequency Data 3 F925
My Function Frequency Data 4 F926
My Function Frequency Data 5 F927
My Function Time Data 1 F928
My Function Time Data 2 F929
My Function Time Data 3 F930
My Function Time Data 4 F931
My Function Time Data 5 F932
My Function Count Data 1 F933
My Function Count Data 2 F934
My Function Analog
Analog Input Function Target 11 F959
Analog Function Assigned Object 11 F961
Analog Input Function Target 21 F962
Analog Function Assigned Object 21 F964
My Function Monitor Monitor Output Function 11 F965
Monitor Output Function Command 11 F966
Program Mode Menu Navigation
Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name Parameter
Number
64 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
MY FUNCTION
My Function Monitor
Monitor Output Function 21 F967
Monitor Output Function Command 21 F968
Monitor Output Function 31 F969
Monitor Output Function Command 31 F970
Monitor Output Function 41 F972
Monitor Output Function Command 41 F971
COMMUNICATIONS
Communications
Communication
Adjustments
Frequency Point Selection F810
Point 1 Setting F811
Point 1 Frequency F812
Point 2 Setting F813
Point 2 Frequency F814
Communication
Settings
Baud Rate (2-wire RS485) F800
Parity (2-wire and 4-wire RS485) F801
ASD Number F802
Communications Time-out (2-wire and 4-wire RS485) F803
Communication Time-out Action (2-wire and 4-wire
RS485) F804
Send Wait Time (2-wire RS485) F805
ASD-to-ASD Communication (2-wire RS485) F806
2-Wire RS485 Protocol F807
Baud Rate (4-wire RS485) F820
RS485 Send Wait Time F825
ASD-to-ASD Communication (4-wire RS485) F826
4-Wire RS485 Protocol (TSB/MODBUS) F829
Communication Option (DeviceNet/Profibus) Setting 1 F830
Communication Option (DeviceNet/Profibus) Setting 2 F831
Communication Option (DeviceNet/Profibus) Setting 3 F832
Communication Option (DeviceNet/Profibus) Setting 4 F833
Communication Option (DeviceNet/Profibus) Setting 5 F834
Communication Option (DeviceNet/Profibus) Setting 6 F835
Communication Option (DeviceNet/Profibus) Setting 7 F836
Program Mode Menu Navigation
Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name Parameter
Number
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 65
COMMUNICATIONS
Communication
Settings
Communication Option (DeviceNet/Profibus) Setting 8 F841
Communication Option (DeviceNet/Profibus) Setting 9 F842
Communication Option (DeviceNet/Profibus) Setting 10 F843
Communication Option (DeviceNet/Profibus) Setting 11 F844
Communication Option (DeviceNet/Profibus) Setting 12 F845
Communication Option (DeviceNet/Profibus) Setting 13 F846
Disconnection Detection Extended Time F850
ASD Operation at Disconnection F851
Preset Speed Operation F852
Communication Option Station Address Monitor F853
Communication Option Speed Switch Monitor
DeviceNet/CC-Link F854
Block Write Data 1 F870
Block Write Data 2 F871
Block Read Data 1 F875
Block Read Data 2 F876
Block Read Data 3 F877
Block Read Data 4 F878
Block Read Data 5 F879
Free Notes F880
Network Option Reset Setting F899
Ethernet Settings
IP
N/A
Sub Net
Gateway
DHCP Mode
MAC ID
PATTERN RUN
Pattern Run Operation Mode
Preset Speed Operation Mode F560
Preset Speed 1
F561Direction
Acc/Dec Group
Program Mode Menu Navigation
Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name Parameter
Number
66 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
PATTERN RUN
Operation Mode
V/f Group F561
Torque Limit Group
Preset Speed 2
F562
Direction
Acc/Dec Group
V/f Group
Torque Limit Group
Preset Speed 3
F563
Direction
Acc/Dec Group
V/f Group
Torque Limit Group
Preset Speed 4
F564
Direction
Acc/Dec Group
V/f Group
Torque Limit Group
Preset Speed 5
F565
Direction
Acc/Dec Group
V/f Group
Torque Limit Group
Preset Speed 6
F566
Direction
Acc/Dec Group
V/f Group
Torque Limit Group
Preset Speed 7
F567Direction
Acc/Dec Group
Program Mode Menu Navigation
Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name Parameter
Number
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 67
PATTERN RUN
Operation Mode
V/f Group F567
Torque Limit Group
Preset Speed 8
F568
Direction
Acc/Dec Group
V/f Group
Torque Limit Group
Preset Speed 9
F569
Direction
Acc/Dec Group
V/f Group
Torque Limit Group
Preset Speed 10
F570
Direction
Acc/Dec Group
V/f Group
Torque Limit Group
Preset Speed 11
F571
Direction
Acc/Dec Group
V/f Group
Torque Limit Group
Preset Speed 12
F572
Direction
Acc/Dec Group
V/f Group
Torque Limit Group
Preset Speed 13
F573Direction
Acc/Dec Group
Program Mode Menu Navigation
Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name Parameter
Number
68 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
PATTERN RUN
Operation Mode
V/f Group F573
Torque Limit Group
Preset Speed 14
F574
Direction
Acc/Dec Group
V/f Group
Torque Limit Group
Preset Speed 15
F575
Direction
Acc/Dec Group
V/f Group
Torque Limit Group
Operation Time
Speed 1 Operation Time F540
Speed 2 Operation Time F541
Speed 3 Operation Time F542
Speed 4 Operation Time F543
Speed 5 Operation Time F544
Speed 6 Operation Time F545
Speed 7 Operation Time F546
Speed 8 Operation Time F547
Speed 9 Operation Time F548
Speed 10 Operation Time F549
Speed 11 Operation Time F550
Speed 12 Operation Time F551
Speed 13 Operation Time F552
Speed 14 Operation Time F553
Speed 15 Operation Time F554
Pattern Run
Pattern Operation F520
Pattern Operation Mode F521
Pattern 1 Repeat F522
Program Mode Menu Navigation
Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name Parameter
Number
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 69
PATTERN RUN Pattern Run Pattern 2 Repeat F531
Speeds
Pattern Group 1 Selection 1 F523
Pattern Group 1 Selection 2 F524
Pattern Group 1 Selection 3 F525
Pattern Group 1 Selection 4 F526
Pattern Group 1 Selection 5 F527
Pattern Group 1 Selection 6 F528
Pattern Group 1 Selection 7 F529
Pattern Group 1 Selection 8 F530
Pattern Group 2 Selection 1 F532
Pattern Group 2 Selection 2 F533
Pattern Group 2 Selection 3 F534
Pattern Group 2 Selection 4 F535
Pattern Group 2 Selection 5 F536
Pattern Group 2 Selection 6 F537
Pattern Group 2 Selection 7 F538
Pattern Group 2 Selection 8 F539
PASSWORD AND
LOCKOUT
Password
Lockout
Enter Password N/A
Change Password Enter New Password N/A
Lockouts
Reset From Trip
N/A
Local/Remote
Run/Stop from EOI
Frequency Change From Eoi
Monitor Screen
Parameter Access
Parameter Write
Program Mode Menu Navigation
Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name Parameter
Number
70 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
System Operation
Initial Setup
Upon initial system power up, the Startup Wizard starts automatically. The Startup Wizard assists the
user with the initial configuration of the input power settings and the output parameters of the H9 ASD.
The Startup Wizard may also be selected and run from the Program menu after the initial startup, if
required.
The Startup Wizard querys the user to select one of the following items:
Run Now? ⇒ Continue on to item #1 below.
Run Next Time? ⇒ Go to Program Mode.
Manually Configure? ⇒ Go to Finish screen and click Finish.
Startup Wizard Parameters
Startup parameter settings may be viewed or changed. Change the parameter setting and click Next or
click Next only without making any changes to go to the next startup parameter.
See the section titled Startup Wizard Parameter Requirements on pg. 71 for further information on the
Startup Wizard parameters.
Click Finish to close the Startup Wizard when done.
1. The Voltage and Frequency Rating of the Motor (a selection is required for Next or select Finish).
2. The Upper Limit Frequency.
3. The Lower Limit Frequency.
4. The Automatic Acceleration/Deceleration Setting.
5. The Acceleration Time.
6. The Deceleration Time.
7. The Volts per Hertz Setting.
8. The Motor Current Rating.
9. The Motor RPM.
10. The Command Source.
11. The Frequency Reference Source.
12. The Display Unit.
13. Wizard: Finish.
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 71
Startup Wizard Parameter Requirements
The Startup Wizard queries the user for information on the I/O signal parameters, control, and the EOI
display settings of the ASD. The ASD may also be setup by directly accessing each of the startup settings
via the Program menu or the associated Direct Access Numbers (see the section titled Direct Access
Parameter Information on pg. 76).
Upon initial system power up, the Startup Wizard starts automatically. It may also be run from the
Program menu after startup, if required. The user is queried to either (1) Run Now, (2) Run Next Time, or
(3) Manually Configure the ASD.
If selection (2) is chosen, the system returns to the Program menu and will default to the Startup Wizard
on the next power up. If selection (3) is chosen, click the subsequent Finish box and the system returns to
the Frequency Command screen.
If selection (1) is chosen, the Startup Wizard will start and assist the user with the configuration of the
H9 Adjustable Speed Drive using the following user-input screens.
Voltage and Frequency Rating of the Motor
Motors are designed and manufactured to be operated within a specific voltage and frequency range. The
voltage and frequency specifications for a given motor may be found on the nameplate of the motor. Click
on the voltage and frequency of the motor being used.
Upper Limit Frequency
This parameter sets the highest frequency that the H9 will accept as a frequency command or frequency
setpoint. The H9 may output frequencies higher than the Upper Limit Frequency (but, lower than the
Maximum Frequency) when operating in the PID Control mode, Torque Control mode, or the Vector
Control modes (sensorless or feedback).
Lower Limit Frequency
This parameter sets the lowest frequency that the H9 will accept as a frequency command or frequency
setpoint. The H9 will output frequencies lower than the Lower Limit Frequency when accelerating to the
lower limit or decelerating to a stop. Frequencies below the Lower Limit may be output when operating
in the PID Control mode, Torque Control mode, or the Vector Control modes (sensorless or feedback).
Automatic Acceleration/Deceleration
When Automatic ACC/DEC is chosen, the H9 adjusts the acceleration and deceleration rates according
to the applied load. The minimum accel/decel time may be set using F508. The motor and the load must
be connected prior to selecting Automatic Accel/Decel.
Select Manual to allow the settings of F009 and F010 to control the accel/decel, respectively. The
acceleration and deceleration times range from 12.5% to 800% of the programmed values for the active
acceleration time.
Select Automatic ACC Only to allow for the acceleration rate to be controlled automatically only.
Acceleration Time
This parameter specifies the time in seconds for the output of the ASD to go from 0.0 Hz to the Maximum
Frequency for the #1 Acceleration profile. The Accel/Decel Pattern may be set using F502.
Deceleration Time
This parameter specifies the time in seconds for the output of the ASD to go from the Maximum
Frequency to 0.0 Hz for the #1 Deceleration profile. The Accel/Decel Pattern may be set using F502.
72 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Volts per Hertz Setting
This function establishes the relationship between the output frequency and the output voltage of the
ASD.
Settings:
Constant Torque
Voltage Decrease Curve
Automatic Torque Boost
Sensorless Vector Control (Speed)
Sensorless Vector Control (Speed/Torque Switching)
V/f 5-point Curve (Go to F190 to configure the V/f 5-point settings)
PM Drive (Permanent Magnet)
PG Feedback Vector Control (Speed)
PG Feedback Vector Control (Speed/Torque Switching)
Motor Current Rating
This parameter allows the user to input the full-load amperage (FLA) of the motor. This value is found on
the nameplate of the motor and it is used by the ASD to determine the Thermal Overload protection
setting for the motor.
Motor RPM
This parameter is used to input the (name plated) rated speed of the motor.
Command Source
This selection allows the user to establish the source of the Run commands. Run commands are Run,
Stop, Jog, etc.
Settings:
Use Terminal Block
Use EOI Keypad
Use RS485
Use Communication Option Board
Frequency Reference Source
This selection allows the user to establish the source of the Frequency (speed) command.
Settings:
Use V/I
Use RR
Use RX
EOI Keypad
RS485
Communication Option Board
RX2 Option (AI1)
Option V/I
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 73
UP/DOWN Frequency
Pulse Input (option)
Pulse Input (motor CPU)
Binary/BCD Input (option)
Display Unit
This parameter sets the unit of measurement for current and voltage values displayed on the EOI.
Wizard: Finish
This is the final screen of the Startup Wizard. The basic parameters of the ASD have been set. Click
Finish to return to the Program mode. Additional application-specific programming may be required.
Operation (Local)
Note: See the section titled EOI Features on pg. 29 for information on Remote operation.
To turn the motor on perform the following:
1. Connect the CC terminal to the ST terminal.
2. Press the Mode key until the Frequency
Command screen is displayed.
3. Press the Local|Remote key to enter the Local
mode (green Local LED illuminates).
4. Turn the Rotary Encoder clockwise until the
desired Frequency Command value is
displayed in the SET field of the LCD screen.
5. Press the Run key and the motor runs at the
Frequency Command value.
Note: The speed of the motor may be changed while the motor is running by using the Rotary
Encoder to change the Frequency Command value.
6. Press the Stop|Reset key to stop the motor.
Frequency Command Screen
74 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Default Setting Changes
To change a default parameter setting go to the root level of the Program menu. Turn the Rotary
Encoder until the desired parameter group is within the cursor block. Press the Rotary Encoder to select
an item or to access a subgroup (repeat if required until reaching the parameter to be changed).
Press the Rotary Encoder to enter the Edit mode and the value/setting takes on the reverse video format
(dark background/light text). Turn the Rotary Encoder to change the parameter value/setting.
Press the Rotary Encoder while the parameter setting is in the reverse video mode to accept the new
setting or press the ESC key while the new parameter setting is in the reverse video mode to exit the menu
without saving the change.
For a complete listing of the Program mode menu selections, see the section titled Program Mode Menu
Navigation on pg. 46. Program menu items are listed and mapped for convenience. The Direct Access
Numbers are listed where applicable.
The default settings may also be changed by entering the Parameter Number of the setting to be changed
at the Direct Access menu (Program ⇒ Direct Access ⇒ Applicable Parameter Number). A listing of the
Direct Access Numbers and a description of the associated parameter may be found in the section titled
Direct Access Parameter Information on pg. 76.
A listing of all parameters that have been changed from the default setting may be viewed sequentially by
accessing the Changed From Default screen (Program ⇒ Utilities ⇒ Changed From Default).
Note: Parameter F201 was changed to create the example shown in Figure 28.
The Changed From Default feature allows the user to quickly access the parameters that are different
from the factory default settings or the post-reset settings. Once the Changed From Default screen is
displayed, the system scrolls through all of the system parameters automatically and halts once reaching a
changed parameter.
Once stopped at a changed parameter, the Rotary Encoder may be clicked once clockwise to continue
scrolling forward or clicked once counterclockwise to begin scrolling in reverse. With each click of the
Rotary Encoder from a stop, the system scrolls through the parameters and stops at the next parameter
that has been changed.
Press the Rotary Encoder while stopped at a changed parameter to display the settings of the changed
parameter. Press the Rotary Encoder to enter the Edit mode — the parameter value/setting takes on the
reverse video format (dark background/light text).Turn the Rotary Encoder to change the parameter
setting.
Press the ESC key while the setting is in the reverse video format to exit the Edit mode without saving the
change and to resume the Change From Default search. Or press the Rotary Encoder while the setting
is in the reverse video format to save the change. Press ESC to return to the Change From Default
search.
Pressing ESC while the system is performing a Changed From Default search terminates the search.
Pressing ESC when done searching (or halted at a changed parameter) takes the menu back one level.
Note: Communications setting changes will require that the power be removed and then re-
applied for the changes to take affect.
Figure 28. Changed From Default screen.
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 75
Save User Settings
A profile of an existing setup may be saved and re-applied when required by using the Save User Setup
feature. This function is carried out via Program ⇒ Utilities ⇒ Type Reset ⇒ Save User Settings.
With the initial setup saved, troubleshooting and diagnostics may be performed and the starting setup may
be re-applied when done via Program ⇒ Utilities ⇒ Type Reset ⇒ Restore User Settings.
Note: EOI settings are not stored using the Save User Settings or the Restore User Settings
feature (i.e., contrast setting, voltage/current units, display gradient characteristics,
etc.).
76 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Direct Access Parameter Information
The H9 ASD has the ability to allow the user direct access to the motor control functions. There are two
ways in which the motor-control parameters may be accessed for modification: Program ⇒ applicable
menu path or Program ⇒ Direct Access ⇒ applicable parameter number. Both methods access the
parameter via the Program mode. Once accessed, the parameter may be viewed or changed.
The Program mode allows the user to develop an application-specific motor-control profile. Motor
control functions may be set to accommodate specific power and timing requirements for a given
application. The configurable parameters of the Program mode that have user-accessible Parameter
Numbers are listed and described below.
Note: Parameter selections are preceded by the number used to select an item if using communications to
write to a parameter location in memory (i.e., F000 ⇒ 0-Manual, 1- No Trip on Acc/Dec, 2-No trip on
Acc Only, etc.).
Note: The setup procedures included within this section may require a Reset before performing the procedure.
Application-specific settings may then be performed. The pre-Reset conditions may be saved (see F007).
Note: Communications setting changes will require that the power be removed and then re-applied for the
changes to take affect.
Direct Access Parameters/Numbers
Automatic Acceleration/Deceleration
Program ⇒ Fundamental ⇒ Accel/Decel #1 Settings
This parameter is used to allow the ASD to adjust the acceleration and
deceleration rates in accordance with the applied load automatically.
The adjusted acceleration and deceleration times range from 12.5% to 800% of
the programmed values for Acceleration Time #1 (F009) and Deceleration
Time #1 (F010).
Settings:
0 — Manual
1 — Automatic ACC/DEC
2 — Automatic ACC Only
Note: The motor and the load must be connected prior to selecting
Automatic Acceleration/Deceleration.
Direct Access Number — F000
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Manual
Changeable During Run — No
Automatic Torque Boost
Program ⇒ Fundamental ⇒ Motor Set #1
This parameter allows the ASD to adjust the output torque in accordance with
the applied load automatically. When enabled Autotuning is performed — the
motor should be connected before performing an Autotune.
Settings:
0 — Disabled
1 — Automatic Torque Boost + Autotuning
2 — Sensorless Vector Control + Autotuning
Direct Access Number — F001
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — No
F000 F001
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 77
Command Mode
Program ⇒ Fundamental ⇒ Standard Mode Selection
The Command Mode Selection establishes the source of the command input
for the ASD. Command inputs include Run, Stop, Forward, etc. The Override
feature may supersede the Command Mode Selection setting (see Command
Mode and Frequency Mode Control on pg. 36).
Settings:
0 — Terminal Block
1 — Not Used
2 — EOI Keypad
3 — RS485
4 — Communication Option Board
Direct Access Number — F003
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Terminal Block
Changeable During Run — No
Frequency Mode 1
Program ⇒ Fundamental ⇒ Standard Mode Selection
The Frequency Mode 1 setting establishes the source of the frequency-control
input for the ASD. The Frequency Mode 2 setting or the Override feature may
supersede the Frequency Mode 1 setting (see Command Mode and Frequency
Mode Control on pg. 36 and F200 for more information on this setting).
Note: Only Bolded items from the Settings list below may be placed in
the Override mode. See the section titled Command Mode and
Frequency Mode Control on pg. 36 for more information on the
Override feature.
Settings:
1 — V/I
2 — RR
3 — RX
5 — EOI Keypad
6 — RS485
7 — Communication Option Board
8 — RX2 Option (AI1)
9 — Option V/I
10 — UP/DOWN Frequency
11 — Pulse Input (option)
12 — Pulse Input (motor CPU)
13 — Binary/BCD Input (option)
Direct Access Number — F004
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — RR
Changeable During Run — No
F003 F004
78 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
FM Output Terminal Function
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Analog Output Terminals
This parameter is used to set the output function of the FM analog output
terminal. The FM output terminal produces an output current or voltage that is
proportional to the magnitude of the function assigned to this terminal (select
current or voltage at F681). The available assignments for this output terminal
are listed in Table 6 on pg. 239.
Note: To read voltage at this terminal connect a 100 – 500
Ω
resistor from
the FM (+) terminal to the CC (-) terminal. Using a voltmeter read
the voltage across the 100 – 500
Ω
resistor.
To read current at this terminal connect a 100 – 500
Ω
resistor from
the FM (+) terminal through a series Ammeter to the CC (-) terminal.
The FM analog output has a maximum resolution of 1/1024 and a
maximum load rating of 500 ohms.
FM Terminal Setup Parameters
F005 — Set FM Function
F006 — Calibrate FM Terminal
F681 — Voltage/Current Output Switching Selection
F682 — Output Response Polarity Selection
F683 — Set Zero Level
Direct Access Number — F005
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — DC (Bus) Voltage
Changeable During Run — Yes
FM Output Terminal Adjustment
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Analog Output Terminals
This parameter is used to calibrate the FM analog output.
To calibrate the FM analog output, connect a meter (current or voltage) as
described at F005.
With the drive running at a known value (e.g., output frequency), adjust this
parameter until the assigned function produces the desired DC level output at
the FM output terminal.
See F005 for more information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F006
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 493
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 1
Maximum — 1280
FM
F005 F006
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 79
Type Reset
Program ⇒ Utilities
This feature assists the user when performing fault analysis or by allowing a
quick system setup change when required. Performing a Type Reset results in
one of the following user-selected post-reset configurations.
Settings:
0 — None
1 — 50 Hz Setting
2 — 60 Hz Setting
3 — Reset to Factory Settings
4 — Clear Past Trips
5 — Clear Run Timer
6 — Initialize Typeform
7 — Save User Settings
8 — Restore User Settings
9 — Clear Cumulative Fan Timer
10 — Accel/Decel Time Setting 0.01 – 600.0 Seconds
11 — Accel/Decel Time Setting 0.1 – 6000.0 Seconds
12 — Update EOI Firmware
13 — Set EOI Memory to Default
14 — Save User Settings to EOI
15 — Restore User Settings from EOI
Direct Access Number — F007
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — None
Changeable During Run — No
Forward/Reverse Run Selection
Program ⇒ Fundamental ⇒ Standard Mode Selection
While operating using the keypad (F003 is set to EOI Keypad) this parameter
sets the direction of motor rotation. This setting may be changed during
operation. This setting will not override parameter F311 (Forward/Reverse
Disable).
If either direction is disabled via parameter F311, the disabled direction will not
be recognized if commanded by the keypad. If both directions are disabled via
parameter F311, the direction command from the keypad will determine the
direction of the motor rotation.
Settings:
0 — Forward
1 — Reverse
2 — Forward (EOI-switchable F/R)
3 — Reverse (EOI-switchable F/R)
Direct Access Number — F008
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Forward
Changeable During Run — Yes
Reset
F007 F008
80 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Acceleration Time 1
Program ⇒ Fundamental ⇒ Accel/Decel #1 Settings
This parameter specifies the time in seconds for the output of the ASD to go
from 0.0 Hz to the Maximum Frequency for the #1 Acceleration profile. The
Accel/Decel pattern may be set using F502. The minimum Accel/Decel time
may be set using F508.
Note: An acceleration time shorter than the load will allow may cause
nuisance tripping and mechanical stress to loads. Automatic
Accel/Decel, Stall, and Ridethrough settings may lengthen the
acceleration times.
Acceleration
The acceleration rate of a motor is determined by several factors: applied
power, applied load, and the physical properties of the motor (winding
parameters, motor size, etc.). The ASD will control the first of these factors:
input power. The settings of the ASD will control the frequency and amplitude
of the applied voltage to the motor.
Under most operating conditions, as the output frequency of the drive goes up
so does the output voltage (linear acceleration). The ASD has the ability to
modify the relationship between frequency and voltage automatically to
produce smoother operation or increased (starting) torque (See F502).
Direct Access Number — F009
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 6000
Units — Seconds
Deceleration Time 1
Program ⇒ Fundamental ⇒ Accel/Decel #1 Settings
This parameter specifies the time in seconds for the output of the ASD to go
from the Maximum Frequency to 0.0 Hz for the #1 Deceleration profile. The
Accel/Decel pattern may be set using F502.
When operating with the Automatic Accel/Decel enabled (F000) the minimum
accel/decel time may be set using F508.
Note: A deceleration time shorter than the load will allow may cause
nuisance tripping and mechanical stress to loads. Automatic
Accel/Decel, Stall, and Ridethrough settings may lengthen the
deceleration times.
Direct Access Number — F010
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 6000
Units — Seconds
Maximum Frequency
Program ⇒ Fundamental ⇒ Frequency Settings
This setting determines the absolute maximum frequency that the ASD can
output.
Accel/decel times are calculated based on the Maximum Frequency setting.
The Maximum Frequency is not limited by this setting while operating in the
Drooping Control mode (see F320 for more information on this setting).
Note: This setting may not be lower than the Upper Limit setting
(F012).
Direct Access Number — F011
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 80.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 30.0
Maximum — 299.0
Units — Hz
F009 F011
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 81
Upper Limit Frequency
Program ⇒ Fundamental ⇒ Frequency Settings
This parameter sets the highest frequency that the ASD will accept as a
frequency command or frequency setpoint. The ASD may output frequencies
higher than the Upper Limit Frequency (but, lower than the Maximum
Frequency) when operating in the PID Control mode, Torque Control mode,
or the Vector Control modes (sensorless or feedback).
Note: This setting may not be higher than the Maximum Frequency
(F011) setting.
Direct Access Number — F012
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — Max. Freq. (F011)
Units — Hz
Lower Limit Frequency
Program ⇒ Fundamental ⇒ Frequency Settings
This parameter sets the lowest frequency that the ASD will accept as a
frequency command or frequency setpoint. The ASD will output frequencies
lower than the Lower Limit Frequency when accelerating to the lower limit or
decelerating to a stop. Frequencies below the Lower Limit may also be output
when operating in the PID Control mode, Torque Control mode, or the
Vector Control modes (sensorless or feedback).
Direct Access Number — F013
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Upper Limit (F012)
Units — Hz
Base Frequency 1
Program ⇒ Fundamental ⇒ Motor Set #1
The Base Frequency 1 setting is the frequency at which the output voltage of
the ASD reaches its maximum setting. The Base Frequency Voltage 1
parameter is set at F409.
For proper motor operation, the Base Frequency should be set for the name-
plated frequency of the motor.
Direct Access Number — F014
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 60.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — Upper Limit (F012)
Units — Hz
V/f Pattern
Program ⇒ Fundamental ⇒ Frequency Settings
This function establishes the relationship between the output frequency and the
output voltage.
Settings:
0 — Constant Torque
1 — Voltage Decrease Curve
2 — Automatic Torque Boost
3 — Sensorless Vector Control (speed)
4 — Sensorless Vector Control (Speed/Torque Switching)
5 — V/f 5-point Curve (Go to F190 to configure the V/f 5-point settings)
6 — PM Drive (Permanent Magnet)
7 — PG Feedback Vector Control (Speed)
8 — PG Feedback Vector Control (Speed/Torque Switching)
Note: When operating in the Vector Control mode the carrier
frequency should be set to 2.2 kHz or above.
The Automatic Torque Boost and the Sensorless Vector Control selections
use the motor tuning parameters of the drive to properly configure the ASD for
the motor being used. If Load Reactors or Long Lead Filters are used, or if
the capacity of the ASD is greater than the motor, manual tuning of the motor
parameters may be required for optimum performance.
Direct Access Number — F015
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Constant Torque
Changeable During Run — No
F012 F015
82 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Manual Torque Boost 1
Program ⇒ Fundamental ⇒ Motor Set #1
The Manual Torque Boost 1 function is used to increase the low frequency
torque for high-inertia loads by increasing the output voltage at frequencies
below ½ of the Base Frequency 1 (F014) setting.
The value programmed as a boost percentage establishes an output voltage vs.
output frequency relationship to be used to start the motor or to provide
smoother operation.
Note: Setting an excessive Torque Boost level may cause nuisance
tripping and mechanical stress to loads.
Direct Access Number — F016
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 30.0
Units — %
Motor Overload Protection Configuration
Program ⇒ Protection ⇒ Overload
This parameter is used to protect the motor from an overcurrent condition. The
type of motor being used and the Overload/Stall setting is selected here to
better match the application.
This parameter setting may extend the Overvoltage Stall time settings.
This parameter may be affected by the setting of the Power Running Stall
Continuous Trip Detection Time (F452).
Settings:
0 — Overload Trip without Stall
1 — Overload Trip with Stall
2 — No Overload without Stall
3 — Stall Only
4 — V/f Motor-Overload without Stall
5 — V/f Motor-Overload with Stall
6 — V/f Motor-No Overload without Stall
7 — V/f Motor-Stall Only
Direct Access Number — F017
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — O/L Trip No Stall
Changeable During Run — Yes
F016 F017
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 83
Preset Speed 1
Program ⇒ Frequency ⇒ Preset Speeds
Up to 15 output frequency values that fall within the Lower Limit and the
Upper Limit range may be programmed into the drive and output as a Preset
Speed. This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 0001 and
is identified as Preset Speed #1. The binary number is applied to S1 – S4 of the
Terminal Board to output the Preset Speed.
Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive Preset Speed
control input at the S1 – S4 terminals:
1. Program ⇒ Fundamental ⇒ Standard Mode Selection ⇒ Command Mode
⇒ Terminal Block.
2. Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Input Terminals ⇒ S1 (set to Preset Speed
Command 1; LSB of 4-bit count). Repeat for S2 – S4 (MSB of 4-bit count)
as Preset Speed Command 2 – 4, respectively (all Normally Open).
3. Program ⇒ Frequency ⇒ Preset Speeds ⇒ Preset Speed 1 (set an output
frequency as Preset Speed #1; repeat for Preset Speeds 2 – 15 as
required).
4. Program ⇒ Pattern Run ⇒ Operation Mode ⇒ Preset Speed Operation
Mode.
Select Enabled to use the direction, accel/decel, and torque settings of the
Preset Speed being run. The torque settings used will be as defined in F170
– F181 and as selected via the associated discrete input terminals V/f
Switching 1 and 2 in Table 5 on pg. 236.
Select Disabled to use the speed setting only of the Preset Speed being run.
5. Place the system in the Remote mode (Local|Remote LED Off).
6. Provide a Run command (connect F and/or R to CC).
Connect S1 to CC to run Preset Speed #1 (S1 to CC = 0001 binary).
With S1 – S4 configured to output Preset Speeds (F115 – F118), 0001 – 1111
may be applied to S1 – S4 of the Terminal Board to run the associated Preset
Speed. If bidirectional operation is required, F and R must be connected to CC,
and Preset Speed Operation Mode must be set to Enabled at F560.
With S1 being the least significant bit of a binary count, the S1 – S4 settings
will produce the programmed speed settings as indicated in the Preset Speed
Truth Table to the right.
Preset Speeds are also used in the Pattern Run mode.
Direct Access Number — F018
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — Lower Limit (F013)
Maximum — Upper Limit (F012)
Units — Hz
Preset Speed Truth Table
Preset Speed 2
Program ⇒ Frequency ⇒ Preset Speeds
This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 0010 and is
identified as Preset Speed #2. The binary number is applied to S1 – S4 of the
Terminal Board to output the Preset Speed (see F018 for more information on
this parameter).
Direct Access Number — F019
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — Lower Limit (F013)
Maximum — Upper Limit (F012)
Units — Hz
Pre
set Speed
1
Preset S4
MSB S3 S2 S1
LSB Output
10001F018
20010F019
30011F020
40100 F021
50101F022
60110F023
70111 F024
81000 F287
91001F288
10 1010F289
11 1011F290
12 1100 F291
13 1101F292
14 1110F293
15 1111F294
Note: 1 = Terminal connected to CC.
Pre
set Speed
2
F018 F019
84 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Preset Speed 3
Program ⇒ Frequency ⇒ Preset Speeds
This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 0011 and is
identified as Preset Speed #3. The binary number is applied to S1 – S4 of the
Terminal Board to output the Preset Speed (see F018 for more information on
this parameter).
Direct Access Number — F020
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — Lower Limit (F013)
Maximum — Upper Limit (F012)
Units — Hz
Preset Speed 4
Program ⇒ Frequency ⇒ Preset Speeds
This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 0100 and is
identified as Preset Speed #4. The binary number is applied to S1 – S4 of the
Terminal Board to output the Preset Speed (see F018 for more information on
this parameter).
Direct Access Number — F021
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — Lower Limit (F013)
Maximum — Upper Limit (F012)
Units — Hz
Preset Speed 5
Program ⇒ Frequency ⇒ Preset Speeds
This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 0101 and is
identified as Preset Speed #5. The binary number is applied to S1 – S4 of the
Terminal Board to output the Preset Speed (see F018 for more information on
this parameter).
Direct Access Number — F022
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — Lower Limit (F013)
Maximum — Upper Limit (F012)
Units — Hz
Preset Speed 6
Program ⇒ Frequency ⇒ Preset Speeds
This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 0110 and is
identified as Preset Speed #6. The binary number is applied to S1 – S4 of the
Terminal Board to output the Preset Speed (see F018 for more information on
this parameter).
Direct Access Number — F023
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — Lower Limit (F013)
Maximum — Upper Limit (F012)
Units — Hz
Preset Speed 7
Program ⇒ Frequency ⇒ Preset Speeds
This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 0111 and is
identified as Preset Speed #7. The binary number is applied to S1 – S4 of the
Terminal Board to output the Preset Speed (see F018 for more information on
this parameter).
Direct Access Number — F024
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — Lower Limit (F013)
Maximum — Upper Limit (F012)
Units — Hz
Pre
set Speed
3
Preset Speed 4
F020 F024
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 85
Automatic Function Selection
Program ⇒ Utilities ⇒ Display Parameters
This parameter setting is used to configure multiple parameters with the setting
of only one parameter. From the selection below multiple parameters may be
set as indicated in the table.
Once set, the selected configuration is placed in effect and remains in effect
until this parameter is changed or the individual settings are changed.
Set this parameter to Disable to set these parameters individually.
Note: After performing the desired selection the EOI display returns to
Disabled though the selected function has been carried out (i.e.,
without this, if selection 1 is performed, F004 and F207 would
hold the RR terminal setting regardless of attempts to change the
settings individually).
Settings:
0 — Disabled
1 — RR
2 — V/I
3 — RR or V/I Switched via Terminal Board
4 — Keypad = Frequency/Terminal Board = Command
5 — Keypad = Frequency and Command
Direct Access Number — F040
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — No
User Settings
Related
Parameters Default
Settings 0-Disable 1-RR 2-V/I 3-RR or V/I
via TB
4-Keypad/
Freq.
CMD/TB
5-Keypad
Freq/CMD
CMOD
F003
Terminal
Board N/C Terminal
Board Keypad
FMOD1
F004 RR N/C RR N/C RR Keypad
S3 Terminal
F117
Preset
Speed 3 N/C Freq. Ref.
Priority N/C
Freq.
Priority
F200
Terminal
Board N/C Terminal Board
V/I Setup
F201 0.0% N/C 20.0% N/C
FMOD2
F207 V/I N/C RR V/I Keypad
N/C = No Change — the setting remains as it was before setting parameter F040.
F040 F040
86 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Low-Speed Signal Output Frequency
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Reach Settings
The Low Speed Signal Output Frequency parameter sets a frequency
threshold that activates the assigned output terminal for the duration that the
ASD output is at or above this setting (see Table 8 on pg. 241 for the available
output assignments).
Direct Access Number — F100
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (F011)
Units — Hz
Speed Reach Frequency
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Reach Settings
The Speed Reach Frequency sets a frequency threshold that, when reached or
is within the bandwidth specified by parameter F102, activates the assigned
output terminal for the duration that the ASD output is within the bandwidth
specified (see Table 8 on pg. 241 for the available output assignments).
Direct Access Number — F101
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (F011)
Units — Hz
Speed Reach Detection Band
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Reach Settings
This parameter sets the bandwidth of the Speed Reach Frequency (F101)
setting.
Direct Access Number — F102
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 2.50
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (F011)
Units — Hz
Forward/Reverse Run Priority Selection
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Input Special Functions
The Forward/Reverse Priority Selection determines the operation of the ASD
if the F and R control terminals are activated simultaneously.
Settings:
0 — Reverse
1 — Suspend
The waveforms shown depict the motor response for all combinations of the F
and R terminal settings if the Reverse option is chosen.
The Suspend setting will decelerate the motor to a stop regardless of the
rotation direction when both the F and R control terminals are activated.
Direct Access Number — F105
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Suspend
Changeable During Run — No
Simultaneous F and R activation.
Low Speed
Reach
Fr
equen
cy
F100 F105
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 87
Input Terminal Priority
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Input Special Functions
This parameter is used to allow the Jog and DC Injection Braking input
signals to control the ASD when received via the Terminal Board even though
the system is in the Local mode.
With this parameter enabled, a Jog command or a DC Injection Braking
command received from the Terminal Board will receive priority over
commands from the EOI.
See F260 for more information on using the Jog function.
See F250 – F252 for more information on DC Injection Braking.
Settings:
0 — Disabled
1 — Enabled
Direct Access Number — F106
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — No
16-Bit Binary/BCD Input
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Input Special Functions
The extended terminal function is used with the optional Expansion IO Card
Option (P/N ETB004Z).
This parameter defines the format of the binary or BCD data when using the
option card.
Note: The Expansion IO Card Option 2 option board is required to
use this terminal.
See the Expansion IO Card Option 1 instruction manual (P/N 58685) for
more information on the function of this terminal.
Settings:
0 — None
1 — 12-Bit Binary
2 — 16-Bit Binary
3 — 3-Digit BCD
4 — 4-Digit BCD
5 — Inverted 12-Bit Binary
6 — Inverted 16-Bit Binary
7 — Inverted 3-Digit BCD
8 — Inverted 4-Digit BCD
Selections using 16-bit binary or 4-digit BCD will require the configuration of
terminals S1-S4 on the Terminal Board as binary bits 0 – 3 (F115 – F118).
The Frequency Mode 1 (F004) parameter must be set to Binary/BCD.
For proper scaling of the binary or BCD input, parameters F228 – F231 must
be configured.
Direct Access Number — F107
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — None
Changeable During Run — No
F106 F107
88 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Option V/I Terminal Voltage/Current Selection
Program ⇒ Frequency ⇒ V/I Settings
This parameter is used to set the AI2 input terminal to receive either current or
voltage as a control signal.
Note: The Expansion IO Card Option 2 option board (P/N ETB004Z)
is required to use this terminal.
See the Expansion IO Card Option 2 instruction manual (P/N 58686) for
more information on the function of this terminal.
Settings:
0 — Voltage Input
1 — Current Input
Direct Access Number — F109
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Voltage Input
Changeable During Run — No
Always ON 1 Terminal 1
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Input Terminals ⇒ ON
This parameter is used to set the functionality of the virtual discrete input
terminal ON. As a virtual terminal, the ON control terminal exists only in
memory and is considered to always be in its True (connected to CC) state.
It is often practical to assign a function to this terminal that the user desires to
be maintained regardless of external conditions or operations.
This parameter sets the programmable ON terminal to any one of the user-
selectable functions listed in Table 5 on pg. 236.
Direct Access Number — F110
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Unassigned
Changeable During Run — No
Input Terminal 1 (F) Function
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Input Terminals
This parameter is used to set the functionality of the F discrete input terminal.
In addition, this input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
This parameter sets the programmable F terminal to any one of the user-
selectable functions listed in Table 5 on pg. 236.
Direct Access Number — F111
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default—Forward Forward
Changeable During Run — No
Input Terminal 2 (R) Function
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Input Terminals
This parameter is used to set the functionality of the R discrete input terminal.
In addition, this input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
This parameter sets the programmable R terminal to any one of the user-
selectable functions listed in Table 5 on pg. 236.
Direct Access Number — F112
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Reverse Reverse
Changeable During Run — No
Input Terminal 3 (ST) Function
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Input Terminals
This parameter is used to set the functionality of the ST discrete input terminal.
In addition, this input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
This parameter sets the programmable ST terminal to any one of the user-
selectable functions listed in Table 5 on pg. 236.
Direct Access Number — F113
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Standby Standby
Changeable During Run — No
F109 F113
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 89
Input Terminal 4 (RES) Function
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Input Terminals
This parameter is used to set the functionality of the RES discrete input
terminal.
In addition, this input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
This parameter sets the programmable RES terminal to any one of the user-
selectable functions listed in Table 5 on pg. 236.
Direct Access Number — F114
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Reset Reset
Changeable During Run — No
Input Terminal 5 (S1) Function
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Input Terminals
This parameter is used to set the functionality of the S1 discrete input terminal.
In addition, this input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
This parameter sets the programmable S1 terminal to any one of the user-
selectable functions listed in Table 5 on pg. 236.
Direct Access Number — F115
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Preset Speed 1
Changeable During Run — No
Input Terminal 6 (S2) Function
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Input Terminals
This parameter is used to set the functionality of the S2 discrete input terminal.
In addition, this input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
This parameter sets the programmable S2 terminal to any one of the user-
selectable functions listed in Table 5 on pg. 236.
Direct Access Number — F116
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Preset Speed 2
Changeable During Run — No
Input Terminal 7 (S3) Function
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Input Terminals
This parameter is used to set the functionality of the S3 discrete input terminal.
In addition, this input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
This parameter sets the programmable S3 terminal to any one of the user-
selectable functions listed in Table 5 on pg. 236.
Direct Access Number — F117
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Preset Speed 3
Changeable During Run — No
Input Terminal 8 (S4) Function
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Input Terminals
This parameter is used to set the functionality of the S4 discrete input terminal.
In addition, this input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
This parameter sets the programmable S4 terminal to any one of the user-
selectable functions listed in Table 5 on pg. 236.
Direct Access Number — F118
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Preset Speed 4
Changeable During Run — No
F114 F118
90 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Input Terminal 9 (LI1) Function
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Input Terminals
This parameter is used to set the functionality of the LI1 discrete input terminal.
In addition, this input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable LI1 terminal to any one
of the user-selectable functions listed in Table 5 on pg. 236.
Note: The Expansion IO Card Option 1 option board (P/N ETB003Z)
is required to use this terminal.
See the Expansion IO Card Option 1 instruction manual (P/N 58685) for
more information on the function of this terminal.
Direct Access Number — F119
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Unassigned
Changeable During Run — No
Input Terminal 10 (LI2) Function
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Input Terminals
This parameter is used to set the functionality of the LI2 discrete input terminal.
In addition, this input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable LI2 terminal to any one
of the user-selectable functions listed in Table 5 on pg. 236.
Note: The Expansion IO Card Option 1 option board (P/N ETB003Z)
is required to use this terminal.
See the Expansion IO Card Option 1 instruction manual (P/N 58685) for
more information on the function of this terminal.
Direct Access Number — F120
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Unassigned
Changeable During Run — No
Input Terminal 11 (LI3) Function
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Input Terminals
This parameter is used to set the functionality of the LI3 discrete input terminal.
In addition, this input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable LI3 terminal to any one
of the user-selectable functions listed in Table 5 on pg. 236.
Note: The Expansion IO Card Option 1 option board (P/N ETB003Z)
is required to use this terminal.
See the Expansion IO Card Option 1 instruction manual (P/N 58685) for
more information on the function of this terminal.
Direct Access Number — F121
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Unassigned
Changeable During Run — No
F119 F121
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 91
Input Terminal 12 (LI4) Function
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Input Terminals
This parameter is used to set the functionality of the LI4 discrete input terminal.
In addition, this input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable LI4 terminal to any one
of the user-selectable functions listed in Table 5 on pg. 236.
Note: The Expansion IO Card Option 1 option board (P/N ETB003Z)
is required to use this terminal.
See the Expansion IO Card Option 1 instruction manual (P/N 58685) for
more information on the function of this terminal.
Direct Access Number — F122
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Unassigned
Changeable During Run — No
Input Terminal 13 (LI5) Function
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Input Terminals
This parameter is used to set the functionality of the LI5 discrete input terminal.
In addition, this input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable LI5 terminal to any one
of the user-selectable functions listed in Table 5 on pg. 236.
Note: The Expansion IO Card Option 2 option board (P/N ETB004Z)
is required to use this terminal.
See the Expansion IO Card Option 2 instruction manual (P/N 58686) for
more information on the function of this terminal.
Direct Access Number — F123
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Unassigned
Changeable During Run — No
Input Terminal 14 (LI6) Function
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Input Terminals
This parameter is used to set the functionality of the LI6 discrete input terminal.
In addition, this input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable LI6 terminal to any one
of the user-selectable functions listed in Table 5 on pg. 236
Note: The Expansion IO Card Option 2 option board (P/N ETB004Z)
is required to use this terminal.
See the Expansion IO Card Option 2 instruction manual (P/N 58686) for
more information on the function of this terminal.
Direct Access Number — F124
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Unassigned
Changeable During Run — No
F122 F124
92 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Input Terminal 15 (LI7) Function
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Input Terminals
This parameter is used to set the functionality of the LI7 discrete input terminal.
In addition, this input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable LI7 terminal to any one
of the user-selectable functions listed in Table 5 on pg. 236.
Note: The Expansion IO Card Option 2 option board (P/N ETB004Z)
is required to use this terminal.
See the Expansion IO Card Option 2 instruction manual (P/N 58686) for
more information on the function of this terminal.
Direct Access Number — F125
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Unassigned
Changeable During Run — No
Input Terminal 16 (LI8) Function
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Input Terminals
This parameter is used to set the functionality of the LI8 discrete input terminal.
In addition, this input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable LI8 terminal to any one
of the user-selectable functions listed in Table 5 on pg. 236.
Note: The Expansion IO Card Option 2 option board (P/N ETB004Z)
is required to use this terminal.
See the Expansion IO Card Option 2 instruction manual (P/N 58686) for
more information on the function of this terminal.
Direct Access Number — F126
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Unassigned
Changeable During Run — No
Output Terminal 1 (OUT1) Function
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Output Terminals
This parameter is used to set the functionality of the OUT1 discrete output
terminals O1A and O1B.
The O1A and O1B (OUT1) output terminals change states (open or close) as a
function of a user-selected event. See Table 8 on pg. 241 for listing the possible
assignments for the OUT1 terminals.
In addition, the output terminals must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
See parameter F669 for more information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F130
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Low Speed Signal
Changeable During Run — No
Output Terminal 2 (OUT2) Function
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Output Terminals
This parameter is used to set the functionality of the OUT2 discrete output
terminals O2A and O2B.
The O2A and O2B (OUT2) output terminals change states (open or close) as a
function of a user-selected event. See Table 8 on pg. 241 for listing the possible
assignments for the OUT2 terminals.
In addition, the output terminals must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
See parameter F669 for more information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F131
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — RCH (Acc/Dec
Complete)
Changeable During Run — No
OU
T
1
OU
T
2
F125 F131
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 93
Output Terminal 3 (FL) Function
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Output Terminals
This parameter is used to set the functionality of the FL output terminals to one
of the functions listed in Table 8 on pg. 241.
In addition, the output terminals must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
Direct Access Number — F132
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Fault (All)
Changeable During Run — No
Output Terminal 4 (OUT3) Function
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Output Terminals
This parameter is used to set the functionality of the OUT3 discrete output
terminal.
In addition, this input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable OUT3 terminal to any
one of the user-selectable functions listed in Table 8 on pg. 241.
Note: The Expansion IO Card Option 1 option board (P/N ETB003Z)
is required to use this terminal.
See the Expansion IO Card Option 1 instruction manual (P/N 58685) for
more information on the function of this terminal.
Direct Access Number — F133
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Always OFF
Changeable During Run — No
Output Terminal 5 (OUT4) Function
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Output Terminals
This parameter is used to set the functionality of the OUT4 discrete output
terminal.
In addition, this input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable OUT4 terminal to any
one of the user-selectable functions listed in Table 8 on pg. 241.
Note: The Expansion IO Card Option 1 option board (P/N ETB003Z)
is required to use this terminal.
See the Expansion IO Card Option 1 instruction manual (P/N 58685) for
more information on the function of this terminal.
Direct Access Number — F134
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Always OFF
Changeable During Run — No
F132 F134
94 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Output Terminal 6 (R1) Function
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Output Terminals
This parameter is used to set the functionality of the R1 discrete output
terminal.
In addition, this input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable R1 terminal to any one of
the user-selectable functions listed in Table 8 on pg. 241.
Note: The Expansion IO Card Option 1 option board (P/N ETB003Z)
is required to use this terminal.
See the Expansion IO Card Option 1 instruction manual (P/N 58685) for
more information on the function of this terminal.
Direct Access Number — F135
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Always OFF
Changeable During Run — No
Output Terminal 7 (OUT5) Function
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Output Terminals
This parameter is used to set the functionality of the OUT5 discrete output
terminal.
In addition, this output terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable OUT5 terminal to any
one of the user-selectable functions listed in Table 8 on pg. 241.
Note: The Expansion IO Card Option 2 option board (P/N ETB004Z)
is required to use this terminal.
See the Expansion IO Card Option 2 instruction manual (P/N 58686) for
more information on the function of this terminal.
Direct Access Number — F136
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Always Off
Changeable During Run — No
Output Terminal 8 (OUT6) Function
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Output Terminals
This parameter is used to set the functionality of the OUT6 discrete output
terminal.
In addition, this output terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable OUT6 terminal to any
one of the user-selectable functions listed in Table 8 on pg. 241.
Note: The Expansion IO Card Option 2 option board (P/N ETB004Z)
is required to use this terminal.
See the Expansion IO Card Option 2 instruction manual (P/N 58686) for
more information on the function of this terminal.
Direct Access Number — F137
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Always Off
Changeable During Run — No
F135 F137
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 95
Output Terminal 9 (R2) Function
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Output Terminals
This parameter is used to set the functionality of the R2 discrete output
terminal.
In addition, this output terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable R2 terminal to any one of
the user-selectable functions listed in Table 8 on pg. 241.
Note: The Expansion IO Card Option 2 option board (P/N ETB004Z)
is required to use this terminal.
See the Expansion IO Card Option 2 instruction manual (P/N 58686) for
more information on the function of this terminal.
Direct Access Number — F138
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Always Off
Changeable During Run — No
Input Terminal 1 (F) Response Time
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Input Terminal Delays
This parameter delays the response of the ASD to any change in the F terminal
input by the programmed value.
The delay may be increased to provide additional electrical noise immunity or
to prevent the ASD from responding to contact bounce or chatter.
Direct Access Number — F140
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 8.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 2.0
Maximum — 200.0
Units — mS
Input Terminal 2 (R) Response Time
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Input Terminal Delays
This parameter delays the response of the drive to any change in the R terminal
input by the programmed value (see waveforms at F140).
The delay may be increased to provide additional electrical noise immunity or
to prevent the ASD from responding to contact bounce or chatter.
Direct Access Number — F141
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 8.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 2.0
Maximum — 200.0
Units — mS
Input Terminal 3 (ST) Response Time
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Input Terminal Delays
This parameter delays the response of the drive to any change in the ST
terminal input by the programmed value (see waveforms at F140).
The delay may be increased to provide additional electrical noise immunity or
to prevent the ASD from responding to contact bounce or chatter.
Direct Access Number — F142
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 8.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 2.0
Maximum — 200.0
Units — mS
F138 F142
96 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Input Terminal 4 (RES) Response Time
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Input Terminal Delays
This parameter delays the response of the drive to any change in the RES
terminal input by the programmed value (see waveforms at F140).
The delay may be increased to provide additional electrical noise immunity or
to prevent the ASD from responding to contact bounce or chatter.
Direct Access Number — F143
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 8.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 2.0
Maximum — 200.0
Units — mS
Input Terminal 5 – 12 Response Time
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Input Terminal Delays
This parameter delays the response of the drive to any change in the 5 – 12
terminal inputs by the programmed value (see waveforms at F140).
The delay may be increased to provide additional electrical noise immunity or
to prevent the ASD from responding to contact bounce or chatter.
Direct Access Number — F144
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 8.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 2.0
Maximum — 200.0
Units — mS
Input Terminal 13 – 20 Response Time
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Input Terminal Delays
This parameter delays the response of the drive to any change in the 13 – 20
terminal inputs by the programmed value (see waveforms at F140).
The delay may be increased to provide additional electrical noise immunity or
to prevent the ASD from responding to contact bounce or chatter.
Direct Access Number — F145
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 8.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 2.0
Maximum — 200.0
Units — mS
Input Terminal 17 (B12) Function
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Input Terminals
This parameter is used to set the functionality of the B12 discrete input
terminal.
In addition, this input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
This setting assigns the functionality of the programmable B12 terminal to any
one of the user-selectable functions listed in Table 5 on pg. 236.
See the My Function Instruction Manual (P/N 58692) for more information
on the function of this terminal.
Direct Access Number — F164
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Unassigned
Changeable During Run — No
Input Terminal 18 (B13) Function
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Input Terminals
This parameter is used to set the functionality of the B13 discrete input
terminal.
In addition, this input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable B13 terminal to any one
of the user-selectable functions listed in Table 5 on pg. 236.
See the My Function Instruction Manual (P/N 58692) for more information
on the function of this terminal.
Direct Access Number — F165
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Unassigned
Changeable During Run — No
F143 F165
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 97
Input Terminal 19 (B14) Function
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Input Terminals
This parameter is used to set the functionality of the B14 discrete input
terminal.
In addition, this input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable B14 terminal to any one
of the user-selectable functions listed in Table 5 on pg. 236.
See the My Function Instruction Manual (P/N 58692) for more information
on the function of this terminal.
Direct Access Number — F166
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Unassigned
Changeable During Run — No
Input Terminal 20 (B15) Function
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Input Terminals
This parameter is used to set the functionality of the B15 discrete input
terminal.
In addition, this input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable B15 terminal to any one
of the user-selectable functions listed in Table 5 on pg. 236.
See the My Function Instruction Manual (P/N 58692) for more information
on the function of this terminal.
Direct Access Number — F167
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Unassigned
Changeable During Run — No
Output Terminal 10 (R3) Function
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Output Terminals
This parameter sets the functionality of the R3 output terminal to any one of the
user-selectable functions listed in Table 8 on pg. 241.
In addition, the output terminals must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
See the instruction manual for the 16-bit BIN/BCD option for more
information on the function of this terminal.
Direct Access Number — F168
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — OFF
Changeable During Run — No
Output Terminal 11 (R4) Function
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Output Terminals
This parameter sets the functionality of the R4 output terminal to any one of the
user-selectable functions listed in Table 8 on pg. 241.
In addition, the output terminals must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
See the instruction manual for the 16-bit BIN/BCD option for more
information on the function of this terminal.
Direct Access Number — F169
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — OFF
Changeable During Run — No
F166 F169
98 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Base Frequency 2
Program ⇒ Motor ⇒ Motor Set #2
The Base Frequency 2 setting is the frequency at which the output voltage of
the ASD reaches its maximum setting. The Base Frequency Voltage 2
parameter is set at F171.
This parameter is used only when the parameters for motor set #2 are
configured and selected. Motor set #2 may be selected by a properly configured
input terminal (see Table 5 on pg. 236).
For proper motor operation, the Base Frequency should be set for the name-
plated frequency of the motor.
Direct Access Number — F170
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 60.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 25.0
Maximum — 299.0
Units — Hz
Base Frequency Voltage 2
Program ⇒ Motor ⇒ Motor Set #2
The Base Frequency Voltage 2 setting is the Motor #2 output voltage at the
Base Frequency (F170). Regardless of the programmed value, the output
voltage cannot be higher than the input voltage.
The actual output voltage will be influenced by the input voltage of the ASD
and the Supply Voltage Compensation setting (F307).
This parameter is used only when the parameters for motor set #2 are
configured and selected. Motor set #2 may be selected by a properly configured
input terminal (see Table 5 on pg. 236).
Direct Access Number — F171
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 50.0
Maximum — 660.0
Units — Volts
Manual Torque Boost 2
Program ⇒ Motor ⇒ Motor Set #2
The Manual Torque Boost 2 function is used to increase the low frequency
torque for high inertia loads by increasing the output voltage at frequencies
below ½ of the Base Frequency 2 setting (F170).
See parameter F016 (Manual Torque Boost 1) for an explanation of torque
boost.
This parameter is used only when the parameters for motor set #2 are
configured and selected. Motor set #2 may be selected by a properly configured
input terminal (see Table 5 on pg. 236).
Direct Access Number — F172
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 30.0
Units — %
Motor Overload Protection Level 2
Program ⇒ Motor ⇒ Motor Set #2
The Motor 2 Overload Protection Level parameter specifies the motor
overload current level for motor set #2. This value is entered as either a
percentage of the full load rating of the ASD or as the FLA of the motor.
The unit of measurement for this parameter may be set to Amps (A/V) or it
may be set as a percentage of the ASD rating. The name-plated FLA of the
motor may be entered directly when Amps is selected as the unit of
measurement (see F701 to change the display unit).
The Motor 2 Overload Protection Level setting will be displayed in Amps if
the EOI display units are set to A/V rather than %.
Direct Access Number — F173
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 100
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 10
Maximum — 100
Units — %
F170 F173
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 99
Base Frequency 3
Program ⇒ Motor ⇒ Motor Set #3
The Base Frequency 3 setting is the frequency at which the output voltage of
the ASD reaches its maximum setting. The Base Frequency Voltage 3
parameter is set at is set at F175.
This parameter is used only when the parameters for motor set #3 are
configured and selected. Motor set #3 may be selected by a properly configured
input terminal (see Table 5 on pg. 236).
For proper motor operation, the Base Frequency should be set for the name-
plated frequency of the motor.
Direct Access Number — F174
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 60.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 25.0
Maximum — 299.0
Units — Hz
Base Frequency Voltage 3
Program ⇒ Motor ⇒ Motor Set #3
The Base Frequency Voltage 3 setting is the Motor #3 output voltage at the
Base Frequency (F174). Regardless of the programmed value, the output
voltage cannot be higher than the input voltage.
The actual output voltage will be influenced by the input voltage of the ASD
and the Supply Voltage Compensation setting (F307).
This parameter is used only when the parameters for motor set #3 are
configured and selected. Motor set #3 may be selected by a properly configured
input terminal (see Table 5 on pg. 236).
Direct Access Number — F175
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 50.0
Maximum — 660.0
Units — Volts
Manual Torque Boost 3
Program ⇒ Motor ⇒ Motor Set #3
The Manual Torque Boost 3 function is used to increase the low frequency
torque for high inertia loads by increasing the output voltage at frequencies
below ½ of the Base Frequency 3 setting (F174).
See parameter F016 (Manual Torque Boost 1) for an explanation of torque
boost.
This parameter is used only when the parameters for motor set #3 are
configured and selected. Motor set #3 may be selected by a properly configured
input terminal (see Table 5 on pg. 236).
Direct Access Number — F176
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 30.0
Units — %
Motor Overload Protection Level 3
Program ⇒ Motor ⇒ Motor Set #3
The Motor 3 Overload Protection Level parameter specifies the motor
overload current level for motor set #3. This value is entered as either a
percentage of the full load rating of the ASD or as the FLA of the motor.
The unit of measurement for this parameter may be set to Amps (A/V) or it
may be set as a percentage of the ASD rating. The name-plated FLA of the
motor may be entered directly when Amps is selected as the unit of
measurement (see F701 to change the display unit).
The Motor 3 Overload Protection Level setting will be displayed in Amps if
the EOI display units are set to A/V rather than %.
Direct Access Number — F177
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 100.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 10
Maximum — 100
Units — %
F174 F177
100 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Base Frequency 4
Program ⇒ Motor ⇒ Motor Set #4
The Base Frequency 4 setting is the frequency at which the output voltage of
the ASD reaches its maximum setting. The Base Frequency Voltage 4
parameter is set at F179.
This parameter is used only when the parameters for motor set #4 are
configured and selected. Motor set #4 may be selected by a properly configured
input terminal (see Table 5 on pg. 236).
For proper motor operation, the Base Frequency should be set for the name-
plated frequency of the motor.
Direct Access Number — F178
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 60.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 25.00
Maximum — 299.0
Units — Hz
Base Frequency Voltage 4
Program ⇒ Motor ⇒ Motor Set #4
The Base Frequency Voltage 4 is the Motor #4 output voltage at the Base
Frequency (F178). Regardless of the programmed value, the output voltage
cannot be higher than the input voltage.
The actual output voltage will be influenced by the input voltage of the ASD
and the Supply Voltage Compensation setting (F307).
This parameter is used only when the parameters for motor set #4 are
configured and selected. Motor set #4 may be selected by a properly configured
input terminal (see Table 5 on pg. 236).
Direct Access Number — F179
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 50.0
Maximum — 660.0
Units — Volts
Manual Torque Boost 4
Program ⇒ Motor ⇒ Motor Set #4
The Manual Torque Boost 4 function is used to increase the low frequency
torque for high inertia loads by increasing the output voltage at frequencies
below ½ of the #4 Base Frequency setting (F178).
See parameter F016 (Manual Torque Boost 1) for an explanation of torque
boost.
This parameter is used only when the parameters for motor set #4 are
configured and selected. Motor set #4 may be selected by a properly configured
input terminal (see Table 5 on pg. 236).
Direct Access Number — F180
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 30.0
Units — %
Motor Overload Protection Level 4
Program ⇒ Motor ⇒ Motor Set #4
The Motor 4 Overload Protection Level parameter specifies the motor
overload current level for motor set #4. This value is entered as either a
percentage of the full load rating of the ASD or as the FLA of the motor.
The unit of measurement for this parameter may be set to Amps (A/V) or it
may be set as a percentage of the ASD rating. The name-plated FLA of the
motor may be entered directly when Amps is selected as the unit of
measurement (see F701 to change the display unit).
The Motor 4 Overload Protection Level setting will be displayed in Amps if
the EOI display units are set to A/V rather than %.
Direct Access Number — F181
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 100.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 10
Maximum — 100
Units — %
F178 F181
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 101
V/f Five-Point Setting Frequency 1
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ V/f Five-Point Setting
The V/f Five-Point Setting Frequency 1 setting establishes the frequency that
is to be associated with the voltage setting of F191 (V/f Five-Point Setting
Voltage 1).
The V/f five-point settings define a custom volts per hertz relationship for the
startup output of the ASD.
To enable this function, set the V/f Pattern (F015) selection to the V/f 5-Point
Curve setting.
Custom V/f Curves may be useful in starting high inertia loads such as rotary
drum vacuum filters.
Direct Access Number — F190
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (F011)
Units — Hz
F190 F190
102 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
V/f Five-Point Setting Voltage 1
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ V/f Five-Point Setting
The V/f Five-Point Setting Voltage 1 establishes the output voltage level that
is to be associated with the frequency setting of F190 (V/f Five-Point Setting
Frequency 1).
The F701 parameter setting will determine if the on-screen selection for this
parameter appears in the form of a Voltage (V) or as a Percentage (%) of the
ASD rating.
If using Voltage as a unit of measure and with no voltage correction (F307
Disabled), the limit of the on-screen display value for this parameter is 200
volts for the 230-volt ASD and 400 volts for the 460-volt ASD.
The actual output voltage is scaled to the maximum EOI display values (e.g., a
100-volt EOI display corresponds to a 115-volt actual output for the 230-volt
ASD — ½ of the full display range).
If using % as a unit of measure and with no voltage correction (F307 Disabled),
the ASD output voltage will be the percentage setting times 230 for the 230-
volt unit (or % times 460 volts for the 460-volt unit).
See F190 for additional information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F191
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 100.0
Units — V or % (F701)
V/f Five-Point Setting Frequency 2
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ V/f Five-Point Setting
The Custom V/f Five-Point Setting Frequency 2 sets the frequency to be
associated with the voltage setting of parameter F193 (V/f Five-Point Setting
Voltage 2).
See F190 and F191 for additional information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F192
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (F011)
Units — Hz
F191 F192
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 103
V/f Five-Point Setting Voltage 2
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ V/f Five-Point Setting
The V/f Five-Point Setting Voltage 2 establishes the output voltage level that
is to be associated with the frequency setting of F192 (V/f Five-Point Setting
Frequency 2).
The F701 parameter setting will determine if the selection for this parameter
appears in the form of a Voltage (V) or as a Percentage (%) of the ASD rating.
The default setting is %.
See F190 and F191 for additional information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F193
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 100.0
Units — V or % (F701)
V/f Five-Point Setting Frequency 3
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ V/f Five-Point Setting
The Custom V/f Five-Point Setting Frequency 3 sets the frequency to be
associated with the voltage setting of parameter F195 (V/f Five-Point Setting
Voltage 3).
See F190 and F191 for additional information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F194
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (F011)
Units — Hz
V/f Five-Point Setting Voltage 3
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ V/f Five-Point Setting
The V/f Five-Point Setting Voltage 3 establishes the output voltage level that
is to be associated with the frequency setting of F194 (V/f Five-Point Setting
Frequency 3).
The F701 parameter setting will determine if the selection for this parameter
appears in the form of a Voltage (V) or as a Percentage (%) of the ASD rating.
The default setting is %.
See F190 and F191 for additional information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F195
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 100.0
Units — V or % (F701)
V/f Five-Point Setting Frequency 4
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ V/f Five-Point Setting
The Custom V/f Five-Point Setting Frequency 4 sets the frequency to be
associated with the voltage setting of parameter F197 (V/f Five-Point Setting
Voltage 4).
See F190 and F191 for additional information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F196
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (F011)
Units — Hz
V/f Five-Point Setting Voltage 4
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ V/f Five-Point Setting
The V/f Five-Point Setting Voltage 4 establishes the output voltage level that
is to be associated with the frequency setting of F196 (V/f Five-Point Setting
Frequency 4).
The F701 parameter setting will determine if the selection for this parameter
appears in the form of a Voltage (V) or as a Percentage (%) of the ASD rating.
The default setting is %.
See F190 and F191 for additional information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F197
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 100.0
Units — V or % (F701)
F193 F197
104 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
V/f Five-Point Setting Frequency 5
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ V/f Five-Point Setting
The Custom V/f Five-Point Setting Frequency 5 sets the frequency to be
associated with the voltage setting of parameter F199 (V/f Five-Point Setting
Voltage 5).
See F190 and F191 for additional information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F198
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (F011)
Units — Hz
V/f Five-Point Setting Voltage 5
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ V/f Five-Point Setting
The V/f Five-Point Setting Voltage 5 establishes the output voltage level that
is to be associated with the frequency setting of F198 (V/f Five-Point Setting
Frequency 5).
The F701 parameter setting will determine if the selection for this parameter
appears in the form of a Voltage (V) or as a Percentage (%) of the ASD rating.
The default setting is %.
See F190 and F191 for additional information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F199
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 100.0
Units — V or % (F701)
Frequency Priority Selection
Program ⇒ Fundamental ⇒ Standard Mode Selection
Either Frequency Mode 1 or Frequency Mode 2 may control the output
frequency of the ASD. This parameter determines which of the two will control
the output frequency and the conditions in which control will be switched from
one to the other.
Note: Frequency Mode is abbreviated as FMOD.
Settings:
0 — FMOD changed by Terminal Board (Frequency Mode)
1 — FMOD (F208) (Frequency Mode)
The Frequency Mode 1 or Frequency Mode 2 selection specifies the source of
the input frequency command signal. These selections are performed at F004
and F207, respectively.
If FMOD changed by Terminal Board is selected here, the ASD will follow
the control of the discrete input terminal assigned the function of Frequency
Priority. The discrete terminal Frequency Priority will toggle control to and
from Frequency Mode 1 and Frequency Mode 2 with each activation/
deactivation.
If FMOD (F208) is selected here, the ASD will follow the control of the
Frequency Mode 1 setting for the duration that the commanded frequency of
the Frequency Mode 1 setting is greater than the setting of F208.
If the commanded frequency of the Frequency Mode 1 setting is less than or
equal to the setting of F208 the ASD will follow the setting of Frequency
Mode 2.
Direct Access Number — F200
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — FMOD (changed by
TB)
Changeable During Run — Yes
F198 F200
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 105
V/I Input Point 1 Setting
Program ⇒ Frequency ⇒ Speed Reference Setpoints
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the isolated V/I input terminal
when the V/I terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed
Control mode or the Torque Control mode.
This parameter sets the V/I input level that is associated with the V/I Input
Point 1 Frequency setting when operating in the Speed control mode or is
associated with the V/I Input Point 1 Rate setting when operating in the
Torque Control mode.
Note: See note on pg. 44 for more information on the V/I terminal.
V/I Input Speed Control Setup
Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive Speed control input
at the V/I input terminal:
•Set SW301 of the Terminal Board to Voltage or Current (see Figure 9 on
pg. 24).
•Program ⇒ Frequency ⇒ V/I Settings ⇒ V/I Voltage or Current input
signal.
•Program ⇒ Fundamental ⇒ Standard Mode Selection ⇒ Frequency Mode
1 ⇒ V/I.
•Program ⇒ Fundamental ⇒ Standard Mode Selection ⇒ Command Mode
Selection ⇒ Terminal Block.
Speed Control
Perform the following setup to allow the system to perform Speed control from
the V/I input terminal:
•Set V/I Input Point 1 Frequency (F202).
•Set V/I Input Point 1 Setting (F201) — the input analog signal level that
corresponds to the frequency setting at V/I Input Point 1 Frequency.
•Set V/I Input Point 2 Frequency (F204).
•Set V/I Input Point 2 Setting (F203) — the input analog signal level that
corresponds to the frequency setting at V/I Input Point 2 Frequency.
• Provide a Run command (F and/or R).
Once set, as the V/I input voltage or current changes, the output frequency of
the ASD will vary in accordance with the above settings.
This parameter value is entered as 0% to 100% of the V/I input signal range.
The V/I input is commonly used for a 4 – 20 mA current loop signal where
4 mA equals 20% of a 20 mA signal, set this parameter to 20% for 4 – 20 mA
current loop signal applications.
Note: When using the isolated V/I input terminal the IICC terminal
must be used as the return (negative) connection.
Direct Access Number — F201
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 100
Units — %
Frequency Settings
V/I
F201 F201
106 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
V/I Input Point 1 Frequency
Program ⇒ Frequency ⇒ Speed Reference Setpoints
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the V/I input terminal when
the V/I terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed
Control mode.
This parameter sets V/I Input Point 1 Frequency and is the frequency that is
associated with the setting of V/I Input Point 1 Setting when operating in the
Speed Control mode.
See V/I Input Point 1 Setting for more information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F202
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (F011)
Units — Hz
V/I Input Point 2 Setting
Program ⇒ Frequency ⇒ Speed Reference Setpoints
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the V/I input terminal when
the V/I terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed
Control mode or the Torque Control mode.
This parameter sets the V/I input level that is associated with V/I Input Point 2
Frequency when operating in the Speed control mode or is associated with the
V/I Input Point 1 Rate when operating in the Torque Control mode.
This value is entered as 0% to 100% of the V/I input signal range.
See V/I Input Point 1 Setting for more information on this setting when used
for Speed control.
See V/I Input Point 1 Rate for more information on this setting when used for
Torque Control.
Direct Access Number — F203
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 100
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 100
Units — %
V/I Input Point 2 Frequency
Program ⇒ Frequency ⇒ Speed Reference Setpoints
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the V/I input terminal when
the V/I terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed
Control mode.
This parameter sets V/I Input Point 2 Frequency and is the frequency that is
associated with the setting of V/I Input Point 2 Setting when operating in the
Speed Control mode.
See V/I Input Point 1 Setting for more information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F204
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 60.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (F011)
Units — Hz
F202 F204
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 107
V/I Input Point 1 Rate
Program ⇒ To r que ⇒ Setpoints
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the isolated V/I input terminal
when the V/I terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Torque
Control mode.
V/I Input Torque Control Setup
Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive Torque Control
input at the V/I input terminal:
•Set SW301 of the Terminal Board to Voltage or Current (see Figure 9 on
pg. 24).
• Program ⇒ Frequency ⇒ V/I Settings ⇒ V/I Voltage or Current input
signal.
• Program ⇒ Fundamental ⇒ Standard Mode Selection ⇒ Frequency Mode 1
⇒ V/I.
• Program ⇒ Fundamental ⇒ Standard Mode Selection ⇒ Command Mode
Selection ⇒ Terminal Block.
Torque Control
Perform the following setup to allow the system to perform Torque Control
from the V/I input terminal:
•Set V/I Input Point 1 Rate (F205).
•Set V/I Input Point 1 Setting (F201) — the input analog signal level that
corresponds to the torque setting at V/I Input Point 1 Rate.
•Set V/I Input Point 2 Rate (F206).
•Set V/I Input Point 2 Setting (F203) — the input analog signal level that
corresponds to the torque setting at V/I Input Point 2 Rate.
• Provide a Run command (F and/or R).
Torque Control is accomplished by establishing an associated V/f output pattern
for a given V/I input level.
Once set, as the V/I input voltage changes or the V/I current changes, the
output torque of the ASD will vary in accordance with the above settings.
This parameter sets V/I Input Point 1 Rate and is the output torque value that
is associated with the setting of V/I Input Point 1 Setting when operating in
the Torque Control mode.
This value is entered as 0% to 250% of the rated torque.
Note: When using the isolated V/I input terminal the IICC terminal
must be used as the return (negative) connection.
Direct Access Number — F205
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 250.00
Units — %
Torque Settings
F205 F205
108 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
V/I Input Point 2 Rate
Program ⇒ To r que ⇒ Setpoints
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the V/I input terminal when
the V/I terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Torque
Control mode.
Torque Control is accomplished by establishing an associated V/f output pattern
for a given V/I input level.
This parameter sets V/I Input Point 2 Rate and is the output torque value that
is associated with the setting of V/I Input Point 2 Setting when operating in
the Torque Control mode.
This value is entered as 0% to 250% of the rated torque.
See V/I Input Point 1 Rate for more information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F206
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 100.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 250.00
Units — %
Frequency Mode 2
Program ⇒ Fundamental ⇒ Standard Mode Selection
This parameter is used to set the source of the frequency command signal to be
used as Frequency Mode 2 in the event that Frequency Mode 1 is disabled or
if Frequency Mode 2 is set up as the primary control parameter. See F004 and
F200 for additional information on this setting.
Settings:
1 — V/I
2 — RR
3 — RX
4 — Not Used
5 — EOI Keypad
6 — RS485
7 — Communication Option Board
8 — RX2 Option (AI1)
9 — Option V/I
10 — UP/DOWN Frequency (terminal board)
11 — Pulse Input (option)
12 — Pulse Input (motor CPU)
13 — Binary/BCD Input (option)
Direct Access Number — F207
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — V/I
Changeable During Run — Yes
Frequency Mode Priority Switching Frequency
Program ⇒ Fundamental ⇒ Standard Mode Selection
This parameter establishes a threshold frequency that will be used as a reference
when determining when to switch the output frequency control source from the
Frequency Mode 1 setting to the Frequency Mode 2 setting.
See F200 for additional information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F208
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.10
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.10
Maximum — Max. Freq. (F011)
Units — Hz
F206 F208
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 109
Analog Input Filter
Program ⇒ Frequency ⇒ Analog Filter
Analog filtering is applied after the analog reference signal is converted to a
digital signal. The type of filtering used is Rolling Average over time.
Settings:
0 — None (1 mS)
1 — Small (8 mS)
2 — Medium (16 mS)
3 — Large (32 mS)
4 — Huge (64 mS)
The analog input signal is sampled and converted to a digital signal. With no
filtering applied, the resulting digital value is scaled for use by the
microprocessor of the ASD.
If the filtering selection Small is selected, the ASD averages the last 8 mS of
sampled signal and converted (digital) values. The rolling average is updated
(every 4 µS) and scaled for use by the microprocessor.
This holds true for the Medium, Large, and Huge selections providing a larger
sample to produce the average for use by the microprocessor.
False responses to electrical noise are eliminated with no loss in bandwidth
because the value used by the drive is the average value of several samples.
Direct Access Number — F209
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — None
Changeable During Run — Yes
F209 F209
110 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
RR Input Point 1 Setting
Program ⇒ Frequency ⇒ Speed Reference Setpoints
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RR input terminal when
the RR terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed
Control mode or the Torque Control mode.
This parameter sets the RR input level that is associated with the RR Input
Point 1 Frequency setting when operating in the Speed control mode or is
associated with the RR Input Point 1 Rate setting when operating in the
Torque Control mode.
Speed Control
Perform the following setup to allow the system to perform Speed control from
the RR input terminal:
•Set RR Input Point 1 Frequency (F211).
•Set RR Input Point 1 Setting (F210) — the input analog signal level that
corresponds to the frequency setting at RR Input Point 1 Frequency.
•Set RR Input Point 2 Frequency (F213).
•Set RR Input Point 2 Setting (F212) — the input analog signal level that
corresponds to the frequency setting at RR Input Point 2 Frequency.
RR Input Speed Control Setup
Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive Speed control input
at the RR input terminal:
• Program ⇒ Fundamental ⇒ Standard Mode Selection ⇒ Frequency Mode
1 ⇒ RR.
• Program ⇒ Fundamental ⇒ Standard Mode Selection ⇒ Command Mode
Selection ⇒ Terminal Block.
• Provide a Run command (F and/or R).
Once set, as the RR input voltage changes, the output frequency of the ASD
will vary in accordance with the above settings.
This parameter value is entered as 0% to 100% of the RR input signal range.
Direct Access Number — F210
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 100
Units — %
Frequency Settings
RR Input Point 1 Frequency
Program ⇒ Frequency ⇒ Speed Reference Setpoints
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RR input terminal when
the RR terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed
Control mode.
This parameter sets RR Input Point 1 Frequency and is the frequency that is
associated with the setting of RR Input Point 1 Setting when operating in the
Speed Control mode.
See RR Input Point 1 Setting for more information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F211
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (F011)
Units — Hz
RR
F210 F211
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 111
RR Input Point 2 Setting
Program ⇒ Frequency ⇒ Speed Reference Setpoints
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RR input terminal when
the RR terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed
Control mode or the Torque Control mode.
This parameter sets the RR input level that is associated with RR Input Point 2
Frequency when operating in the Speed control mode or is associated with the
RR Input Point 1 Rate when operating in the Torque Control mode.
This value is entered as 0% to 100% of the RR input signal range.
See RR Input Point 1 Setting for more information on this setting when used
for Speed control.
See RR Input Point 1 Rate for more information on this setting when used for
Torque Control.
Direct Access Number — F212
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 100
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 100
Units — %
RR Input Point 2 Frequency
Program ⇒ Frequency ⇒ Speed Reference Setpoints
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RR input terminal when
the RR terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed
Control mode.
This parameter sets RR Input Point 2 Frequency and is the frequency that is
associated with the setting of RR Input Point 2 Setting when operating in the
Speed Control mode.
See RR Input Point 1 Setting for more information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F213
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 60.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (F011)
Units — Hz
F212 F213
112 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
RR Input Point 1 Rate
Program ⇒ To r que ⇒ Setpoints
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RR input terminal when
the RR terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Torque
Control mode.
RR Input Torque Control Setup
Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive Torque Control
input at the RR input terminal:
• Program ⇒ Fundamental ⇒ Standard Mode Selection ⇒ Frequency Mode
⇒ RR.
• Program ⇒ Fundamental ⇒ Standard Mode Selection ⇒ Command Mode
Selection ⇒ Terminal Block.
Torque Control
Perform the following setup to allow the system to perform Torque Control
from the RR input terminal:
•Set RR Input Point 1 Rate (F214).
•Set RR Input Point 1 Setting (F210) — the input analog signal level that
corresponds to the torque setting at RR Input Point 1 Rate.
•Set RR Input Point 2 Rate (F215).
•Set RR Input Point 2 Setting (F212) — the input analog signal level that
corresponds to the frequency setting at RR Input Point 2 Rate.
• Provide a Run command (F and/or R).
Torque Control is accomplished by establishing an associated V/f output pattern
for a given RR input level.
Once set, as the RR input voltage changes, the output torque of the ASD will
vary in accordance with the above settings.
This parameter sets RR Input Point 1 Rate and is the output torque value that
is associated with the setting of RR Input Point 1 Setting when operating in
the Torque Control mode.
This value is entered as 0% to 250% of the rated torque.
Direct Access Number — F214
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 250.00
Units — %
Torque Settings
RR Input Point 2 Rate
Program ⇒ To r que ⇒ Setpoints
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RR input terminal when
the RR terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Torque
Control mode.
Torque Control is accomplished by establishing an associated V/f output
pattern for a given RR input level.
This parameter sets RR Input Point 2 Rate and is the output torque value that
is associated with the setting of RR Input Point 2 Setting when operating in
the Torque Control mode.
This value is entered as 0% to 250% of the rated torque.
See RR Input Point 1 Rate for more information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F215
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 100.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 250.00
Units — %
F214 F215
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 113
RX Input Point 1 Setting
Program ⇒ Frequency ⇒ Speed Reference Setpoints
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RX input terminal when
the RX terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed
Control mode or the Torque Control mode.
This parameter sets the RX input level that is associated with RX Input Point 1
Frequency when operating in the Speed Control mode or is associated with
the RX Input Point 1 Rate when operating in the Torque Control mode.
RX Input Speed Control Setup
Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive Speed control input
at the RX input terminal:
•Program ⇒ Fundamental ⇒ Standard Mode Selection ⇒ Frequency Mode
1 ⇒ RX.
•Program ⇒ Fundamental ⇒ Standard Mode Selection ⇒ Command Mode
Selection ⇒ Terminal Block.
Speed Control
Perform the following setup to allow the system to perform Speed control from
the RX input terminal:
•Set RX Input Point 1 Frequency (F217).
•Set RX Input Point 1 Setting (F216) — the input analog signal level that
corresponds to the speed setting at RX Input Point 1 Frequency.
•Set RX Input Point 2 Frequency (F219).
•Set RX Input Point 2 Setting (F218) — the input analog signal level that
corresponds to the speed setting at RX Input Point 2 Frequency.
• Provide a Run command (F and/or R).
Once set, as the RX input voltage changes, the ASD output speed and/or torque
will vary in accordance with the above settings.
This parameter value is entered as -100% to +100% of the RX input signal
range.
See parameter F474 and F475 for information on fine-tuning this terminal
response.
Direct Access Number — F216
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — -100
Maximum — +100
Units — %
Frequency Settings
RX Input Point 1 Frequency
Program ⇒ Frequency ⇒ Speed Reference Setpoints
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RX input terminal when
the RX terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed
Control mode.
This parameter sets RX Input Point 1 Frequency and is the frequency that is
associated with the setting of RX Input Point 1 Setting when operating in the
Speed Control mode.
See RX Input Point 1 Setting for more information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F217
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (F011)
Units — Hz
RX
F216 F217
114 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
RX Input Point 2 Setting
Program ⇒ Frequency ⇒ Speed Reference Setpoints
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RX input terminal when
the RX terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed
Control mode or the Torque Control mode.
This parameter sets the RX input level that is associated with RX Input Point 2
Frequency when operating in the Speed control mode or is associated with the
RX Input Point 2 Rate when operating in the Torque Control mode.
This value is entered as -100% to +100% of the RX input signal range.
See RX Input Point 1 Setting for more information on this setting when used
for Speed control.
See RX Input Point 1 Rate for more information on this setting when used for
Torque Control.
Direct Access Number — F218
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — +100
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — -100.0
Maximum — +100.0
Units — %
RX Input Point 2 Frequency
Program ⇒ Frequency ⇒ Speed Reference Setpoints
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RX input terminal when
the RX terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed
Control mode.
This parameter sets RX Input Point 2 Frequency and is the frequency that is
associated with the setting of RX Input Point 2 Setting when operating in the
Speed Control mode.
See RX Input Point 1 Setting for more information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F219
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 60.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00.
Maximum — Max. Freq. (F011)
Units — Hz
F218 F219
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 115
RX Input Point 1 Rate
Program ⇒ Torque ⇒ Setpoints
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RX input terminal when
the RX terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Torque
Control mode.
RX Input Torque Control Setup
Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive Torque Control
input at the RX input terminal:
•Program ⇒ Fundamental ⇒ Standard Mode Selection ⇒ Frequency Mode
⇒ RX.
•Program ⇒ Fundamental ⇒ Standard Mode Selection ⇒ Command Mode
Selection ⇒ Terminal Block.
Torque Control
Perform the following setup to allow the system to perform Torque Control
from the RX input terminal:
•Set RX Input Point 1 Rate (F220).
•Set RX Input Point 1 Setting (F216) — the input analog signal level that
corresponds to the torque setting at RX Input Point 1 Rate.
•Set RX Input Point 2 Rate (F221).
•Set RX Input Point 2 Setting (F218) — the input analog signal level that
corresponds to the speed setting at RX Input Point 2 Rate.
• Provide a Run command (F and/or R).
Torque Control is accomplished by establishing an associated V/f output
pattern for a given RX input level.
Once set, as the RX input voltage changes, the ASD output speed and/or torque
will vary in accordance with the above settings.
This parameter sets RX Input Point 1 Rate and is the output torque value that
is associated with the setting of RX Input Point 1 Setting when operating in
the Torque Control mode.
This value is entered as -250% to +250% of the rated torque.
Direct Access Number — F220
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — -250.00
Maximum — +250.00
Units — %
Torque Settings
RX Input Point 2 Rate
Program ⇒ Torque ⇒ Setpoints
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RX input terminal when
the RX terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Torque
Control mode.
Torque Control is accomplished by establishing an associated V/f output
pattern for a given RX input level.
This parameter sets RX Input Point 2 Rate and is the output torque value that
is associated with the setting of RX Input Point 2 Setting when operating in
the Torque Control mode.
This value is entered as -250% to +250% of the rated torque.
See RX Input Point 1 Rate for more information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F221
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — -250.00
Maximum — +250.00
Units — %
F220 F221
116 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
RX2 (AI1) Input Point 1 Setting
Program ⇒ Frequency ⇒ Speed Reference Setpoints
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RX2 (AI1) input terminal
when the RX2 (AI1) terminal is used as the control input while operating in the
Speed Control mode or the Torque Control mode.
Note: The Expansion IO Card Option 1 option board (P/N ETB003Z)
is required to use this terminal.
This parameter sets the RX2 (AI1) input level that is associated with RX2
(AI1) Input Point 1 Frequency when operating in the Speed Control mode or
is associated with the RX2 (AI1) Input Point 1 Rate when operating in the
Torque Control mode.
RX2 (AI1) Input Speed Control Setup
Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive Speed control input
at the RX2 (AI1) input terminal:
•Program ⇒ Fundamental ⇒ Standard Mode Selection ⇒ Frequency Mode
1 ⇒ RX2.
•Program ⇒ Fundamental ⇒ Standard Mode Selection ⇒ Command Mode
Selection ⇒ Terminal Block.
Speed Control
Perform the following setup to allow the system to perform Speed control from
the RX2 (AI1) input terminal:
•Set RX2 (AI1) Input Point 1 Frequency (F223).
•Set RX2 (AI1) Input Point 1 Setting (F222) — the input analog signal
level that corresponds to the speed setting at RX2 (AI1) Input Point 1
Frequency.
•Set RX2 (AI1) Input Point 2 Frequency (F225).
•Set RX2 (AI1) Input Point 2 Setting (F224) — the input analog signal
level that corresponds to the speed setting at RX Input Point 2 Frequency.
• Provide a Run command (F and/or R).
Once set, as the RX2 (AI1) input voltage changes, the ASD output speed and/or
torque will vary in accordance with the above settings.
This parameter value is entered as -100% to +100% of the RX2 (AI1) input
signal range.
See the Expansion IO Card Option 1 instruction manual (P/N 58685) for
more information on the function of this terminal. And see parameter F476 and
F477 for information on fine-tuning this terminal response.
Direct Access Number — F222
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — -100
Maximum — +100
Units — %
Frequency Settings
F222 F222
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 117
RX2 (AI1) Input Point 1 Frequency
Program ⇒ Frequency ⇒ Speed Reference Setpoints
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RX2 (AI1) input terminal
when the RX2 (AI1) terminal is used as the control input while operating in the
Speed Control mode.
This parameter sets RX2 (AI1) Input Point 1 Frequency and is the frequency
that is associated with the setting of RX2 (AI1) Input Point 1 Setting when
operating in the Speed Control mode.
See RX2 (AI1) Input Point 1 Setting for more information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F223
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (F011)
Units — Hz
RX2 (AI1) Input Point 2 Setting
Program ⇒ Frequency ⇒ Speed Reference Setpoints
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RX2 (AI1) input terminal
when the RX2 (AI1) terminal is used as the control input while operating in the
Speed Control mode or the Torque Control mode.
This parameter sets the RX2 (AI1) input level that is associated with RX2
(AI1) Input Point 2 Frequency when operating in the Speed control mode or
is associated with the RX2 (AI1) Input Point 2 Rate when operating in the
Torque Control mode.
This value is entered as -100% to +100% of the RX2 (AI1) input signal range.
See RX2 (AI1) Input Point 1 Setting for more information on this setting
when used for Speed control.
See RX2 (AI1) Input Point 1 Rate for more information on this setting when
used for Torque Control.
Direct Access Number — F224
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — +100
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — -100
Maximum — +100
Units — %
RX2 (AI1) Input Point 2 Frequency
Program ⇒ Frequency ⇒ Speed Reference Setpoints
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RX2 (AI1) input terminal
when the RX2 (AI1) terminal is used as the control input while operating in the
Speed Control mode.
This parameter sets RX2 (AI1) Input Point 2 Frequency and is the frequency
that is associated with the setting of RX2 (AI1) Input Point 2 Setting when
operating in the Speed Control mode.
See RX2 (AI1) Input Point 1 Setting for more information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F225
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 60.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (F011)
Units — Hz
F223 F225
118 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
RX2 (AI1) Input Point 1 Rate
Program ⇒ To r que ⇒ Setpoints
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RX2 (AI1) input terminal
when the RX2 (AI1) terminal is used as the control input while operating in the
Torque Control mode.
Note: The Expansion IO Card Option 1 option board (P/N ETB003Z)
is required to use this terminal.
RX2 (AI1) Input Torque Control Setup
Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive Torque Control
input at the RX2 (AI1) input terminal:
• Program ⇒ Fundamental ⇒ Standard Mode Selection ⇒ Frequency Mode
⇒ RX2.
• Program ⇒ Fundamental ⇒ Standard Mode Selection ⇒ Command Mode
Selection ⇒ Terminal Block.
• Provide a Run command (F and/or R).
Torque Control
Perform the following setup to allow the system to perform Torque Control
from the RX2 (AI1) input terminal:
•Set RX2 (AI1) Input Point 1 Rate (F226).
•Set RX2 (AI1) Input Point 1 Setting (F222) — the input analog signal
level that corresponds to the speed setting at RX2 (AI1) Input Point 1
Rate.
•Set RX2 (AI1) Input Point 2 Rate (F227).
•Set RX2 (AI1) Input Point 2 Setting (F224) — the input analog signal
level that corresponds to the speed setting at RX Input Point 2 Rate.
• Provide a Run command (F and/or R).
Torque Control is accomplished by establishing an associated V/f output
pattern for a given RX2 (AI1) input level.
Once set, as the RX2 (AI1) input voltage changes, the ASD output speed and/or
torque will vary in accordance with the above settings.
This parameter sets RX2 (AI1) Input Point 1 Rate and is the output torque
value that is associated with the setting of RX2 (AI1) Input Point 1 Setting
when operating in the Torque Control mode.
This value is entered as -250% to +250% of the rated torque.
See the Expansion IO Card Option 1 instruction manual (P/N 58685) for
more information on the function of this terminal.
Direct Access Number — F226
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — -250.00
Maximum — +250.00
Units — %
Torque Settings
F226 F226
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 119
RX2 (AI1) Input Point 2 Rate
Program ⇒ Torque ⇒ Setpoints
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RX2 (AI1) input terminal
when the RX2 (AI1) terminal is used as the control input while operating in the
Torque Control mode.
Torque Control is accomplished by establishing an associated V/f output
pattern for a given RX2 (AI1) input level.
This parameter sets RX2 (AI1) Input Point 2 Rate and is the output torque
value that is associated with the setting of RX2 (AI1) Input Point 2 Setting
when operating in the Torque Control mode.
This value is entered as -250% to +250% of the rated torque.
See RX2 (AI1) Input Point 1 Rate for more information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F227
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 100.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — -250.00
Maximum — +250.00
Units — %
F227 F227
120 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
BIN Input Point 1 Setting
Program ⇒ Frequency ⇒ Speed Reference Setpoints
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the BIN input terminals when
the BIN terminals are used as the control input while operating in the Speed
Control mode.
The discrete input terminals of the Terminal Board are used as the BIN
terminals.
BIN Input Speed Control Setup
Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive Speed control input
at the BIN input terminals:
• Program ⇒ Fundamental ⇒ Standard Mode Selection ⇒ Frequency Mode
1 ⇒ Binary/BCD.
• Program ⇒ Fundamental ⇒ Standard Mode Selection ⇒ Command Mode
Selection ⇒ Terminal Block.
• Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Input Terminals; select and set the desired
discrete input terminals to Binary Bit(s) 0 – 7 (or 0 – MSB). The binary
input word will control the speed of the motor.
• Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Input Terminals; select and set a discrete input
terminal to Binary Data Write. Activation of the Binary Data Write
terminal will transfer the status of the Binary Bit(s) 0 – 7 (or 0 – MSB) to
the control board for speed control.
Speed Control
Perform the following setup to allow the system to perform Speed control from
the BIN input terminals:
•Set BIN Input Point 1 Frequency (F229).
•Set the BIN input value (% of 255D) (F228) that represents BIN Input
Point 1 Frequency.
•Set BIN Input Point 2 Frequency (F231).
•Set the BIN input value (% of 255D) (F230) that represents BIN Input
Point 2 Frequency.
• Provide a Run command (F and/or R).
Note: 255D is the decimal equivalent of the 8-bit BIN word with all
input terminals set to one (255 decimal = 11111111 binary).
Once set, as the BIN input signal changes are transferred to the control board,
the output frequency of the ASD will vary in accordance with the above
settings.
This parameter sets BIN Input Point 1 Setting and is entered as 0% to 100%
of the of the range represented by the BIN binary input word 11111111 (255D)
or the binary bit(s) 0 – MSB.
Direct Access Number — F228
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 100
Units — %
Frequency Settings
F228 F228
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 121
BIN Input Point 1 Frequency
Program ⇒ Frequency ⇒ Speed Reference Setpoints
This parameter is used to set the speed of the BIN input terminals when the
BIN terminals are used as the control input.
This parameter sets BIN Input Point 1 Frequency and is the frequency that is
associated with the setting of BIN Input Point 1 Setting.
See BIN Input Point 1 Setting for further information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F229
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — Max. Freq. (F011)
Units — Hz
BIN Input Point 2 Setting
Program ⇒ Frequency ⇒ Speed Reference Setpoints
This parameter is used to set the speed of the BIN input terminals when the
BIN terminals are used as the control input.
This parameter sets the BIN input signal that is associated with BIN Input
Point 2 Frequency.
This value is entered as 0% to +100% of the BIN input signal range.
See BIN Input Point 1 Setting for further information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F230
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 100
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 100
Units — %
BIN Input Point 2 Frequency
Program ⇒ Frequency ⇒ Speed Reference Setpoints
This parameter is used to set the speed of the BIN input terminals when the
BIN terminal are used as the control input.
This parameter sets BIN Input Point 2 Frequency and is the frequency that is
associated with the setting of BIN Input Point 2 Setting.
See BIN Input Point 1 Setting for further information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F231
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 60.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Maximum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (F011)
Units — Hz
F229 F231
122 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
PG Input Point 1 Setting
Program ⇒ Frequency ⇒ Speed Reference Setpoints
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the PG input terminal of the
option board when a shaft-mounted encoder is used as the control input while
operating in the Speed Control mode.
Note: See Instruction Manual P/N 58687 for more information on the
PG Option Board.
PG Input Speed Control Setup
Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive Speed control input
at the PG input terminal:
•Program ⇒ Fundamental ⇒ Standard Mode Selection ⇒ Frequency Mode
1 ⇒ Pulse Input (option).
•Program ⇒ Fundamental ⇒ Standard Mode Selection ⇒ Command Mode
Selection ⇒ (any setting).
• Provide a Run command (F and/or R).
Speed Control
Perform the following setup to allow the system to perform Speed control from
the PG input terminals:
•Set PG Point 1 Frequency (F235).
•Set the PG input value (F234) that represents PG Point 1 Frequency.
•Set PG Point 2 Frequency (F237).
•Set the PG input value (F236) that represents PG Point 2 Frequency.
Once set, as the PG input pulse count rate changes, the output frequency of the
drive will vary in accordance with the above settings.
This parameter sets the PG input pulse count that represents Reference
Setpoint #1 (frequency). The range of values for this parameter is 0% to 100%
of the PG input pulse count range.
Note: Further application-specific PG settings may be performed from
the following path: Program ⇒ Feedback ⇒ PG Settings.
Direct Access Number — F234
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 100.0
Units — %
Frequency Settings
PG Input Point 1 Frequency
Program ⇒ Frequency ⇒ Speed Reference Setpoints
This parameter is used to set the speed of the PG input terminals when the PG
terminal is used as the control input.
This parameter sets PG Point 1 Frequency and is the frequency that is
associated with the setting of PG Point 1 Setting.
See PG Point 1 Setting for further information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F235
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (F011)
Units — Hz
F234 F235
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 123
PG Input Point 2 Setting
Program ⇒ Frequency ⇒ Speed Reference Setpoints
This parameter is used to set the direction and speed of the PG input terminals
when the PG terminals are used as the control input.
This parameter sets the PG input signal that is associated with PG Point 2
Frequency.
This value is entered as 0% to 100% of the PG input signal range.
See PG Point 1 Setting for further information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F236
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 100
Units — %
PG Input Point 2 Frequency
Program ⇒ Frequency ⇒ Speed Reference Setpoints
This parameter is used to set the direction and speed of the PG input terminals
when the PG terminal are used as the control input.
This parameter sets PG Point 2 Frequency and is the frequency that is
associated with the setting of PG Point 2 Setting.
See PG Point 1 Setting for further information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F237
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 60.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (F011)
Units — Hz
Start Frequency
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ Frequency Control
The output of the drive will remain at 0.0 Hz until the programmed speed value
exceeds this setting during startup. Once exceeded during startup, the output
frequency of the drive will accelerate to the programmed setting.
Output frequencies below the Start Frequency will not be output from the
drive during startup. However, once reaching the Start Frequency, speed
values below the Start Frequency may be output from the drive.
If the setting of this parameter results in an overcurrent condition at startup,
reduce the setting of this parameter to a value less than the rated slippage of the
motor.
If zero-speed torque is required, set this parameter and F243 to 0.0 Hz.
This setting will override the setting of F244 if this setting has a higher value.
This parameter setting is used during a Jog as the Lower Limit frequency (see
F260).
Direct Access Number — F240
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.10
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (F011)
Units — Hz
Run Frequency
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ Frequency Control
This parameter establishes a center frequency (Run Frequency) of a frequency
band.
Parameter F242 provides a plus-or-minus value for the Run Frequency; thus,
establishing a frequency band.
During acceleration, the drive will not output a signal to the motor until the
lower level of the band is reached.
During deceleration, the drive will continue to output the programmed
deceleration signal to the motor until the lower level of the band is reached; at
which time the output will go to 0.0 Hz.
Direct Access Number — F241
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (F011)
Units — Hz
F236 F241
124 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Run Frequency Hysteresis
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ Frequency Control
This parameter provides a plus-or-minus value for the Run Frequency setting
(F241).
Direct Access Number — F242
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 30.0
Units — Hz
End Frequency
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ Frequency Control
This parameter sets the lowest frequency that the drive will recognize during
deceleration before the drive goes to 0.0 Hz.
Direct Access Number — F243
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 30.0
Units — Hz
0 Hz Dead Band Signal
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ Special Parameters
This parameter sets an output frequency threshold that, until the commanded
frequency surpasses this setting, the ASD will output 0 Hz to the motor.
This setting will override the Start Frequency setting (F240) if this setting has
a higher value.
Direct Access Number — F244
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 5.00
Units — Hz
DC Injection Braking Start Frequency
Program ⇒ Protection ⇒ DC Braking
During deceleration this is the frequency at which DC Injection braking will
start.
DC Injection Braking
DC Injection Braking is a braking system used with three-phase motors.
Unlike conventional brakes, there is no physical contact between the rotating
shaft and a stationary brake pad or drum. When braking is required, the drive
outputs a DC current that is applied to the windings of the motor to quickly
brake the motor. The braking current stops when the time entered in F252 times
out.
The intensity of the DC current used while braking determines how fast the
motor will come to a stop and may be set at F251. The intensity setting is
entered as a percentage of the full load current of the ASD.
DC Injection Braking is also used to preheat the motor or to keep the rotor
from spinning freely when the motor is off by providing a pulsating DC current
into the motor at the Carrier Frequency. This feature may be enabled at F254.
Direct Access Number — F250
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 120.00
Units — Hz
DC Injection Braking Current
Program ⇒ Protection ⇒ DC Braking
This parameter sets the percentage of the rated current of the drive that will be
used for DC Injection braking. A larger load will require a higher setting.
Direct Access Number — F251
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 50
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 100
Units — %
F242 F251
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 125
DC Injection Braking Time
Program ⇒ Protection ⇒ DC Braking
This parameter setting is used to set the on-time duration of the DC Injection
Braking.
Direct Access Number — F252
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 1.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 20.0
Units — Seconds
Forward/Reverse DC Injection Braking Priority
Program ⇒ Protection ⇒ DC Braking
This parameter setting determines if DC Injection braking is to be used during
a change in the direction of the motor.
Settings:
0 — Disabled
1 — Enabled
Direct Access Number — F253
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — Yes
Motor Shaft Fixing Control
Program ⇒ Protection ⇒ DC Braking
This parameter Enables/Disables a continuous DC injection at half of the
amperage setting of F251 into a stopped motor. This feature is useful in
preheating the motor or to keep the rotor from spinning freely.
Motor Shaft Stationary Control starts after the DC injection brake stops the
motor and continues until ST – CC is opened, power is turned off, an
Emergency Off command is received, or this parameter is changed.
Enabling this feature will also require a non-zero entry at F250.
Settings:
0 — Disabled
1 — Enabled
Direct Access Number — F254
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — Yes
0 Hz Command Output
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ Special Parameters
This parameter is used to set the go-to-zero method to be used by the ASD in
the event that the ASD is commanded to go to zero Hz.
Settings:
0 — Standard (DC Injection Braking)
1 — 0 Hz Command
Direct Access Number — F255
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Standard (DC
Injection Braking)
Changeable During Run — No
Time Limit For Lower-Limit Frequency Operation
Program ⇒ Fundamental ⇒ Frequency Settings
This parameter sets the time that the ASD is allowed to operate below the
Lower Limit setting before an alarm and subsequent fault is incurred.
Direct Access Number — F256
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 600.0
Units — Seconds
F252 F256
126 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Jog Frequency
Program ⇒ Frequency ⇒ Jog Settings
This parameter sets the output frequency of the drive during a Jog. Jog is the
term used to describe turning the motor on for small increments of time and is
used when precise positioning of motor-driven equipment is required.
The Jog function may be initiated from the EOI, remotely via the Terminal
Board, or using Communications (for more information on using
Communications for Jogging, see the Communications manual P/N 53840).
The Jog function can be activated from zero Hz or from any frequency below
the Jog Run frequency (Jog can only increase the speed). A Jog command will
not be recognized when the running frequency is above the Jog Run frequency
setting. The Jog command has priority over other Run commands and is not
limited by the Upper Limit setting of parameter F012.
Jog commands received while running for the opposite direction will follow the
programmed stopping method of F261 until reaching zero Hz and will then
ramp to the programmed Jog Frequency and direction.
Jog Setup and Execution
To initiate a Jog Run from the EOI perform the following:
1. Enable the Jog function at F262.
2. Set the Command Mode Selection (F003) to EOI Keypad.
3. Assign the Jog Run setting to a discrete input terminal (see Table 5 on
pg. 236).
Note: Any unused discrete input terminal may be used for the Jog
Run setting.
4. Set up a Jog Stop Pattern at F261.
5. Set the Input Terminal Priority (F106) function to Disable to receive
Jog commands from the EOI.
6. Set the Local/Remote key to Local.
7. Activate the Jog Run terminal (from step 3) and provide a Run
command (F or R).
Note: Simultaneous F and R activations will perform as setup at
parameter F105.
8. Press the Run key and the ASD will output the frequency setting of F260
for the duration of the activation.
To initiate a Jog Run from the Terminal Board perform the following:
1. Using the setup above, set the Input Terminal Priority (F106) function
(from step 5) to Enable to receive Jog commands from the Terminal
Board using the Jog Run terminal without regard to the Local/Remote
setting.
2. Use the Jog Run terminal of step 3 above to activate the Jog function.
Direct Access Number — F260
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 5.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — F240 Setting
Maximum — 20.00
Units — Hz
F260 F260
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 127
Jog Stop Pattern
Program ⇒ Frequency ⇒ Jog Settings
This parameter sets the stopping method used while operating in the Jog mode.
Note: This parameter setting is used for the Jog operation only. The
Emergency Off stopping method setting of parameter F603 has
priority over this setting and changes made here do not affect the
function or setting of parameter F603.
Settings:
0 — Deceleration Stop
1 — Coast Stop
2 — DC Injection Braking Stop
Direct Access Number — F261
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Deceleration Stop
Changeable During Run — Yes
Panel Operation Jog Mode
Program ⇒ Frequency ⇒ Jog Settings
This parameter enables the Jog command to be received from the EOI. When
disabled the Jog command received from the EOI is ignored.
Jog commands may also be received from the Terminal Board. Priority as to
which is allowed to override the other is selected at F106.
The priority selection at F106 enables the selected source for Jog control and
disables the other. The F106 setting overrides this parameter setting.
Settings:
0 — Disabled
1 — Enabled
Direct Access Number — F262
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — Yes
F261 F262
128 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
UP/DOWN Frequency (up) Response Time
No Path — Direct Access Only
This parameter functions in conjunction with the parameter settings of F265,
F266, F267, F268, and F269. The purpose of these settings is to setup the ASD
to allow an externally-supplied discrete input signal to control the output
frequency of the ASD.
This method uses the discrete input terminal settings UP/DOWN Frequency
(up) and UP/DOWN Frequency (down) to change the ASD speed. Activation
of either terminal increases or decreases the output frequency at the Accel 1 or
Decel 1 rates, respectively.
Depending on the Delay setting, the UP/DOWN Frequency (up/down)
terminal may perform 1) the increase/decrease function for the duration of
activation or 2) the UP/DOWN Frequency (up/down) terminal may act as a
momentary contact that loads a new commanded frequency upon activation.
In either case, to activate-and-hold will continue the up or down function until
reaching the Upper Limit Frequency or the Lower Limit Frequency,
respectively. At which point further activation will be ignored.
See Figure 29 on pg. 130 for more information on the UP/DOWN Frequency
function.
Setup Requirements
F003 — Selects the Command control source; set to Terminal Block.
F004 — Selects the Frequency Control Mode 1 control source; set to
UP/DOWN Frequency.
F207 — Selects the Frequency Control Mode 2 control source: set to
UP/DOWN Frequency if used.
Set one unused discrete input terminal to UP/DOWN Frequency (up) and
one unused discrete input terminal to UP/DOWN Frequency (down).
F264 — Sets the system-response delay to the initial activation of the discrete
input terminal UP/DOWN Frequency (up). Also sets the response delay of
subsequent terminal activations of the UP/DOWN Frequency (up) terminal
during an activate-and-hold.
F265 —Sets the frequency increase amount for each activation of the UP/
DOWN Frequency (up) terminal activation. The rate of the frequency
increase is set at Acceleration Time 1 (F009).
F266 — Sets the system-response delay to the initial activation of the discrete
input terminal UP/DOWN Frequency (down). Also sets the activation delay
of subsequent terminal activations of the UP/DOWN Frequency (down)
terminal during an activate-and-hold.
F267 —Sets the frequency decrease amount for each activation of the UP/
DOWN Frequency (down) terminal activation. The rate of the frequency
decrease is set at Deceleration Time 1 (F010).
F268 — At power up or after a reset, this parameter setting is used to provide
a starting frequency for the UP/DOWN Frequency function.
F269 — At power down while running, and when enabled, this parameter
writes the running frequency into the F268 location and, upon a system
restart, uses this setting as the startup frequency.
Provide a Run command (F or R). The motor will run at the F268 setting.
Direct Access Number — F264
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.1
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 10.0
Units — Seconds
Up/Down Frequency (up) Mode
Up/Down Frequency (down) Mode
F264 F264
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 129
UP/DOWN Frequency (up) Frequency Step
No Path — Direct Access Only
This parameter sets the frequency increase amount for each activation of the
UP/DOWN Frequency (up) terminal activation. The rate of the frequency
increase is set at Acceleration Time 1 (F009).
See F264 for more information on this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F265
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.10
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (F011)
Units — Hz
UP/DOWN Frequency (down) Response Time
No Path — Direct Access Only
This parameter sets the system-response delay to the initial activation of the
discrete input terminal UP/DOWN Frequency (down). Also sets the activation
delay of subsequent terminal activations of the UP/DOWN Frequency (down)
terminal during an activate-and-hold.
See F264 for more information on this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F266
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.1
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 10.0
Units — Seconds
UP/DOWN Frequency (down) Frequency Step
No Path — Direct Access Only
F267 —Sets the frequency decrease amount for each activation of the UP/
DOWN Frequency (down) terminal activation. The rate of the frequency
decrease is set at Deceleration Time 1 (F010).
See F264 for more information on this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F267
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.10
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (F011)
Units — Hz
Initial UP/DOWN Frequency
No Path — Direct Access Only
At power up or after a reset, this parameter setting is used to provide a starting
frequency for the UP/DOWN Frequency function.
See F269 for more information on this parameter setting.
Direct Access Number — F268
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — Lower Limit (F013)
Maximum — Upper Limit (F012)
Units — Hz
Initial UP/DOWN Frequency Rewriting
No Path — Direct Access Only
At power down, and when enabled, this parameter writes the running frequency
into the F268 location and, upon a system restart, uses this setting as the startup
frequency.
Disable this parameter and set parameter F268 to the desired startup frequency
if the same starting frequency is required at each startup.
Note: This parameter setting may be different at each startup when
enabled.
Settings:
0 — Disabled
1 — Enabled (Overwrite F268 at Power Off or Reset)
Direct Access Number — F269
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Enabled
Changeable During Run — Yes
F265 F269
130 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Figure 29. UP/Down Frequency Operation Control Timing Diagram.
Jump Frequency 1
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ Jump Frequencies
In conjunction with parameter F271, this parameter establishes a user-defined
frequency range: the Jump Frequency and a plus-or-minus value.
During acceleration, the output frequency of the drive will hold at the lower
level of the Jump Frequency range until the programmed acceleration ramp
reaches the upper level of the Jump Frequency range. At which time the
output frequency of the drive will accelerate to the upper level of the Jump
Frequency range and continue upward as programmed.
During deceleration, the output frequency of the drive will hold at the upper
level of the Jump Frequency range until the programmed deceleration ramp
reaches the lower level of the Jump Frequency range. At which time the
output frequency of the drive will decelerate to the lower level of the Jump
Frequency range and continue downward as programmed.
Once set up and enabled, it is on in all control modes.
User-selected frequencies may be jumped to avoid the negative effects of
mechanical resonance.
Direct Access Number — F270
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (F011)
Units — Hz
F270 F270
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 131
Jump Frequency 1 Bandwidth
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ Jump Frequencies
This parameter establishes a plus-or-minus value for Jump Frequency #1 (see
F270).
Direct Access Number — F271
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 30.00
Units — Hz
Jump Frequency 2
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ Jump Frequencies
Same as Jump Frequency #1 (F270) and is used when multiple frequencies are
to be jumped (see the plus-or-minus value setting at F273). When multiple
jump frequencies overlap, the system will recognize the lowest and the highest
frequencies as one jump range.
Direct Access Number — F272
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (F011)
Units — Hz
Jump Frequency 2 Bandwidth
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ Jump Frequencies
This parameter establishes a plus-or-minus value for Jump Frequency #2
(F272).
Direct Access Number — F273
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 30.0
Units — Hz
Jump Frequency 3
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ Jump Frequencies
Same as Jump Frequency #1 (F270) and is used when multiple frequencies are
to be jumped (see the plus-or-minus value setting at F275).
When multiple jump frequencies overlap, the system will recognize the lowest
and the highest frequencies as one jump range.
Direct Access Number — F274
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (F011)
Units — Hz
Jump Frequency 3 Bandwidth
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ Jump Frequencies
This parameter establishes a plus-or-minus value for Jump Frequency #3
(F274).
Direct Access Number — F275
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 30.0
Units — Hz
Preset Speed 8
Program ⇒ Frequency ⇒ Preset Speeds
This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 1000 and is
identified as Preset Speed #8. The binary number is applied to S1 – S4 of the
Terminal Board to output the Preset Speed (see F018 for more information on
this parameter).
Direct Access Number — F287
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — Lower Limit (F013)
Maximum — Upper Limit (F012)
Units — Hz
F271 F287
132 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Preset Speed 9
Program ⇒ Frequency ⇒ Preset Speeds
This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 1001 and is
identified as Preset Speed #9. The binary number is applied to S1 – S4 of the
Terminal Board to output the Preset Speed (see F018 for more information on
this parameter).
Direct Access Number — F288
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — Lower Limit (F013)
Maximum — Upper Limit (F012)
Units — Hz
Preset Speed 10
Program ⇒ Frequency ⇒ Preset Speeds
This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 1010 and is
identified as Preset Speed #10. The binary number is applied to S1 – S4 of the
Terminal Board to output the Preset Speed (see F018 for more information on
this parameter).
Direct Access Number — F289
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — Lower Limit (F013)
Maximum — Upper Limit (F012)
Units — Hz
Preset Speed 11
Program ⇒ Frequency ⇒ Preset Speeds
This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 1011 and is
identified as Preset Speed #11. The binary number is applied to S1 – S4 of the
Terminal Board to output the Preset Speed (see F018 for more information on
this parameter).
Direct Access Number — F290
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — Lower Limit (F013)
Maximum — Upper Limit (F012)
Units — Hz
Preset Speed 12
Program ⇒ Frequency ⇒ Preset Speeds
This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 1100 and is
identified as Preset Speed #12. The binary number is applied to S1 – S4 of the
Terminal Board to output the Preset Speed (see F018 for more information on
this parameter).
Direct Access Number — F291
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — Lower Limit (F013)
Maximum — Upper Limit (F012)
Units — Hz
Preset Speed 13
Program ⇒ Frequency ⇒ Preset Speeds
This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 1101 and is
identified as Preset Speed #13. The binary number is applied to S1 – S4 of the
Terminal Board to output the Preset Speed (see F018 for more information on
this parameter).
Direct Access Number — F292
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — Lower Limit (F013)
Maximum — Upper Limit (F012)
Units — Hz
Preset Speed 14
Program ⇒ Frequency ⇒ Preset Speeds
This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 1110 and is
identified as Preset Speed #14. The binary number is applied to S1 – S4 of the
Terminal Board to output the Preset Speed (see F018 for more information on
this parameter).
Direct Access Number — F293
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — Lower Limit (F013)
Maximum — Upper Limit (F012)
Units — Hz
F288 F293
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 133
Preset Speed 15
Program ⇒ Frequency ⇒ Preset Speeds
This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 1111 and is
identified as Preset Speed #15. The binary number is applied to S1 – S4 of the
Terminal Board to output the Preset Speed (see F018 for more information on
this parameter).
Direct Access Number — F294
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — Lower Limit (F013)
Maximum — Upper Limit (F012)
Units — Hz
PWM Carrier Frequency
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ Carrier Frequency
This parameter sets the frequency of the pulse width modulation signal applied
to the motor.
Note: When operating in the Vector Control mode the carrier
frequency should be set to 2.2 kHz or above.
Note: If the PWM carrier frequency is set at 2.0 kHz or above, it cannot
be decreased below 2.0 kHz while running. If the PWM carrier
frequency is set at 1.9 kHz or below, it cannot be increased above
2.0 kHz while running. Either change requires that the ASD be
stopped and restarted for the changes to take effect.
Direct Access Number — F300
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 2.200
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 1.0
Maximum — (ASD-dependent)
Units — kHz
Auto Restart Selection
Program ⇒ Protection ⇒ Retry/Restart
This parameter Enables/Disables the ability of the drive to start into a spinning
motor when the ST – CC connection opens momentarily and is then closed
(Break/Make ST) or after a power interruption (momentary power failure).
Settings:
0 — Off
1 — Enabled (at Power Failure)
2 — Enabled (at Make-Break ST-CC)
3 — Enabled (at Make-Break ST-CC or Power Failure)
4 — Enabled (at Run)
Direct Access Number — F301
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Off
Changeable During Run — No
F294 F301
134 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Regenerative Power Ridethrough Mode
Program ⇒ Protection ⇒ Undervoltage/Ridethrough
This parameter determines the motor-control response of the drive in the event
of a momentary power outage or undervoltage condition.
During a Ridethrough, regenerative energy is used to maintain the control
circuitry settings for the duration of the Ridethrough; it is not used to drive the
motor. The motor(s) of the system are stopped and then restarted automatically
if so configured.
In a multiple-motor application, there will be a requirement to synchronize the
stopping and restarting of the motors as not to cause breakage in the product
being processed by the motors stopping/starting at different times (e.g., wire
spools, bobbin winder for textile machines, etc.). Parameters F317 and F318
must be setup to synchronize motor operation as to avoid breakage in these
types of applications.
Note: If used to restart the motors, the Retry setup of F301 is required.
Note: The Jog function will not operate while in the Synchronized
Decel/Accel mode.
Settings:
0 — Off
1 — Ridethrough On
2 — Decel Stop (during power failure)
3 — Synchronized ACC/DEC (TB)
4 — Synchronized ACC/DEC (TB + Power Off)
Ridethrough Setup Requirements
1. Select the Ridethrough Mode at F302.
2. Select the Ridethrough Time at F310.
3. Select the Synchronized Stop/Start Times at F317/F318 (if required).
Note: F317 and F318 are not functional while operating in the Torque
or Position control modes, or for the Jog Run function (F260).
4. Set a discrete input terminal to Power Failure Synchronized Signal and
activate the terminal to enable the Synchronized Accel/Decel function.
5. Select the Ridethrough Control Level at F629.
Direct Access Number — F302
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Off
Changeable During Run — Yes
F302 F302
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 135
Retry Selection
Program ⇒ Protection ⇒ Retry/Restart
After a trip has occurred, this parameter sets the number of times that an
automatic system restart is attempted for a qualified trip.
The trip conditions listed below will not initiate the automatic Retry/Restart
function:
• Input Phase Loss (Input Phase Failure)
• Output Phase Loss (Output Phase Failure)
• Output Current Protection Fault
• Output Current Detector error
• Load side overcurrent at start
• Earth Fault (Ground Fault)
• Overcurrent During Acceleration
• Arm Overcurrent at start-up
• DBR Resistor Overcurrent
•Low Current
• Voltage Drop In Main Circuit
• EEPROM Data Fault (EEPROM Fault)
• Flash Memory/Gate Array/RAM-ROM Fault
• CPU Fault
• Emergency Off (EMG)
• Communication Error
• Option Fault
• Sink/Source Setting Error
• Overspeed Error
• Overtorque
•Key Error
• External Thermal Error
• Externally-controlled Interrupt
See the section titled System Setup Requirements on pg. 8 for more information
on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F303
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 00
Maximum — 10
F303 F303
136 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Dynamic Braking
Program ⇒ Protection ⇒ Dynamic Braking
This parameter Enables/Disables the Dynamic Braking system.
Settings:
0 — Off
1 — On with Overload Detection
2 — On without Overload Detection
Dynamic Braking uses the transistor IGBT7 to dissipate the bus voltage when
required.
IGBT7 is a standard item on the 25 HP and below H9 ASD 230-volt systems
and is standard on the 400 HP and below for the for the 460-volt systems.
IGBT7 is optional for all remaining systems.
Dynamic Braking
Dynamic Braking is used to prevent over-voltage faults during rapid
deceleration or constant speed run on cyclic overhauling applications.
Dynamic Braking dissipates regenerated energy in the form of heat. When
using a DBR use thermal protection.
The resistive load is connected across terminals PA and PB (non-polarized).
Using a low-value, high-wattage resistance as a load for the generated current,
the resistive load dissipates the induced energy.
Dynamic Braking helps to slow the load quickly; it cannot act as a holding
brake.
The Dynamic Braking function may be setup and enabled by connecting a
braking resistor from terminal PA to PB of the drive and providing the proper
information at F304, F308, and F309.
See the section titled Dynamic Braking Resistor Wire/Cable Specifications on
pg. 268 for more information on using the DBR system and for assistance in
selecting the appropriate resistor for a given application.
Direct Access Number — F304
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Off
Changeable During Run — No
Overvoltage Limit Operation
Program ⇒ Protection ⇒ Stall
This parameter enables the Overvoltage Limit function. This feature is used to
set the upper DC bus voltage threshold that, once exceeded, will cause an
Overvoltage Stall.
An Overvoltage Stall increases the output frequency of the drive during
deceleration for a specified time in an attempt to prevent an Overvoltage Trip.
If the overvoltage threshold level setting of parameter F626 is exceeded for
over 4 mS, an Overvoltage Trip will be incurred.
Note: This parameter setting may increase deceleration times.
Settings:
0 — Enabled (Overvoltage Stall)
1 — Disabled
2 — Enabled (Forced Shorted Deceleration)
3 — Enabled (Forced Dynamic Braking Deceleration)
Direct Access Number — F305
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
F304 F305
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 137
Supply Voltage Correction
Program ⇒ Protection ⇒ Base Frequency Voltage
This parameter Enables/Disables the Voltage Compensation function.
When Enabled, this function provides a constant V/f ratio during periods of
input voltage fluctuations.
Settings:
0 — Disabled (Output Voltage Unlimited)
1 — Enabled (Supply Voltage Compensation)
2 — Disabled (Output Voltage Limited)
3 — Enabled (Supply Voltage Compensation w/Output Voltage Limited)
Direct Access Number — F307
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — No
Dynamic Braking Resistance
Program ⇒ Protection ⇒ Dynamic Braking
This parameter is used to input the resistive value of the Dynamic Braking
Resistor being used.
Light-duty and Heavy-Duty resistors vary from a few ohms to several hundred
ohms. The appropriate resistance size will be typeform- and application-
specific.
See the section titled Dynamic Braking Resistor Wire/Cable Specifications on
pg. 268 for more information on using the DBR system and for assistance in
selecting the appropriate resistor for a given application.
Note: Using a resistor value that is too low may result in system
damage.
Direct Access Number — F308
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.5
Maximum — 1000.0
Units — Ω
Continuous Dynamic Braking Capacity
Program ⇒ Protection ⇒ Dynamic Braking
This parameter is used to input the wattage of the Dynamic Braking Resistor.
See the section titled Dynamic Braking Resistor Wire/Cable Specifications on
pg. 268 for more information on using the DBR system.
Note: Using a resistor with a wattage rating that is too low may result
in system damage.
Direct Access Number — F309
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.01
Maximum — 600.00
Units — kW
Ridethrough Time
Program ⇒ Protection ⇒ Retry/Restart
In the event of a momentary power outage, this parameter determines the length
of the Ridethrough time.
The Ridethrough will be maintained for the number of seconds set using this
parameter.
See parameter F302 for more information on the Ridethrough function.
Note: The actual Ridethrough Time is load-dependent.
Direct Access Number — F310
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 2.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 320.0
Units — Seconds
F307 F310
138 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Forward Run/Reverse Run Disable
Program ⇒ Frequency ⇒ Forward/Reverse Disable
This parameter Enables/Disables the Forward Run or Reverse Run mode.
If either direction is disabled, commands received for the disabled direction will
not be recognized.
If both directions are disabled, the received direction command will determine
the direction of the motor rotation.
Settings:
0 — Off
1 — Disable Reverse Run
2 — Disable Forward Run
Direct Access Number — F311
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Off
Changeable During Run — No
Random Mode
Program ⇒ Protection ⇒ Retry/Restart
This parameter adjusts the carrier frequency randomly. This feature is effective
in minimizing the negative effects of mechanical resonance.
Settings:
0 — Disabled
1 — Enabled
Direct Access Number — F312
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — No
Carrier Frequency Control Mode
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ Carrier Frequency
This parameter provides for the automatic decrease of the carrier frequency.
Select 1 to decrease the Carrier Frequency setting as a function of an
increased current requirement.
Selection 2 or 3 may also include an output voltage drop as a function of an
increased current requirement. The Carrier Frequency should be set below
4 kHz.
Settings:
0 — No Decrease and No Limit
1 — Valid Decrease and No Limit
2 — No Decrease and Limit Small Pulse
4 — Valid Decrease and Limit Small Pulse
Direct Access Number — F316
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Valid Decrease and
No Limit
Changeable During Run — Yes
Synchronized Deceleration Time
Program ⇒ Protection ⇒ Undervoltage/Ridethrough
In the event that the Ridethrough function activates in a multiple-motor
application it will be necessary to manage the stopping motors synchronously
as not to damage the product being processed (e.g., wire spools, bobbin winder
for textile machines, etc.).
This parameter is used to minimize the product breakage during a momentary
power outage. This function stops multiple machines simultaneously or makes
them reach their respective command frequencies simultaneously by regulating
their deceleration times.
See parameter F302 for more information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F317
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 2.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 6000.0
Units — Seconds
F311 F317
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 139
Synchronized Acceleration Time
Program ⇒ Protection ⇒ Undervoltage/Ridethrough
In the event that the Ridethrough function activates in a multiple-motor
application it will be necessary to manage the accelerating motors
synchronously as not to damage the product being processed (e.g., wire spools,
bobbin winder for textile machines, etc.).
This parameter is used to minimize the product breakage during a momentary
power outage. This function orchestrates the acceleration of multiple machines
simultaneously or makes them reach their respective command frequencies
simultaneously by regulating their acceleration times.
See parameter F302 for more information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F318
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 2.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.10
Maximum — 6000
Units — Seconds
Drooping Gain
Program ⇒ Feedback ⇒ Drooping Control
This parameter sets the effective 100% output torque level while operating in
the Drooping Control mode. This value is the upper torque limit of the motor
being driven by a given ASD while operating in the Drooping Control mode.
Note: The maximum frequency output is not limited by the setting of
F011 while operating in the Drooping Control mode.
Drooping
Drooping Control, also called Load Share, is used to share the load among
two or more mechanically coupled motors. Unlike Stall, which reduces the
output frequency in order to limit the load once the load reaches a preset level,
Drooping can decrease or increase the V/f setting of a motor to maintain a
balance between the output torque levels of mechanically coupled motors.
Because of variances in gearboxes, sheaves, belts, motors, and since the speed
of the motor is constrained by the mechanical system, one motor may
experience more load than its counterpart and may become overloaded.
Drooping Control allows the overloaded motor to slow down, thus shedding
load and encouraging a lightly-loaded motor to pick up the slack. The goal of
Drooping Control is to have the same torque ratios for mechanically coupled
motors.
Direct Access Number — F320
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 100.0
Units — %
Speed at 0% Drooping Gain
Program ⇒ Feedback ⇒ Drooping Control
This parameter sets the motor speed when at the 0% output torque gain while
operating in the Drooping Control mode. This function determines the lowest
speed that Drooping will be in effect for motors that share the same load.
Direct Access Number — F321
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 320.0
Units — Hz
Speed at F320 Drooping Gain
Program ⇒ Feedback ⇒ Drooping Control
This parameter sets the motor speed when at the 100% output torque gain while
operating in the Drooping Control mode. This function determines the speed
of the individual motors at the 100% Drooping Gain setting for motors that
share the same load.
Direct Access Number — F322
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 320.0
Units — Hz
F318 F322
140 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Drooping Insensitive Torque
Program ⇒ Feedback ⇒ Drooping Control
This parameter defines a torque range in which the Drooping Control settings
will be ignored and the programmed torque settings will be followed.
Direct Access Number — F323
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 10.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 100.0
Units — %
Drooping Output Filter
Program ⇒ Feedback ⇒ Drooping Control
This parameter is used to set the rate of output change allowed when operating
in the Drooping Control mode.
Jerky operation may be reduced by increasing this setting.
Direct Access Number — F324
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 100.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 200.0
Units — Radians/Second
Light-Load High-Speed Operation
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ Crane/Hoist Settings
This parameter enables the Light-Load High-Speed function by selecting an
operating mode. The Light-Load High-Speed function accelerates the output
frequency of the ASD from the programmed speed to the setting established in
F330.
This parameter may be disabled.
Enabling the Light-Load High-Speed function requires that an operating mode
be selected here, and that the criteria of parameters F331 – F333 be met.
Settings:
0 — Off
1 — Auto Speed (F-Motor: Up, R-Generator:Down)
2 — Auto Speed (F-Generator: Down, R-Motor:Up)
3 — F330 Setting (F-Motor: Up, R-Generator:Down)
4 — F330 Setting (F-Generator: Down, R-Motor:Up)
Direct Access Number — F328
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Off
Changeable During Run — Yes
Light-Load High-Speed Learning Function
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ Crane/Hoist Settings
The Light-Load High-Speed function accelerates the output frequency of the
ASD from the programmed speed to the setting established in F330 and is
primarily used with Crane/Hoist functions.
During Light-Load High-Speed operation with this parameter enabled,
parameters Panel Torque Bias (F343), Creep Frequency (F346), and the
Creep Time (F347) are set to a standard set of light-load profile values.
Application-specific adjustments may be required.
Note: This function should be setup with a light load only.
Settings:
0 — Off
1 — Forward/Reverse
2 — Forward Only
Direct Access Number — F329
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Off
Changeable During Run — No
F323 F329
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 141
Automatic Light-Load High-Speed Operation Frequency
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ Crane/Hoist Settings
This parameter establishes the speed to which the ASD will ramp when
operating in the Light-Load High-Speed mode.
Direct Access Number — F330
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 60.00
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 30.00
Maximum — Upper Limit (F012)
Units — Hz
Light-Load High-Speed Operation Switching Lower-Limit
Frequency
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ Crane/Hoist Settings
This parameter sets an output frequency threshold that, once surpassed, allows
the Light-Load High-Speed function to be used.
The Light-Load High-Speed function may be used if the frequency threshold
set at this parameter and the following conditions are met:
1) Light-Load High-Speed Operation Enable is configured at F328.
2) The output torque is less than the setting established in F335 when reaching
the frequency setting here.
Direct Access Number — F331
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 40.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 30.0
Maximum — Upper Limit (F012)
Units — Hz
Light-Load High-Speed Operation Load Wait Time
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ Crane/Hoist Settings
After the time setting of F333 times out, this parameter determines the length of
time that the Light-Load High-Speed criteria must be met until the Light-
Load High-Speed function engages.
Direct Access Number — F332
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.5
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 10.0
Units — Seconds
Light-Load High-Speed Operation Detection Time
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ Crane/Hoist Settings
This parameter determines the length of time that the load requirement must
meet the Light-Load High-Speed criteria before the Light-Load High-Speed
Enable (F328) is recognized.
Once recognized, the timer setting of F332 must expire to engage the Light-
Load High-Speed function.
Direct Access Number — F333
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 1.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 10.0
Units — Seconds
Light-Load High-Speed Operation Heavy-Load Detection
Time
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ Crane/Hoist Settings
While operating in the Light-Load High-Speed mode, this parameter
determines the length of time that a load exceeding the Light-Load High-
Speed operation criteria may exist before the Light-Load High-Speed mode is
terminated and normal operation resumes.
Direct Access Number — F334
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.5
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 10.0
Units — Seconds
F330 F334
142 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Switching Load Torque During Power Running
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ Crane/Hoist Settings
During power running, this parameter establishes the threshold torque level that
is used to determine if the Light-Load High-Speed (F328) operation may
engage or remain engaged if active.
If the Light-Load High-Speed operation is terminated normal operation
resumes.
Note: Power running may be during forward, reverse, acceleration, or
deceleration, but not during regeneration.
Direct Access Number — F335
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 50.00
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — -250.00
Maximum — +250.00
Units — %
Heavy-Load Torque During Power Running
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ Crane/Hoist Settings
During power running, this parameter establishes the threshold torque level that
is used to determine if the Light-Load High-Speed (F328) operation may
engage or remain engaged if active.
If the Light-Load High-Speed operation is terminated normal operation
resumes.
Direct Access Number — F336
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 100.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — -250.00
Maximum — +250.00
Units — %
Heavy-Load Torque During Constant Power Running
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ Crane/Hoist Settings
During constant power running, this parameter establishes the threshold torque
level that is used to determine if the Light-Load High-Speed (F328) operation
may engage or remain engaged if active.
If the Light-Load High-Speed operation is terminated normal operation
resumes.
Direct Access Number — F337
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 50.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — -250.00
Maximum — +250.00
Units — %
Switching Load Torque During Regenerative Braking
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ Crane/Hoist Settings
During regenerative braking, this parameter establishes the threshold torque
level that is used to determine if the Light-Load High-Speed (F328) operation
may engage or remain engaged if active.
If the Light-Load High-Speed operation is terminated normal operation
resumes.
Direct Access Number — F338
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 50.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — -250.00
Maximum — +250.00
Units — %
Braking Mode Selection
Program ⇒ To r que ⇒ Torque Control
This parameter is primarily used with lifting systems to allow for enough torque
to be produced after receiving a Run command before releasing the brake.
Without this feature the load would drop for a period once the brake was
released.
This parameter enables this function by setting the system operating mode.
Settings:
0 — Disabled
1 — Forward Direction
2 — Reverse Direction
3 — Same Direction
Direct Access Number — F341
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — Yes
F335 F341
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 143
Torque Bias Input Selection
Program ⇒ To r que ⇒ Torque Control
Once enabled at parameter F341, this parameter sets the source of the input
signal that will set the torque level used for to provide the Braking Mode
Selection function of parameter F341.
Settings:
0 — Disabled
1 — V/I
2 — RR
3 — RX
4 — Panel Keypad
5 — RS485 2-Wire
6 — RS485 4-Wire
7 — Communication Option Board
8 — RX2 Option (AI1)
Direct Access Number — F342
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — Yes
Panel Torque Bias
Program ⇒ To r que ⇒ Torque Control
Once enabled at parameter F341, this parameter establishes the torque bias
setting to which the setting of F342 will either add to or subtract from to
produce the final torque value used to carry out the Braking Mode Selection
function of parameter F341.
Direct Access Number — F343
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 100.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — -250.00
Maximum — +250.00
Units — %
Panel Torque Gain
Program ⇒ To r que ⇒ Torque Control
Once enabled at parameter F341, this parameter sets the sensitivity of the
torque control source selected at F342 for the Braking Mode Selection
function of parameter F341.
Direct Access Number — F344
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 100.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 100.00
Units — %
Release Time
Program ⇒ To r que ⇒ Torque Control
Once enabled at parameter F341, this parameter sets the time that the brake will
hold after the requirements of the Braking Mode Selection function of
parameter F341 have been met.
Direct Access Number — F345
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.05
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 2.50
Units — Seconds
Creeping Frequency
Program ⇒ To r que ⇒ Torque Control
Once enabled at parameter F341, and while running, upon receiving a Stop
command this parameter sets an output frequency to be provided for the
duration of the time setting of parameter F347.
Direct Access Number — F346
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 3.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — F240 Setting
Maximum — 20.0
Units — Hz
F342 F346
144 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Creeping Time
Program ⇒ To r que ⇒ Torque Control
Once the Creep function of F346 is activated, this parameter determines the
duration of activation of the Creep function.
Direct Access Number — F347
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.10
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 2.50
Units — Seconds
Braking Time Learning Function
Program ⇒ To r que ⇒ Torque Control
This parameter is used to establish approximate settings for parameters F343,
F345, F346, and F347.
Note: Setting this parameter should be done using a light load only.
Set this parameter to Brake Signal Learning. Provide a Run command. The
aforementioned parameters will receive approximate values. Application-
specific adjustments may be required when done.
Settings:
0 — Disabled
1 — Enabled
Direct Access Number — F348
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — Yes
Accel/Decel Suspend
Program ⇒ Fundamental ⇒ Accel/Decel #1 Settings
To maintain a constant speed setting while running, this parameter may be used
to suspend speed changes for a user-set length of time.
The Accel/Decel Suspend function is enabled by setting this parameter to
either Terminal Board Input or to F350 – F353.
Selecting Terminal Board Input at this parameter requires that a discrete input
terminal be set to Dwell Signal (see Table 5 on pg. 236 for a listing of available
settings). Upon activation of the Dwell Signal terminal the output frequency
remains at the at-activation speed for the duration of the activation. When
deactivated the programmed accel or decel ramp resumes.
Selecting F350 – F353 at this parameter requires that the acceleration and/or
the deceleration Suspend Frequency and Suspend Time settings be completed
at F350, F351, F352, and F353. Upon reaching the frequency setting of F350
(Accel) or F352 (Decel), the Accel/Decel ramp will cease and the output
frequency will hold at the threshold frequency setting for the time setting of
F351 for Acceleration or F353 for deceleration.
Settings:
0 — Off
1 — F350 – F353 Settings
2 — Terminal Board Input
Direct Access Number — F349
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Off
Changeable During Run — Yes
F347 F349
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 145
Acceleration Suspend Frequency
Program ⇒ Fundamental ⇒ Accel/Decel #1 Settings
When Enabled at F349, this parameter is used to set the frequency at which the
Acceleration Suspend function will activate.
During acceleration, this parameter sets the frequency at which acceleration
will stop and the motor will run at the setting of this parameter for the time
setting of F351.
Direct Access Number — F350
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (F011)
Units — Hz
Acceleration Suspend Time
Program ⇒ Fundamental ⇒ Accel/Decel #1 Settings
When Enabled at F349, this parameter is used to set the duration of activation
of the Acceleration Suspend function when initiated by reaching the
Acceleration Suspend Frequency setting (F350).
Once this parameter times out the acceleration rate will resume from the point
of suspension.
Direct Access Number — F351
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 10.0
Units — Seconds
Deceleration Suspend Frequency
Program ⇒ Fundamental ⇒ Accel/Decel #1 Settings
When Enabled at F349, this parameter is used to set the frequency at which the
Deceleration Suspend function will activate.
During deceleration, this parameter sets the frequency at which deceleration
will stop and the motor will run at the setting of this parameter for the time
setting of F353.
Direct Access Number — F352
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (F011)
Units — Hz
Deceleration Suspend Time
Program ⇒ Fundamental ⇒ Accel/Decel #1 Settings
When Enabled at F349, this parameter is used to set the duration of activation
of the Deceleration Suspend function when initiated by reaching the
Deceleration Suspend Frequency setting (F352).
Once this parameter times out the deceleration rate will resume from the point
of suspension.
Direct Access Number — F353
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 10.0
Units — Seconds
F350 F353
146 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Commercial Power/ASD Output Switching
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Line Power Switching
This parameter Enables/Disables the Commercial Power/ASD Output
Switching function.
When enabled, the system may be set up to discontinue using the output of the
drive and to switch to the commercial power in the event that 1) a trip is
incurred, 2) a user-set frequency is reached, or 3) if initiated by a discrete input
terminal.
Once set up with the proper switching frequency and hold times, the system
will switch to commercial power upon reaching the F355 frequency criterion.
Switching may also be accomplished manually by activating the discrete input
terminal Commercial Power ASD Switching. Terminal activation forces the
ASD output speed to accelerate to the F355 switching frequency, resulting in
the ASD-to-commercial power switching.
Deactivation of the discrete input terminal starts the hold-time counter setting
(F356) for ASD-to-commercial power switching. Once timed out the motor
resumes normal commercial power operation.
Settings:
0 — Off
1 — Switch at Signal Input and Trip
3 — Switch at Signal Input with Switching Frequency
4 — Switch at Signal Input and Trip with Switching Frequency
Switching Setup Requirements
F354 — Enable the switching function.
F355 — Set the switching frequency.
F356 — (speed) Hold -time before applying ASD output after the switching
criteria has been met.
F357 — (speed) Hold -time before applying commercial power after the
switching criteria has been met.
F358 — (speed) Hold -time of applying commercial power after the
switching criteria has been met.
Set a discrete input terminal to Commercial Power ASD Switching.
Set OUT1 and OUT2 to Commercial Power/ASD Switching 1 and 2,
respectively.
Note: Ensure that the switching directions are the same and that F311
is set to Permit All.
Note: The OUT1 and OUT2 outputs assigned to Commercial Power/
ASD Switching Output are used to actuate the re-routing
contactors.
Direct Access Number — F354
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Off
Changeable During Run — No
F354 F354
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 147
Commercial Power/ASD Switching Frequency
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Line Power Switching
When enabled at F354 and with a properly configured discrete output terminal,
this parameter sets the frequency at which the At Frequency Powerline
Switching function engages.
The At Frequency Powerline Switching function commands the system to
discontinue using the output of the drive and to switch to commercial power
once reaching the frequency set here.
See parameter F354 for more information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F355
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 60.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (F011)
Units — Hz
ASD-side Switching Wait Time
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Line Power Switching
This parameter determines the amount of time that the drive will wait before
outputting a signal to the motor once the switch-to-drive-output criteria has
been met.
See parameter F354 for more information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F356
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.10
Maximum — 10.00
Units — Seconds
Commercial Power Switching Wait Time
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Line Power Switching
This parameter determines the amount of time that the drive will wait before
allowing commercial power to be applied to the motor once the switch-to-
commercial-power criteria has been met.
See parameter F354 for more information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F357
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.62
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — (ASD-dependent)
Maximum — 10.00
Units — Seconds
Commercial Power Switching Freq. Hold Time
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Line Power Switching
This parameter determines the amount of time that the connection to
commercial power is maintained once the switch-to-drive-output criteria has
been met.
See parameter F354 for more information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F358
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 2.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.10
Maximum — 10.00
Units — Seconds
PID Control Switching
Program ⇒ Feedback ⇒ Feedback Settings
This parameter is used to set the PID control mode.
Selecting Process PID uses the upper and lower limit settings of parameters
F367 and F368.
Selecting Speed PID uses the upper and lower limit settings of parameters
F370 and F371.
Settings:
0 — PID Off
1 — Process PID
2 — Speed PID
3 — Easy Positioning PID (unavailable at the time of this release)
Direct Access Number — F359
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — PID Off
Changeable During Run — No
F355 F359
148 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
PID Feedback Signal
Program ⇒ Feedback ⇒ Feedback Settings
This parameter Enables/Disables PID feedback control. When enabled, this
parameter determines the source of the motor-control feedback.
Settings:
0 — PID Control Disabled
1 — V/I
2 — RR
3 — RX
4 — RX2 Option (AI1)
5 — Option V/I
6 — PG Feedback Option
Proportional-Integral-Derivative (PID) — A closed-loop control technique
that seeks error minimization by reacting to three values: One that is
proportional to the error, one that is representative of the error, and one that is
representative of the rate of change of the error.
Direct Access Number — F360
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — PID Control
Disabled
Changeable During Run — Yes
PID Feedback Delay Filter
Program ⇒ Feedback ⇒ Feedback Settings
This parameter determines the delay in the ASD output response to the motor-
control feedback signal (signal source is selected at F360).
Direct Access Number — F361
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.1
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 25.0
PID Feedback Proportional (P) Gain
Program ⇒ Feedback ⇒ Feedback Settings
This parameter determines the degree that the Proportional function affects the
output signal. The larger the value entered here, the quicker the drive responds
to changes in feedback.
Direct Access Number — F362
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.10
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.01
Maximum — 100.0
PID Feedback Integral (I) Gain
Program ⇒ Feedback ⇒ Feedback Settings
This parameter determines the degree that the Integral function affects the
output signal. The smaller the value here, the more pronounced the effect of the
integral function on the output signal.
Direct Access Number — F363
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.10
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.01
Maximum — 100.00
PID Deviation Upper Limit
Program ⇒ Feedback ⇒ Feedback Settings
This parameter determines the maximum amount that the feedback may
increase the output signal.
Direct Access Number — F364
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 60.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 60.00
Units — Hz
F360 F364
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 149
PID Deviation Lower Limit
Program ⇒ Feedback ⇒ Feedback Settings
This parameter determines the maximum amount that the feedback may
decrease the output signal.
Direct Access Number — F365
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 60.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 60.00
Units — Hz
PID Feedback Differential (D) Gain
Program ⇒ Feedback ⇒ Feedback Settings
This parameter determines the degree that the Differential function affects the
output signal. The larger the value entered here, the more pronounced the affect
of the differential function for a given feedback signal level.
Direct Access Number — F366
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 2.55
Process Upper Limit
Program ⇒ Feedback ⇒ Feedback Settings
Selecting Process PID at parameter F359 allows for this parameter setting to
function as the Upper Limit while operating in the PID Control mode.
Direct Access Number — F367
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 60.00
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — Lower Limit (F013)
Maximum — Upper Limit (F012)
Units — Hz
Process Lower Limit
Program ⇒ Feedback ⇒ Feedback Settings
Selecting Process PID at parameter F359 allows for this parameter setting to
function as the Lower Limit while operating in the PID Control mode.
Direct Access Number — F368
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — Lower Limit (F013)
Maximum — Upper Limit (F012)
Units — Hz
PID Control Wait Time
Program ⇒ Feedback ⇒ Feedback Settings
This parameter is used to delay the start of PID control at start up. During the
wait time set here, the ASD will follow the frequency control input of the
process value and the feedback input will be ignored until this setting times out.
At which time the PID setup assumes control.
Direct Access Number — F369
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 2400
Units — Seconds
PID Output Upper Limit
Program ⇒ Feedback ⇒ Feedback Settings
Selecting Speed PID at parameter F359 allows for this parameter setting to
function as the Upper Limit while operating in the PID Control mode.
Direct Access Number — F370
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 60.00
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — Lower Limit (F013)
Maximum — Upper Limit (F012)
Units — Hz
F365 F370
150 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
PID Output Lower Limit
Program ⇒ Feedback ⇒ Feedback Settings
Selecting Speed PID at parameter F359 allows for this parameter setting to
function as the Lower Limit while operating in the PID Control mode.
Direct Access Number — F371
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 4.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — Lower Limit (F013)
Maximum — Upper Limit (F012)
Units — Hz
Process Increasing Rate
Program ⇒ Feedback ⇒ Feedback Settings
This parameter is used to limit the rate that the output of the ASD may increase
for a given difference in the speed reference and the PID feedback value.
Direct Access Number — F372
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 10.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 600.0
Units — Seconds
Process Decreasing Rate
Program ⇒ Feedback ⇒ Feedback Settings
This parameter is used to limit the rate that the output of the ASD may decrease
for a given difference in the speed reference and the PID feedback value.
Direct Access Number — F373
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 10.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 600.0
Units — Seconds
Number of PG Input Pulses
Program ⇒ Feedback ⇒ PG Settings
This parameter is used to set the end-of-travel range when using an encoder on
a motor-driven positioning system (e.g., hoist/crane, etc.).
Direct Access Number — F375
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 12
Maximum — 9999
Number of PG Input Phases
Program ⇒ Feedback ⇒ PG Settings
This parameter determines the type of information that is supplied by the phase
encoder.
Settings:
1 — Single Phase
2 — Two Phase
Direct Access Number — F376
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
F371 F376
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 151
PG Disconnection Detection
Program ⇒ Feedback ⇒ PG Settings
This parameter Enables/Disables the system’s monitoring of the PG connection
status when using encoders with line driver outputs.
Note: The PG Vector Feedback Board option is required to use this
feature.
Settings:
0 — Disabled
1 — Enabled with Filter
3 — Enabled (Detect momentary power fail)
Direct Access Number — F377
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Simple Positioning Completion Range
Program ⇒ Feedback ⇒ PG Settings
While operating in the Positioning Control mode, this parameter sets the range
of accuracy for a Stop command received via the terminal board.
If the setting is too low the stop may be too abrupt.
Direct Access Number — F381
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 100
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 1
Maximum — 4000
Autotuning 1
Program ⇒ Motor ⇒ Vector Motor Model
This parameter sets the Autotune command status.
Selecting Reset Motor Defaults for this parameter sets parameters F410, F411,
F412, and F413 to the factory default settings.
If selecting Autotune on Run Command, Autotune Initiated by Input
Terminal, or Autotune of Detail Parameters for this parameter set the Base
Frequency, Base Frequency Voltage, and the Motor Rated Revolutions to
the name-plated values of the motor to achieve the best possible Autotune
precision.
Settings:
0 — Autotune Disabled
1 — Reset Motor Defaults
2 — Enable Autotune on Run Command
3 — Autotuning by Input Terminal Signal (see Table 5 on pg. 236)
4 — Motor Constant Auto Calculation
Direct Access Number — F400
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Autotune Disabled
Changeable During Run — No
Slip Frequency Gain
Program ⇒ Motor ⇒ Vector Motor Model
This parameter provides a degree of slip compensation for a given load. A
higher setting here decreases the slip allowed for a given load/ASD output ratio.
Direct Access Number — F401
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 70
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 150
Units — %
F377 F401
152 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Autotuning 2
Program ⇒ Motor ⇒ Vector Motor Model
This parameter introduces a thermal element into the autotuning equation and is
used to automatically adjust the Autotune parameter values as a function of
increases in the temperature of the motor.
Settings:
0 — Off
1 — Self-Cooled Motor Tuning
2 — Forced Air Cooled Motor Tuning
Direct Access Number — F402
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Off
Changeable During Run — No
Motor Rated Capacity
Program ⇒ Motor ⇒ Vector Motor Model
This parameter is used to set the (nameplated) rated capacity of the motor being
used.
Direct Access Number — F405
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 11.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 500.00
Units — kW
Motor Rated Current
Program ⇒ Motor ⇒ Vector Motor Model
This parameter is used to set the (nameplated) current rating of the motor being
used.
Direct Access Number — F406
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 20.3
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 2000.0
Units — Amps
Motor Rated RPM
Program ⇒ Motor ⇒ Vector Motor Model
This parameter is used input the (nameplated) rated speed of the motor.
Direct Access Number — F407
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 1730
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 100
Maximum — 60000
Units — RPM
Base Frequency Voltage 1
Program ⇒ Vector ⇒ Vector Motor Model
The Motor #1 Base Frequency Voltage 1 is the Motor #1 output voltage at the
Base Frequency (F014). Regardless of the programmed value, the output
voltage cannot be higher than the input voltage.
The actual output voltage will be influenced by the input voltage of the ASD
and the Supply Voltage Correction setting (F307).
Direct Access Number — F409
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 50.0
Maximum — 660.0
Units — Volts
F402 F409
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 153
Motor Constant 1 (Torque Boost)
Program ⇒ Motor ⇒ Vector Motor Model
This parameter sets the primary resistance of the motor. Increasing this value
can prevent a drop in the torque of the motor at low speeds. Increasing this
value excessively can result in nuisance overload tripping.
Direct Access Number — F410
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 30.0
Units — %
Motor Constant 2 (No-load Current)
Program ⇒ Motor ⇒ Vector Motor Model
This parameter is used to set the current level required to excite the motor.
Specifying a value that is too high for this parameter may result in hunting
(erratic motor operation).
Direct Access Number — F411
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 10
Maximum — 90
Units — %
Motor Constant 3 (Leak Inductance)
Program ⇒ Motor ⇒ Vector Motor Model
This parameter is used to set the leakage inductance of the motor.
A larger setting here results in higher output torque at high speeds.
Direct Access Number — F412
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 200
Units — %
Motor Constant 4 (Rated Slip)
Program ⇒ Motor ⇒ Vector Motor Model
This parameter is used to set the secondary resistance of the motor.
An increase in this parameter setting results in an increase of compensation for
motor slip.
Direct Access Number — F413
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.01
Minimum — 25.00
Units — %
Exciting Strengthening Coefficient
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ Special Parameters
This parameter is used to increase the magnetic flux of the motor at low-speed.
This feature is useful when increased torque at low speeds is required.
Direct Access Number — F415
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 100
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 100
Maximum — 130
Units — %
F410 F415
154 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Stall Prevention Factor 1
Program ⇒ Protection ⇒ Stall
This parameter is to be adjusted in the event that the motor stalls when operated
above the base frequency.
If a momentary heavy load occurs the motor may stall before the load current
reaches the stall prevention level setting of F601.
A drop in the supply voltage may cause fluctuations of the load current or may
cause motor vibration. A gradual adjustment of this parameter may alleviate
this condition.
Start with a setting of 85 at these parameters and gradually adjust them from
there one at a time until the desired results are produced.
Adjustments to this parameter may increase the load current of the motor and
subsequently warrant an adjustment at the Motor Overload Protection Level
setting.
Direct Access Number — F416
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 100
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 10
Maximum — 250
Torque Command Selection
Program ⇒ To r que ⇒ Torque Control
When operating in the Torque Control mode, this parameter allows the user to
select the source of the torque command signal.
Settings:
1 — V/I
2 — RR
3 — RX
4 — Panel Keypad
5 — RS485 2-wire
6 — RS485 4-wire
7 — Communication Option Board
8 — RX2 Option (AI1)
Direct Access Number — F420
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — RX
Changeable During Run — Yes
Tension Torque Bias Input
Program ⇒ To r que ⇒ Torque Control
This parameter Enables/Disables the Tension Torque Bias input function.
This feature is enabled by selecting a Tension Torque Bias input signal source.
Settings:
0 — Disabled
1 — V/I
2 — RR
3 — RX
4 — Panel Keypad
5 — RS485 2-wire
6 — RS485 4-wire
7 — Communication Option Board
8 — RX2 Option (AI1)
Direct Access Number — F423
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — Yes
F416 F423
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 155
Load Sharing Gain Input
Program ⇒ To r que ⇒ Torque Control
This parameter Enables/Disables the Load Sharing Gain input function.
This feature is enabled by selecting a Load Sharing Gain input signal source.
Settings:
0 — Disabled
1 — V/I
2 — RR
3 — RX
4 — Panel Keypad
5 — RS485 2-wire
6 — RS485 4-wire
7 — Communication Option Board
8 — RX2 Option (AI1)
Direct Access Number — F424
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — Yes
Forward Speed Limit Input
Program ⇒ To r que ⇒ Torque Speed Limiting
This parameter Enables/Disables the Forward Speed Limit Input control
function. When enabled and operating in the Torque Control mode, the
forward speed limit is controlled by the input selected here.
If Setting is selected, the value set at F426 is used as the Forward Speed
Limit input.
Settings:
0 — Disabled
1 — V/I
2 — RR
3 — RX
4 — F426 (setting)
Direct Access Number — F425
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — Yes
Forward Speed Limit Level
Program ⇒ To r que ⇒ Torque Control
This parameter provides a value to be used as the Forward Speed Limit setting
if F426 is selected at F425.
Direct Access Number — F426
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 80.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Upper Limit (F012)
Units — Hz
F424 F426
156 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Reverse Speed Limit Input
Program ⇒ To r que ⇒ Torque Control
This parameter Enables/Disables the Reverse Speed Limit Input control
function. When enabled and operating in the Torque Control mode, the reverse
speed limit is controlled by the terminal selected here. If Setting is selected, the
value set at F428 is used as the Reverse Speed Limit input.
Settings:
0 — Disabled
1 — V/I
2 — RR
3 — RX
4 — Setting (F428)
Direct Access Number — F427
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — Yes
Reverse Speed Limit Input Level
Program ⇒ To r que ⇒ Torque Control
This parameter provides a value to be used as the Reverse Speed Limit setting
if Setting is selected at F427.
Direct Access Number — F428
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 80.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Upper Limit (F012)
Units — Hz
Speed Limit (torque=0) Center Value Reference
Program ⇒ To r que ⇒ Torque Speed Limiting
The system has the ability to limit the amount that the speed may vary as a
function of a changing load while operating in the Torque Control mode. This
parameter sets the input terminal that will be used to control the allowable
speed variance.
Settings:
0 — Disabled
1 — V/I
2 — RR
3 — RX
4 — F431 Setting
Direct Access Number — F430
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — Yes
Speed Limit (torque=0) Center Value
Program ⇒ To r que ⇒ Torque Speed Limiting
The system has the ability to limit the amount that the speed may vary as a
function of a changing load while operating in the Torque Control mode. This
parameter sets the targeted speed. The plus-or-minus value (range) for this
setting may be set at F432.
Direct Access Number — F431
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (F011)
Units — Hz
F427 F431
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 157
Speed Limit (torque=0) Band
Program ⇒ To r que ⇒ Torque Speed Limiting
The system has the ability to limit the amount that the speed may vary as a
function of a changing load while operating in the Torque Control mode. This
parameter sets a plus-or-minus value (range) for the Speed Limit Torque Level
(F431).
Direct Access Number — F432
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (F011)
Units — Hz
Rotation in Specified Direction ONLY
Program ⇒ To r que ⇒ Torque Speed Limiting
This parameter Enables/Disables the Forward Run or Reverse Run mode.
If either direction is disabled, commands received for the disabled direction will
not be recognized.
If both directions are disabled, the received direction command will determine
the direction of the motor rotation.
Settings
0 — Disabled
1 — Enabled
Direct Access Number — F435
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — No
Power Running Torque Limit 1
Program ⇒ To r que ⇒ Torque Limit Settings
This parameter determines the source of the control signal for the positive
torque limit setting.
If Setting is selected, the value set at F441 is used as the Power Running
Torque Limit #1 input.
Settings:
1 — V/I
2 — RR
3 — RX
4 — F441 (setting)
Direct Access Number — F440
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default —F441 Setting
Changeable During Run — Yes
Power Running Torque Limit 1 Level
Program ⇒ To r que ⇒ Torque Limit Settings
This parameter provides a value for the Power Running Torque Limit #1
setting if F441 is selected at parameter F440.
This value provides the positive torque upper limit for the #1 motor.
Direct Access Number — F441
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 250.0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 250.0 (Disabled)
Units — %
F432 F441
158 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Regenerative Braking Torque Limit 1
Program ⇒ Torque ⇒ Torque Limit Settings
This parameter determines the source of the Regenerative Torque Limit
control signal.
If Setting is selected, the value set at F443 is used for this parameter.
Settings:
1 — V/I
2 — RR
3 — RX
4 — F443 (setting)
Direct Access Number — F442
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — F443 Setting
Changeable During Run — Yes
Regenerative Braking Torque Limit 1 Level
Program ⇒ To r que ⇒ Torque Limit Settings
This parameter provides a value to be used as the Regeneration Torque Limit
#1 if F443 is selected at parameter F442.
Set this parameter to 250% to disable this function.
Direct Access Number — F443
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 250.0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 249.9
Units — %
Power Running Torque Limit 2 Level
Program ⇒ To r que ⇒ Manual Torque Limit Settings
This parameter is used to set the positive torque upper limit for the #2 motor
profile when multiple motors are controlled by a single drive or when a single
motor is to be controlled by multiple profiles.
Direct Access Number — F444
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 250.0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 250.0 (Disabled)
Units — %
Regenerative Braking Torque Limit 2 Level
Program ⇒ To r que ⇒ Manual Torque Limit Settings
This parameter is used to set the negative torque upper limit for the #2 motor
profile when multiple motors are controlled by a single drive or when a single
motor is to be controlled by multiple profiles.
Direct Access Number — F445
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 250.0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 250.0 (Disabled)
Units — %
Power Running Torque Limit 3 Level
Program ⇒ To r que ⇒ Manual Torque Limit Settings
This parameter is used to set the positive torque upper limit for the #3 motor
profile when multiple motors are controlled by a single drive or when a single
motor is to be controlled by multiple profiles.
Direct Access Number — F446
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 250.0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 250.0 (Disabled)
Units — %
F442 F446
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 159
Regenerative Braking Torque Limit 3 Level
Program ⇒ Torque ⇒ Manual Torque Limit Settings
This parameter is used to set the negative torque upper limit for the #3 motor
profile when multiple motors are controlled by a single drive or when a single
motor is to be controlled by multiple profiles.
Direct Access Number — F447
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 250.0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 250.0 (Disabled)
Units — %
Power Running Torque Limit 4 Level
Program ⇒ Torque ⇒ Manual Torque Limit Settings
This parameter is used to set the positive torque upper limit for the #4 motor
profile when multiple motors are controlled by a single drive or when a single
motor is to be controlled by multiple profiles.
Direct Access Number — F448
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 250.0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 250.0 (Disabled)
Units — %
Regenerative Braking Torque Limit 4 Level
Program ⇒ Torque ⇒ Manual Torque Limit Settings
This parameter is used to set the negative torque upper limit for the #4 motor
profile when multiple motors are controlled by a single drive or when a single
motor is to be controlled by multiple profiles.
Direct Access Number — F449
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 250.0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 250.0 (Disabled)
Units — %
Accel/Decel Operation After Torque Limit
Program ⇒ Torque ⇒ Torque Limit Settings
In a Crane/Hoist application that is operating using a mechanical brake, this
parameter is used to minimize the delay between the brake release and the
output torque reaching a level that can sustain the load.
This setting may reference time or the operating speed of the motor.
Settings:
0 — In Sync with Accel/Decel
1 — In Sync with Minimum Time
Direct Access Number — F451
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — In Sync with Accel/
Decel
Changeable During Run — Yes
Power Running Stall Continuous Trip Detection Time
Program ⇒ Protection ⇒ Stall
This parameter is used to extend the Overvoltage Stall (F305) and the
Overcurrent Stall (F017) time settings.
Direct Access Number — F452
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 1.0
Units — Seconds
F447 F452
160 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Stall Prevention During Regeneration
Program ⇒ Protection ⇒ Stall
This function of this parameter is to disable the Overvoltage Stall (F305) and
the Overcurrent Stall (F017) function during regeneration only.
Application-specific conditions may occur that warrant disabling the Stall
function during regeneration.
Settings:
0 — Disabled (Stall During Regenerative Braking)
1 — Enabled (No Stall During Regenerative Braking)
Direct Access Number — F453
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Enabled
Changeable During Run — Yes
Current Control Proportional Gain
Program ⇒ Feedback ⇒ PG Settings
This parameter sets the sensitivity of the drive when monitoring the output
current to control speed.
The larger the value entered here, the more sensitive the drive is to changes in
the received feedback.
Direct Access Number — F458
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 100.0
Speed Loop Proportional Gain
Program ⇒ Feedback ⇒ PG Settings
During closed-loop operation, this parameter sets the response sensitivity of the
drive when monitoring the output speed for control.
The larger the value entered here, the larger the change in the output speed for a
given received feedback signal.
Direct Access Number — F460
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 1
Maximum — 9999
Speed Loop Stabilization Coefficient
Program ⇒ Feedback ⇒ PG Settings
During closed-loop operation, this parameter sets the response sensitivity of the
drive when monitoring the output speed for control.
The larger the value entered here, the quicker the response to changes in the
received feedback.
Direct Access Number — F461
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 100
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 1
Maximum — 9999
Load Moment of Inertia 1
Program ⇒ Feedback ⇒ PG Settings
This parameter is used for calculating accel/decel torque when compensating
for load inertia while operating in the Drooping Control mode.
Direct Access Number — F462
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 35
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 100
Second Speed Loop Proportional Gain
Program ⇒ Feedback ⇒ PG Settings
During closed-loop operation, this parameter sets the sensitivity of the drive
when monitoring the output speed for control.
The larger the value entered here, the more sensitive the drive is to changes in
the received feedback.
Direct Access Number — F463
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 1
Maximum — 9999
F453 F463
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 161
Second Speed Loop Stabilization Coefficient
Program ⇒ Feedback ⇒ PG Settings
During closed-loop operation, this parameter sets the response sensitivity of the
drive when monitoring the output speed for control.
The larger the value entered here, the quicker the response to changes in the
received feedback.
Direct Access Number — F464
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 1
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 1
Maximum — 9999
Load Moment of Inertia 2
Program ⇒ Feedback ⇒ PG Settings
This parameter is used for calculating accel/decel torque when compensating
for load inertia while operating in the Drooping Control mode.
Direct Access Number — F465
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 35
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 100
Speed PID Switching Frequency
Program ⇒ Feedback ⇒ Feedback Settings
While running, this parameter establishes the threshold speed setting that is
used to determine if PID control may engage or remain engaged if active.
Direct Access Number — F466
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (F011)
Units — Hz
V/I Input Bias
Program ⇒ Frequency ⇒ Speed Reference Setpoints
This parameter is used to fine-tune the bias of the V/I input terminals.
Note: See note on pg. 43 for more information on the V/I terminal.
This setting may be used to ensure that the zero level of the input source (pot,
pressure transducer, flow meter, etc.) is also the zero level setting of the ASD
system.
This is accomplished by setting the input source to zero and adjusting this
setting to provide an output of zero from the ASD.
Direct Access Number — F470
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 127
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 255
V/I Input Gain
Program ⇒ Frequency ⇒ Speed Reference Setpoints
This parameter is used to fine tune the gain of the V/I input terminals.
Note: See note on pg. 43 for more information on the V/I terminal.
This setting may be used to ensure that the 100% level of the input source (pot,
pressure transducer, flow meter, etc.) is also the 100% level setting of the ASD
system.
This is accomplished by setting the input source to 100% and adjusting this
setting to provide an output of 100% from the ASD.
Direct Access Number — F471
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 129
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 255
F464 F471
162 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
RR Input Bias
Program ⇒ Frequency ⇒ Speed Reference Setpoints
This parameter is used to fine tune the bias of the RR input terminal when this
terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control
mode or the Torque Control mode.
This setting may be used to ensure that the zero level of the input source (pot,
pressure transducer, flow meter, etc.) is also the zero level setting of the ASD
system.
This is accomplished by setting the input source to zero and adjusting this
setting to provide an output of zero from the ASD.
Direct Access Number — F472
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 128
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 255
RR Input Gain
Program ⇒ Frequency ⇒ Speed Reference Setpoints
This parameter is used to fine tune the gain of the RR input terminal when this
terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control
mode or the Torque Control mode.
This setting may be used to ensure that the 100% level of the input source (pot,
pressure transducer, flow meter, etc.) is also the 100% level setting of the ASD
system.
This is accomplished by setting the input source to 100% and adjusting this
setting to provide an output of 100% from the ASD.
Direct Access Number — F473
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 154
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 255
RX Input Bias
Program ⇒ Frequency ⇒ Speed Reference Setpoints
This parameter is used to fine tune the bias of the RX input terminal when this
terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control
mode or the Torque Control mode.
This setting may be used to ensure that the zero level of the input source (pot,
pressure transducer, flow meter, etc.) is also the zero level setting of the ASD
system.
This is accomplished by setting the input source to zero and adjusting this
setting to provide an output of zero from the ASD.
Direct Access Number — F474
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 127
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 255
RX Input Gain
Program ⇒ Frequency ⇒ Speed Reference Setpoints
This parameter is used to fine tune the gain of the RX input terminal when this
terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control
mode or the Torque Control mode.
This setting may be used to ensure that the 100% level of the input source (pot,
pressure transducer, flow meter, etc.) is also the 100% level setting of the ASD
system.
This is accomplished by setting the input source to 100% and adjusting this
setting to provide an output of 100% from the ASD.
Direct Access Number — F475
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 127
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 255
F472 F475
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 163
RX2 (AI1) Input Bias
Program ⇒ Frequency ⇒ Speed Reference Setpoints
This parameter is used to fine tune the bias of the RX2 (AI1) input terminal
when this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed
Control mode or the Torque Control mode.
This setting may be used to ensure that the zero level of the input source (pot,
pressure transducer, flow meter, etc.) is also the zero level setting of the ASD
system.
This is accomplished by setting the input source to zero and adjusting this
setting to provide a zero output from the ASD.
Direct Access Number — F476
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 128
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 255
RX2 (AI1) Input Gain
Program ⇒ Frequency ⇒ Speed Reference Setpoints
This parameter is used to fine tune the gain of the RX2 (AI1) input terminal
when this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed
Control mode or the Torque Control mode.
This setting may be used to ensure that the 100% level of the input source (pot,
pressure transducer, flow meter, etc.) is also the 100% level setting of the ASD
system.
This is accomplished by setting the input source to 100% and adjusting this
setting to provide an output of 100% from the ASD.
Direct Access Number — F477
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 128
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 255
AI2 (Option V/I) Input Bias
Program ⇒ Frequency ⇒ Speed Reference Setpoints
This parameter is used to fine tune the gain of the Optional AI2 input terminal
when this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed
Control mode or the Torque Control mode.
This setting may be used to ensure that the 100% level of the input source (pot,
pressure transducer, flow meter, etc.) is also the 100% level setting of the ASD
system.
This is accomplished by setting the input source to 100% and adjusting this
setting to provide an output of 100% from the ASD.
Direct Access Number — F478
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 128
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 255
AI2 (Option V/I) Input Gain
Program ⇒ Frequency ⇒ Speed Reference Setpoints
This parameter is used to fine tune the gain of the Optional AI2 input terminal
when this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed
Control mode or the Torque Control mode.
This setting may be used to ensure that the 100% level of the input source (pot,
pressure transducer, flow meter, etc.) is also the 100% level setting of the ASD
system.
This is accomplished by setting the input source to 100% and adjusting this
setting to provide an output of 100% from the ASD.
Direct Access Number — F479
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 128
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 255
F476 F479
164 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Permanent Magnet (PM) Motor Constant 1
Program ⇒ Motor ⇒ PM Motor
This parameter is used with synchronous motor applications only.
Contact Toshiba Customer Service Department for information on this
parameter.
Direct Access Number — F498
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 100
Units — %
Permanent Magnet (PM) Motor Constant 2
Program ⇒ Motor ⇒ PM Motor
This parameter is used with synchronous motor applications only.
Contact Toshiba Customer Service Department for information on this
parameter.
Direct Access Number — F499
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 100
Units — %
Acceleration Time 2
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ Acc/Dec #1 – #4 Settings
This parameter specifies the time in seconds for the output of the ASD to go
from 0.0 Hz to the Maximum Frequency for the #2 Acceleration profile. The
Accel/Decel pattern may be set using F502. The minimum Accel/Decel time
may be set using F508.
This setting is also used to determine the acceleration rate of the UP/DOWN
Frequency Functions.
Note: An acceleration time shorter than the load will allow may cause
nuisance tripping and mechanical stress to loads. Automatic
Accel/Decel, Stall, and Ridethrough settings may lengthen the
acceleration times.
Direct Access Number — F500
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 6000.0
Units — Seconds
Deceleration Time 2
Program ⇒ Fundamental ⇒ Accel/Decel #1 Settings
This parameter specifies the time in seconds for the output of the ASD to go
from the Maximum Frequency to 0.0 Hz for the #2 Deceleration profile. The
Accel/Decel pattern may be set using F502. The minimum Accel/Decel time
may be set using F508.
This setting is also used to determine the deceleration rate of the UP/DOWN
Frequency Functions.
Note: A deceleration time shorter than the load will allow may cause
nuisance tripping and mechanical stress to loads. Automatic
Accel/Decel, Stall, and Ridethrough settings may lengthen the
deceleration times.
Direct Access Number — F501
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 6000
Units — Seconds
F498 F501
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 165
Acc/Dec Pattern 1
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ Accel/Decel #1 – #4 Settings
This parameter enables a user-selected preprogrammed output profile that
controls the acceleration and deceleration pattern for the #1 Accel/Decel
parameter.
Settings:
0 — Linear
1 — S-Pattern 1
2 — S-Pattern 2
The figures below provide a profile of the available accel/decel patterns.
Direct Access Number — F502
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Linear
Changeable During Run — Yes
Linear acceleration and deceleration is the
default pattern and is used on most
applications.
S-pattern 1 is used for applications that require
quick acceleration and deceleration. This setting
is also popular for applications that require shock
absorption at the start of acceleration or
deceleration.
S-pattern 2 decreases the rate of change
above the base frequency.
F502 F502
166 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Acc/Dec Pattern 2
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ Accel/Decel #1 – #4 Settings
This parameter enables a user-selected preprogrammed output profile that
controls the acceleration and deceleration pattern for the #2 Accel/Decel
parameter.
Settings:
0 — Linear
1 — S-Pattern 1
2 — S-Pattern 2
Direct Access Number — F503
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Linear
Changeable During Run — Yes
F503 F503
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 167
Acc/Dec Pattern 1 – 4
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ Acc/Dec Special
Four Acceleration times and four Deceleration times may be set up and run
individually. Accel/Decel Time #1 – #4 may be selected using this parameter
setting or switched via threshold frequencies, or by discrete input terminal.
This parameter is used to select one of the four configured accel/decel profiles
to be used.
Settings:
1 — Acc/Dec #1
2 — Acc/Dec #2
3 — Acc/Dec #3
4 — Acc/Dec #4
Each Accel/Decel selection is comprised of an Acceleration Time,
Deceleration Time, and a Pattern selection. Selection 1, 2, and 3 have a
Switching Frequency setting. The Switching Frequency is used as a threshold
frequency that, once reached, the ASD switches to the next higher Acc/Dec
selection (i.e., 1 to 2, 2 to 3, or 3 to 4). Switching Frequency settings are also
used during deceleration. A switching frequency setting is not required for
Acc/Dec #4.
Acc/Dec #1 is set up using parameters F009 (Acc Time), F010 (Dec Time),
F502 (Pattern), and F505 (Switching Frequency).
Acc/Dec #2 is set up using parameters F500 (Acc Time), F501 (Dec Time),
F503 (Pattern), and F513 (Switching Frequency).
Acc/Dec #3 is set up using parameters F510 (Acc Time), F511 (Dec Time),
F512 (Pattern), and F517 (Switching Frequency).
Acc/Dec #4 is set up using parameters F514 (Acc Time), and F515 (Dec Time),
F516 (Pattern).
This parameter (F504) is used to manually select Acc/Dec #1 – #4.
To switch using the Terminal Board, assign the functions Acc/Dec Switching
1 and Acc/Dec Switching 2 to two discrete input terminals. Activation
combinations of the two terminals result in the Acc/Dec #1 – #4 selections as
shown in Table 4.
Figure 30 shows the setup requirements and the resulting output frequency
response when using Switching Frequency settings to control the Acc/Dec
response of the ASD output.
While operating using S-Pattern 1 the system performance may be further
enhanced by the adjustment of parameters F506 – F509. These settings provide
for upper and lower Acc/Dec limit adjustments. These settings are used to
extend or shorten the upper or lower Acc/Dec curve.
If operating from the Local mode, press Esc from the Frequency Command
screen to access this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F504
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 1
Changeable During Run — Yes
Table 4.
Figure 30. Using Acc/Dec Switching.
Accel/Decel Switching Frequency 1
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ Accel/Decel Special
This parameter sets the frequency at which the acceleration control is switched
from the Accel #1 profile to the Accel #2 profile during a multiple-acceleration
profile configuration.
Direct Access Number — F505
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (F011)
Units — Hz
Using combinations of discrete terminal
activations Accel/Decel profiles 1–4 may
be selected.
Acc/Dec Switching Truth
A/D SW 1 A/D SW 2 Acc/Dec # Out
00 1
01 2
10 3
11 4
1 = Discrete terminal activation.
1 — Accel time 1 (F009 setting)
2 — Accel time 2 (F500 setting)
3 — Accel time 3 (F510 setting)
4 — Accel time 4 (F514 setting)
5 — Decel time 4 (F515 setting)
6 — Decel time 3 (F511 setting)
7 — Decel time 2 (F501 setting)
8 — Decel time 1 (F010 setting)
F504 F505
168 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
S-Pattern Acceleration Lower Limit Adjustment
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ Accel/Decel Special
During an S-Pattern 1 or 2 sequence, this parameter settings modifies the
acceleration rate for the lower part of the acceleration curve by the percentage
set here.
This function is commonly used with transportation and lifting applications.
See parameter F502 on pg. 165 for more information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F506
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 10
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 50
Units — %
S-Pattern Acceleration Upper Limit Adjustment
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ Accel/Decel Special
During an S-Pattern 1 or 2 sequence, this parameter settings modifies the
acceleration rate for the upper part of the acceleration curve by the percentage
set here.
This function is commonly used with transportation and lifting applications.
See parameter F502 on pg. 165 for more information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F507
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 10
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 50
Units — %
S-Pattern Deceleration Lower Limit Adjustment
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ Accel/Decel Special
During an S-Pattern 1 or 2 sequence, this parameter settings modifies the
deceleration rate for the lower part of the deceleration curve by the percentage
set here.
This function is commonly used with transportation and lifting applications.
See parameter F502 on pg. 165 for more information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F508
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 10
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 50
Units — %
S-Pattern Deceleration Upper Limit Adjustment
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ Accel/Decel Special
During an S-Pattern 1 or 2 sequence, this parameter settings modifies the
deceleration rate for the upper part of the deceleration curve by the percentage
set here.
This function is commonly used with transportation and lifting applications.
See parameter F502 on pg. 165 for more information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F509
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 10
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 50
Units — %
Acceleration Time 3
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ Accel/Decel #1 – #4 Settings
This parameter specifies the time in seconds for the output of the ASD to go
from 0.0 Hz to the Maximum Frequency for the #3 Acceleration profile. The
Accel/Decel pattern may be set using F502. The minimum Accel/Decel time
may be set using F508.
Note: An acceleration time shorter than the load will allow may cause
nuisance tripping and mechanical stress to loads. Automatic
Accel/Decel, Stall, and Ridethrough settings may lengthen the
acceleration times.
Direct Access Number — F510
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 6000
Units — Seconds
F506 F510
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 169
Deceleration Time 3
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ Accel/Decel #1 – #4 Settings
This parameter specifies the time in seconds for the output of the ASD to go
from the Maximum Frequency to 0.0 Hz for the #3 Deceleration profile.
The Accel/Decel pattern may be set using F502. The minimum Accel/Decel
time may be set using F508.
Note: A deceleration time shorter than the load will allow may cause
nuisance tripping and mechanical stress to loads. Automatic
Accel/Decel, Stall, and Ridethrough settings may lengthen the
deceleration times.
Direct Access Number — F511
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 6000
Units — Seconds
Acceleration/Deceleration Pattern 3
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ Accel/Decel #1 – #4 Settings
This parameter enables a user-selected preprogrammed output profile that
controls the acceleration and deceleration pattern for the #3 Accel/Decel
parameter.
Settings:
0 — Linear
1 — S-Pattern 1
2 — S-Pattern 2
Direct Access Number — F512
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Linear
Changeable During Run — Yes
Acceleration/Deceleration Switching Frequency 2
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ Accel/Decel Special
This parameter sets the frequency at which the acceleration control is switched
from the Accel #2 profile to the Accel #3 profile during a multiple-acceleration
profile configuration.
Direct Access Number — F513
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (F011)
Units — Hz
Acceleration Time 4
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ Accel/Decel #1 – #4 Settings
This parameter specifies the time in seconds for the output of the ASD to go
from 0.0 Hz to the Maximum Frequency for the #4 Acceleration profile. The
Accel/Decel pattern may be set using F502. The minimum Accel/Decel time
may be set using F508.
Note: An acceleration time shorter than the load will allow may cause
nuisance tripping and mechanical stress to loads. Automatic
Accel/Decel, Stall, and Ridethrough settings may lengthen the
acceleration times.
Direct Access Number — F514
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 6000
Units — Seconds
F511 F514
170 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Deceleration Time 4
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ Accel/Decel #1 – #4 Settings
This parameter specifies the time in seconds for the output of the ASD to go
from the Maximum Frequency to 0.0 Hz for the #4 Deceleration profile. The
Accel/Decel pattern may be set using F502. The minimum Accel/Decel time
may be set using F508.
Note: A deceleration time shorter than the load will allow may cause
nuisance tripping and mechanical stress to loads. Automatic
Accel/Decel, Stall, and Ridethrough settings may lengthen the
deceleration times.
Direct Access Number — F515
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 6000
Units — Seconds
Acceleration/Deceleration Pattern 4
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ Accel/Decel #1 – #4 Settings
This parameter enables a user-selected preprogrammed output profile that
controls the acceleration and deceleration pattern for the #4 Accel/Decel
parameter.
Settings:
0 — Linear
1 — S-Pattern 1
2 — S-Pattern 2
Direct Access Number — F516
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Linear
Changeable During Run — Yes
Acceleration/Deceleration Switching Frequency 3
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ Accel/Decel Special
This parameter sets the frequency at which the acceleration control is switched
from the Accel #3 profile to the Accel #4 profile during a multiple-acceleration
profile configuration.
Direct Access Number — F517
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (F011)
Units — Hz
Pattern Operation Selection
Program ⇒ Pattern Run ⇒ Pattern Run
Pattern Run operation is enabled by selecting Seconds or Minutes as a unit of
measure for the Operation Time setting for the selected Preset Speeds.
See Parameter F523 for more information on Selections and Group Speeds
setup.
Settings:
0 — Disabled
1 — Enabled (units in seconds)
2 — Enabled (units in minutes)
Direct Access Number — F520
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — No
Pattern Operation Mode
Program ⇒ Pattern Run ⇒ Pattern Run
This parameter sets the start condition of subsequent Pattern Runs after the
initial Pattern Run has been terminated or has completed its programming.
Settings:
0 — Reset After Stop
1 — Continue After Stop
Direct Access Number — F521
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Reset After Stop
Changeable During Run — No
F515 F521
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 171
Pattern 1 Repeat
Program ⇒ Pattern Run ⇒ Pattern Run
This parameter sets the number of times to repeat the Pattern Group 1.
Settings:
1 — Once Then Stop
2 – 254 — Number of Repeats
255 — Infinite (forever)
Direct Access Number — F522
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 255 (Infinite)
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 1
Maximum — 255 (Infinite)
Units — Repetitions
F522 F522
172 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Pattern Group 1 Selection 1
Program ⇒ Pattern Run ⇒ Speeds
Groups of configured Preset Speeds may be selected and run from this screen.
The execution of grouped Preset Speeds in this manner is called a Pattern
Run.
One to eight user-selected Preset Speeds may be run sequentially for a user-set
number of repetitions. The group of user-selected Preset Speeds is called a
Pattern Group. The Pattern Run function executes the user-set Pattern
Group.
Pattern Group 1 is comprised of up to 8 Selections with each Selection being
1 of 15 possible Preset Speed settings. Skip may be selected to ignore a
Selection.
This parameter allows the user to choose one configured Preset Speed that is to
be used as Selection 1 (of 8) for Pattern Group 1. See F018 for information on
configuring the individual Preset Speeds. Parameters F524 – F530 may be
setup for subsequent Selections 2 – 8.
One Preset Speed number (1 – 15) or Skip is selected for Selection 1 (F523).
The number of times to repeat Pattern Group 1 is selected at F522. Set this
value to 255 to run forever.
Setup Pattern Group 2 at F531 – F539 if more Preset Speed entries are
required.
Pattern Run Setup (for Pattern Group 1)
1. From Program ⇒ Pattern Run ⇒ Speeds, select the Preset Speeds that are
to be used as the Pattern Group 1 set of Selections. Select a speed from
the 1 – 15 configured presets; 1 speed number per Selection. Set any
unused Selections to Skip.
2. From Program ⇒ Pattern Run ⇒ Pattern Run ⇒ Pattern Operation
Selection, enable the Pattern Run mode of operation by selecting Seconds
or Minutes as the unit of measure for the Operation Time setting.
3. From Program ⇒ Pattern Run ⇒ Operation Time, set the run-time for
each Preset Speed selected in step 1.
4. Configure two unused discrete input terminals for Pattern Operation
Group 1 and Pattern Operation Trigger Signal.
Note: Activation of the Pattern Operation Group 1 discrete input
terminal is required to enable Pattern Group 1 for use.
Activation of the Pattern Operation Trigger Signal discrete
input terminal starts the Pattern Group 1 pattern run.
5. From Program ⇒ Pattern Run ⇒ Pattern Run ⇒ Pattern 1 Repeat, set to
the number of times that Pattern Group 1 is to be run. Set to 255 to run
forever.
6. From Program ⇒ Pattern Run ⇒ Pattern Run ⇒ Pattern Operation
Mode, set the end-of-pattern command to Reset or Continue.
7. From the Remote mode (Local|Remote light is off), initiate a Run
command (i.e., F and/or R terminal On).
8. Connect the Pattern Operation Group 1 input terminal to CC.
9. Connect the Pattern Operation Trigger Signal input terminal to CC and
the Pattern Run will start and continue as programmed.
10. Open the Pattern Operation Trigger Signal connection to CC to stop the
Pattern Run before its conclusion if required.
Direct Access Number — F523
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Skip
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — Skip
Maximum — 15
Units — Preset Speed Number
Pattern Group 1
Selection
F523 F524 F525 F526F527 F528F529 F530
12345678
Preset Speed Number
Skip Skip Skip Skip Skip Skip Skip Skip
11111111
22222222
33333333
44444444
55555555
66666666
77777777
88888888
99999999
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11
12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13
14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14
15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
F523 F523
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 173
Pattern Group 1 Selection 2
Program ⇒ Pattern Run ⇒ Speeds
This parameter allows the user to select 1 of 15 configured Preset Speeds as
the number 2 Selection to be included in Pattern Group 1.
Skip may be selected to ignore this Selection.
Setting
0 — Skip
1 – 15 Preset Speed Number
See F523 for more information on this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F524
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Skip
Changeable During Run — No
Pattern Group 1 Selection 3
Program ⇒ Pattern Run ⇒ Speeds
This parameter allows the user to select 1 of 15 configured Preset Speeds as
the number 3 Selection to be included in Pattern Group 1.
Skip may be selected to ignore this Selection.
Setting
0 — Skip
1 – 15 Preset Speed Number
See F523 for more information on this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F525
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Skip
Changeable During Run — No
Pattern Group 1 Selection 4
Program ⇒ Pattern Run ⇒ Speeds
This parameter allows the user to select 1 of 15 configured Preset Speeds as
the number 4 Selection to be included in Pattern Group 1.
Skip may be selected to ignore this Selection.
Setting
0 — Skip
1 – 15 Preset Speed Number
See F523 for more information on this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F526
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Skip
Changeable During Run — No
Pattern Group 1 Selection 5
Program ⇒ Pattern Run ⇒ Speeds
This parameter allows the user to select 1 of 15 configured Preset Speeds as
the number 5 Selection to be included in Pattern Group 1.
Skip may be selected to ignore this Selection.
Setting
0 — Skip
1 – 15 Preset Speed Number
See F523 for more information on this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F527
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Skip
Changeable During Run — No
F524 F527
174 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Pattern Group 1 Selection 6
Program ⇒ Pattern Run ⇒ Speeds
This parameter allows the user to select 1 of 15 configured Preset Speeds as
the number 6 Selection to be included in Pattern Group 1.
Skip may be selected to ignore this Selection.
Setting
0 — Skip
1 – 15 Preset Speed Number
See F523 for more information on this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F528
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Skip
Changeable During Run — No
Pattern Group 1 Selection 7
Program ⇒ Pattern Run ⇒ Speeds
This parameter allows the user to select 1 of 15 configured Preset Speeds as
the number 7 Selection to be included in Pattern Group 1.
Skip may be selected to ignore this Selection.
Setting
0 — Skip
1 – 15 Preset Speed Number
See F523 for more information on this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F529
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Skip
Changeable During Run — No
Pattern Group 1 Selection 8
Program ⇒ Pattern Run ⇒ Speeds
This parameter allows the user to select 1 of 15 configured Preset Speeds as
the number 8 Selection to be included in Pattern Group 1.
Skip may be selected to ignore this Selection.
Setting
0 — Skip
1 – 15 Preset Speed Number
See F523 for more information on this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F530
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — Skip
Changeable During Run — No
Pattern 2 Repeat
Program ⇒ Pattern Run ⇒ Pattern Run
This parameter sets the number of times to repeat the Pattern Group 2.
Direct Access Number — F531
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 255 (Infinite)
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 1
Maximum — 255 (Infinite)
Units — Repetitions
F528 F531
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 175
Pattern Group 2 Selection 1
Program ⇒ Pattern Run ⇒ Speeds
This parameter allows the user to select 1 of 15 configured Preset Speeds as
the number 1 selection to be included in the Group 2 Selection.
Skip may be selected to ignore this Selection.
Setting
0 — Skip
1 – 15 Preset Speed Number
See F523 for more information on this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F532
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Skip
Changeable During Run — No
Pattern Group 2 Selection 2
Program ⇒ Pattern Run ⇒ Speeds
This parameter allows the user to select 1 of 15 configured Preset Speeds as
the number 2 selection to be included in the Group 2 Selection.
Skip may be selected to ignore this Selection.
Setting
0 — Skip
1 – 15 Preset Speed Number
See F523 for more information on this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F533
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Skip
Changeable During Run — No
Pattern Group 2 Selection 3
Program ⇒ Pattern Run ⇒ Speeds
This parameter allows the user to select 1 of 15 configured Preset Speeds as
the number 3 selection to be included in the Group 2 Selection.
Skip may be selected to ignore this Selection.
Setting
0 — Skip
1 – 15 Preset Speed Number
See F523 for more information on this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F534
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Skip
Changeable During Run — No
Pattern Group 2 Selection 4
Program ⇒ Pattern Run ⇒ Speeds
This parameter allows the user to select 1 of 15 configured Preset Speeds as
the number 4 selection to be included in the Group 2 Selection.
Skip may be selected to ignore this Selection.
Setting
0 — Skip
1 – 15 Preset Speed Number
See F523 for more information on this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F535
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Skip
Changeable During Run — No
F532 F535
176 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Pattern Group 2 Selection 5
Program ⇒ Pattern Run ⇒ Speeds
This parameter allows the user to select 1 of 15 configured Preset Speeds as
the number 5 selection to be included in the Group 2 Selection.
Skip may be selected to ignore this Selection.
Setting
0 — Skip
1 – 15 Preset Speed Number
See F523 for more information on this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F536
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Skip
Changeable During Run — No
Pattern Group 2 Selection 6
Program ⇒ Pattern Run ⇒ Speeds
This parameter allows the user to select 1 of 15 configured Preset Speeds as
the number 6 selection to be included in the Group 2 Selection.
Skip may be selected to ignore this Selection.
Setting
0 — Skip
1 – 15 Preset Speed Number
See F523 for more information on this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F537
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Skip
Changeable During Run — No
Pattern Group 2 Selection 7
Program ⇒ Pattern Run ⇒ Speeds
This parameter allows the user to select 1 of 15 configured Preset Speeds as
the number 7 selection to be included in the Group 2 Selection.
Skip may be selected to ignore this Selection.
Setting
0 — Skip
1 – 15 Preset Speed Number
See F523 for more information on this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F538
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Skip
Changeable During Run — No
Pattern Group 2 Selection 8
Program ⇒ Pattern Run ⇒ Speeds
This parameter allows the user to select 1 of 15 configured Preset Speeds as
the number 8 selection to be included in the Group 2 Selection.
Skip may be selected to ignore this Selection.
Setting
0 — Skip
1 – 15 Preset Speed Number
See F523 for more information on this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F539
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Skip
Changeable During Run — No
F536 F539
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 177
Speed 1 Operation Time
Program ⇒ Pattern Run ⇒ Operation Time
This parameter sets the run-time for Preset Speed #1.
This time is effective when used with Group Speeds and non-Group Speeds.
If the Auto-Restart function is activated, the search time required for the Auto-
Restart function will be subtracted from the Operation Time setting; resulting
in a shorter run time.
Direct Access Number — F540
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 5.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 6000.0
Units — F520 Setting
Speed 2 Operation Time
Program ⇒ Pattern Run ⇒ Operation Time
This parameter sets the run-time for Preset Speed #2.
This time is effective when used with Group Speeds and non-Group Speeds.
If the Auto-Restart function is activated, the search time required for the Auto-
Restart function will be subtracted from the Operation Time setting; resulting
in a shorter run time.
Direct Access Number — F541
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 5.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 6000.0
Units — F520 Setting
Speed 3 Operation Time
Program ⇒ Pattern Run ⇒ Operation Time
This parameter sets the run-time for Preset Speed #3.
This time is effective when used with Group Speeds and non-Group Speeds.
If the Auto-Restart function is activated, the search time required for the Auto-
Restart function will be subtracted from the Operation Time setting; resulting
in a shorter run time.
Direct Access Number — F542
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 5.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 6000.0
Units — F520 Setting
Speed 4 Operation Time
Program ⇒ Pattern Run ⇒ Operation Time
This parameter sets the run-time for Preset Speed #4.
This time is effective when used with Group Speeds and non-Group Speeds.
If the Auto-Restart function is activated, the search time required for the Auto-
Restart function will be subtracted from the Operation Time setting; resulting
in a shorter run time.
Direct Access Number — F543
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 5.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 6000.0
Units — F520 Setting
Speed 5 Operation Time
Program ⇒ Pattern Run ⇒ Operation Time
This parameter sets the run-time for Preset Speed #5.
This time is effective when used with Group Speeds and non-Group Speeds.
If the Auto-Restart function is activated, the search time required for the Auto-
Restart function will be subtracted from the Operation Time setting; resulting
in a shorter run time.
Direct Access Number — F544
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 5.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 6000.0
Units — F520 Setting
Speed 6 Operation Time
Program ⇒ Pattern Run ⇒ Operation Time
This parameter sets the run-time for Preset Speed #6.
This time is effective when used with Group Speeds and non-Group Speeds.
If the Auto-Restart function is activated, the search time required for the Auto-
Restart function will be subtracted from the Operation Time setting; resulting
in a shorter run time.
Direct Access Number — F545
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 5.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 6000.0
Units — F520 Setting
F540 F545
178 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Speed 7 Operation Time
Program ⇒ Pattern Run ⇒ Operation Time
This parameter sets the run-time for Preset Speed #7.
This time is effective when used with Group Speeds and non-Group Speeds.
If the Auto-Restart function is activated, the search time required for the Auto-
Restart function will be subtracted from the Operation Time setting; resulting
in a shorter run time.
Direct Access Number — F546
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 5.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 6000.0
Units — F520 Setting
Speed 8 Operation Time
Program ⇒ Pattern Run ⇒ Operation Time
This parameter sets the run-time for Preset Speed #8.
This time is effective when used with Group Speeds and non-Group Speeds.
If the Auto-Restart function is activated, the search time required for the Auto-
Restart function will be subtracted from the Operation Time setting; resulting
in a shorter run time.
Direct Access Number — F547
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 5.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 6000.0
Units — F520 Setting
Speed 9 Operation Time
Program ⇒ Pattern Run ⇒ Operation Time
This parameter sets the run-time for Preset Speed #9
This time is effective when used with Group Speeds and non-Group Speeds.
If the Auto-Restart function is activated, the search time required for the Auto-
Restart function will be subtracted from the Operation Time setting; resulting
in a shorter run time.
Direct Access Number — F548
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 5.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 6000.0
Units — F520 Setting
Speed 10 Operation Time
Program ⇒ Pattern Run ⇒ Operation Time
This parameter sets the run-time for Preset Speed #10
This time is effective when used with Group Speeds and non-Group Speeds.
If the Auto-Restart function is activated, the search time required for the Auto-
Restart function will be subtracted from the Operation Time setting; resulting
in a shorter run time.
Direct Access Number — F549
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 5.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 6000.0
Units — F520 Setting
Speed 11 Operation Time
Program ⇒ Pattern Run ⇒ Operation Time
This parameter sets the run-time for Preset Speed #11
This time is effective when used with Group Speeds and non-Group Speeds.
If the Auto-Restart function is activated, the search time required for the Auto-
Restart function will be subtracted from the Operation Time setting; resulting
in a shorter run time.
Direct Access Number — F550
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 5.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 6000.0
Units — F520 Setting
Speed 12 Operation Time
Program ⇒ Pattern Run ⇒ Operation Time
This parameter sets the run-time for Preset Speed #12
This time is effective when used with Group Speeds and non-Group Speeds.
If the Auto-Restart function is activated, the search time required for the Auto-
Restart function will be subtracted from the Operation Time setting; resulting
in a shorter run time.
Direct Access Number — F551
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 5.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 6000.0
Units — F520 Setting
F546 F551
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 179
Speed 13 Operation Time
Program ⇒ Pattern Run ⇒ Operation Time
This parameter sets the run-time for Preset Speed #13.
This time is effective when used with Group Speeds and non-Group Speeds.
If the Auto-Restart function is activated, the search time required for the Auto-
Restart function will be subtracted from the Operation Time setting; resulting
in a shorter run time.
Direct Access Number — F552
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 5.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 6000.0
Units — F520 Setting
Speed 14 Operation Time
Program ⇒ Pattern Run ⇒ Operation Time
This parameter sets the run-time for Preset Speed #14.
This time is effective when used with Group Speeds and non-Group Speeds.
If the Auto-Restart function is activated, the search time required for the Auto-
Restart function will be subtracted from the Operation Time setting; resulting
in a shorter run time.
Direct Access Number — F553
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 5.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 6000.0
Units — F520 Setting
Speed 15 Operation Time
Program ⇒ Pattern Run ⇒ Operation Time
This parameter sets the run-time for Preset Speed #15.
This time is effective when used with Group Speeds and non-Group Speeds.
If the Auto-Restart function is activated, the search time required for the Auto-
Restart function will be subtracted from the Operation Time setting; resulting
in a shorter run time.
Direct Access Number — F554
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 5.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 6000.0
Units — F520 Setting
Preset Speed Operation Mode
Program ⇒ Pattern Run ⇒ Operation Mode
This parameter is used to set the Preset Speed operating mode.
Select Disabled at this parameter to use the speed command only for Preset
Speed operation.
Select Enabled at this parameter to apply the control settings of F561 – F575 to
the associated Preset Speed while operating in the Preset Speed mode.
Settings:
0 — Disabled (Preset Speed Only)
1 — Enabled (Full Preset Speed Mode)
Direct Access Number — F560
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — No
F552 F560
180 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Preset Speed 1 Operation Mode
Program ⇒ Pattern Run ⇒ Operation Mode
This parameter is enabled at F560 and is used to set the speed, torque, and
direction of Preset Speed 1.
This screen is comprised of 4 fields that are labeled as follows: Direction, Acc/
Dec Group, V/f Group, and Torque Limit Group. Scroll to the field of
interest and press the scroll knob (Enter). Using the scroll knob, set the value
and press the scroll knob (Enter).
Parameters F562 – F575 are used to set the functions listed here for Preset
Speeds 2 – 15.
When using communications write the appropriate word to location F561 as
indicated below.
Settings:
0 — Forward Run
1 — Reverse Run
2 — Accel/Decel Switching 1
4 — Accel/Decel Switching 2
8 — V/f Switching Signal 1
16 — V/f Switching Signal 2
32 — Torque Limit Switching Signal 1
64 — Torque Limit Switching Signal 2
Direct Access Number — F561
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Forward Run
Changeable During Run — No
Preset Speed 2 Operation Mode
Program ⇒ Pattern Run ⇒ Operation Mode
Same as Preset Speed 1 Operation Mode (see F561).
Direct Access Number — F562
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Forward Run
Changeable During Run — No
Preset Speed 3 Operation Mode
Program ⇒ Pattern Run ⇒ Operation Mode
Same as Preset Speed 1 Operation Mode (see F561).
Direct Access Number — F563
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Forward Run
Changeable During Run — No
F/R
V/f Switch
Torque Limit
Switch 2 A/D Switch
1
24816
3264
0
11 01 1
0
Writing the following data to location F561 via communications results in:
Forward Run, A/D SW 2, V/f SW 3, Torque Lim SW 4.
{
{
{
{
0=F
1=R
00=A/D 1
01=A/D 2
10=A/D 3
11=A/D 4
00=V/f 1
01=V/f 2
10=V/f 3
11=V/f 4
00=T-Lim 1
01=T-Lim 2
10=T-Lim 3
11=T-Lim 4
F561 F563
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 181
Preset Speed 4 Operation Mode
Program ⇒ Pattern Run ⇒ Operation Mode
Same as Preset Speed 1 Operation Mode (see F561).
Direct Access Number — F564
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Forward Run
Changeable During Run — No
Preset Speed 5 Operation Mode
Program ⇒ Pattern Run ⇒ Operation Mode
Same as Preset Speed 1 Operation Mode (see F561).
Direct Access Number — F565
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Forward Run
Changeable During Run — No
Preset Speed 6 Operation Mode
Program ⇒ Pattern Run ⇒ Operation Mode
Same as Preset Speed 1 Operation Mode (see F561).
Direct Access Number — F566
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Forward Run
Changeable During Run — No
Preset Speed 7 Operation Mode
Program ⇒ Pattern Run ⇒ Operation Mode
Same as Preset Speed 1 Operation Mode (see F561).
Direct Access Number — F567
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Forward Run
Changeable During Run — No
Preset Speed 8 Operation Mode
Program ⇒ Pattern Run ⇒ Operation Mode
Same as Preset Speed 1 Operation Mode (see F561).
Direct Access Number — F568
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Forward Run
Changeable During Run — No
Preset Speed 9 Operation Mode
Program ⇒ Pattern Run ⇒ Operation Mode
Same as Preset Speed 1 Operation Mode (see F561).
Direct Access Number — F569
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Forward Run
Changeable During Run — No
Preset Speed 10 Operation Mode
Program ⇒ Pattern Run ⇒ Operation Mode
Same as Preset Speed 1 Operation Mode (see F561).
Direct Access Number — F570
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Forward Run
Changeable During Run — No
Preset Speed 11 Operation Mode
Program ⇒ Pattern Run ⇒ Operation Mode
Same as Preset Speed 1 Operation Mode (see F561).
Direct Access Number — F571
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Forward Run
Changeable During Run — No
Preset Speed 12 Operation Mode
Program ⇒ Pattern Run ⇒ Operation Mode
Same as Preset Speed 1 Operation Mode (see F561).
Direct Access Number — F572
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Forward Run
Changeable During Run — No
Preset Speed 13 Operation Mode
Program ⇒ Pattern Run ⇒ Operation Mode
Same as Preset Speed 1 Operation Mode (see F561).
Direct Access Number — F573
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Forward Run
Changeable During Run — No
F564 F573
182 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Preset Speed 14 Operation Mode
Program ⇒ Pattern Run ⇒ Operation Mode
Same as Preset Speed 1 Operation Mode (see F561).
Direct Access Number — F574
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Forward Run
Changeable During Run — No
Preset Speed 15 Operation Mode
Program ⇒ Pattern Run ⇒ Operation Mode
Same as Preset Speed 1 Operation Mode (see F561).
Direct Access Number — F575
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Forward Run
Changeable During Run — No
Motor Overload Protection Level 1
Program ⇒ Fundamental ⇒ Motor Set #1
This parameter specifies the motor overload current level for motor set #1. This
value is entered as either a percentage of the full load rating of the ASD or as a
percentage of the FLA of the motor.
The unit of measurement for this parameter may be set to A/V (Amps) or it may
be set as a percentage of the ASD rating. The name-plated FLA of the motor
may be entered directly when Amps is selected as the unit of measurement (see
F701 to change the display unit).
Motor Overload Protection Level 1 settings will be displayed in Amps if the
EOI display units are set to A/V rather than %.
Direct Access Number — F600
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 100
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 10
Maximum — 100.0
Units — %
Stall Prevention Level
Program ⇒ Protection ⇒ Stall
This parameter specifies the output current level at which the output frequency
is reduced in an attempt to prevent a trip. The overcurrent level is entered as a
percentage of the maximum rating of the drive.
Note: The Motor Overload Protection parameter must enabled at
F017 to use this feature.
Direct Access Number — F601
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 10
Maximum — 165
Units — %
Retain Trip Record at Power Down
Program ⇒ Protection ⇒ Trip Settings
This parameter Enables/Disables the Trip Record Retention setting. When
enabled, this feature logs the trip event and retains the trip information when the
system powers down. The trip information may be viewed from the (Program
⇒ Utilities ⇒) Trip History screen or the Monitor screen.
When disabled, the trip information will be cleared when the system powers
down.
Settings:
0 — Disabled
1 — Enabled
Direct Access Number — F602
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — Yes
F574 F602
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 183
Emergency Off Mode Settings
Program ⇒ Protection ⇒ Emergency Off Settings
This parameter determines the method used to stop the motor in the event that
an Emergency Off command is received and the system is configured to use
this feature.
This setting may also be associated with the FL terminals to allow the FL relay
to change states when an EOFF condition occurs by setting the FL terminal to
Fault FL (all) (see F132).
Note: A supplemental emergency stopping system should be used with
the ASD. Emergency stopping should not be a task of the ASD
alone.
Settings:
0 — Coast Stop
1 — Deceleration Stop
2 — DC Injection Braking Stop
3 — Deceleration Stop (Decel #4 setting; F515)
Direct Access Number — F603
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Coast Stop
Changeable During Run — No
Emergency Off DC Injection Application Time
Program ⇒ Protection ⇒ Emergency Off Settings
When DC Injection is selected at F603 this parameter determines the time that
the DC Injection braking is applied to the motor.
Direct Access Number — F604
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 1.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 20.0
Units — Seconds
ASD Output Phase Failure Detection
Program ⇒ Protection ⇒ Phase Loss
This parameter Enables/Disables the monitoring of each phase of the 3-phase
output signal (U, V, or W) of the ASD. If either line is missing, inactive, or not
of the specified level for one second or more, the ASD incurs a trip.
Note: Autotune checks for phase failures regardless of this setting.
Settings:
0 — Disabled (no detection)
1 — Enabled (Run at Startup and Retry)
2 — Enabled (every Run command and Retry)
3 — Enabled (during Run)
4 — Enabled (at Startup and during Run)
5 — Enabled (detects an ALL-PHASE failure ONLY - will not trip, restarts
at reconnect)
Direct Access Number — F605
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — No
F603 F605
184 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Overload Reduction Starting Frequency
Program ⇒ Protection ⇒ Overload
This parameter is primarily used with V/f motors. It is used to reduce the
starting frequency at which the Overload Reduction function begins and is
useful during extremely low-speed motor operation.
During very low-speed operation the cooling efficiency of the motor decreases.
Lowering the start frequency of the Overload Reduction function aides in
minimizing the generated heat and precluding an Overload trip.
This function is useful in loads such as fans, pumps, and blowers that have the
square reduction torque characteristic.
Set parameter F607 to the desired Overload Time Limit.
Direct Access Number — F606
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 6.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 30.00
Units — Hz
Motor 150% Overload Time Limit
Program ⇒ Protection ⇒ Overload
This parameter establishes a time that the motor may operate at 150% of its
rated current before tripping. This setting applies the time/150% reference to
the individual settings of each motor (e.g., this setting references 150% of the
F600 setting for the #1 motor).
The unit will trip sooner than the time entered here if the overload is greater
than 150%.
Direct Access Number — F607
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 300
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 10
Maximum — 2400
Units — Seconds
ASD Input Phase Failure Detection
Program ⇒ Protection ⇒ Phase Loss
This parameter enables the 3-phase input power phase loss detection feature. A
loss of either input phase (R, S, or T) results in a trip.
Settings:
0 — Disabled
1 — Enabled
Direct Access Number — F608
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Enabled
Changeable During Run — No
Low Current Detection Current Hysteresis Width
Program ⇒ Protection ⇒ Low Current Settings
During a momentary low-current condition, this parameter provides a current
threshold level to which the low-current condition must return within the time
setting of F612 or a Low Current Trip will be incurred.
Direct Access Number — F609
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 10
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 1
Maximum — 20
Units — %
Low Current Trip
Program ⇒ Protection ⇒ Low Current Settings
This parameter Enables/Disables the low-current trip feature.
When enabled, the drive will trip on a low-current fault if the output current of
the drive falls below the level defined at F611 and remains there for the time set
at F612.
Settings:
0 — Disabled
1 — Enabled
Direct Access Number — F610
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — No
F606 F610
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 185
Low Current Detection Threshold
Program ⇒ Protection ⇒ Low Current Settings
With the Low-current Trip (F610) parameter is enabled, this function sets the
low-current trip threshold.
The threshold value is entered as a percentage of the maximum rating of the
drive.
Direct Access Number — F611
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 100
Units — %
Low Current Trip Threshold Time
Program ⇒ Protection ⇒ Low Current Settings
With the Low-current Trip (F610) parameter is enabled, this function sets the
time that the low-current condition must exist to cause a trip.
Direct Access Number — F612
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 255
Units — Seconds
Short Circuit Detection At Start
Program ⇒ Protection ⇒ Special Protection Parameters
This parameter determines when the system will perform an Output Short
Circuit test.
Note: Selection 3 is recommended for high-speed motor applications.
Because of the low impedance of high-speed motors the
standard-pulse setting may result in a motor malfunction.
Settings:
0 — Every Start (standard pulse)
1 — Power On or Reset (standard pulse)
2 — Every Start (short pulse)
3 — Power On or Reset (short pulse)
Direct Access Number — F613
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Every Start (standard
pulse)
Changeable During Run — No
Overtorque Trip
Program ⇒ Protection ⇒ Overtorque Parameters
This parameter Enables/Disables the Overtorque Tripping function.
When enabled, the ASD trips if an output torque value greater than the setting
of F616 or F617 exists for a time longer than the setting of F618.
When disabled, the ASD does not trip due to overtorque conditions.
Note: A discrete output terminal may be activated when an overtorque
alarm occurs if so configured (see F130).
Settings:
0 — Disabled
1 — Enabled
Direct Access Number — F615
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — No
F611 F615
186 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Overtorque Detection Level (Positive Torque)
Program ⇒ Protection ⇒ Overtorque Parameters
This parameter sets the torque threshold level that is used as a setpoint for
overtorque tripping during positive torque. This setting is a percentage of the
maximum rated torque of the drive.
This function is enabled at F615.
Direct Access Number — F616
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 150.00
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 250.00
Units — %
Overtorque Detection Level (Negative Torque)
Program ⇒ Protection ⇒ Overtorque Parameters
This parameter sets the torque threshold level that is used as a setpoint for
overtorque tripping during negative torque (regen). This setting is a percentage
of the maximum rated torque of the drive.
This function is enabled at F615.
Direct Access Number — F617
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 150.00
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 250.00
Units — %
Overtorque Detection Time
Program ⇒ Protection ⇒ Overtorque Parameters
This parameter sets the amount of time that the overtorque condition may
exceed the tripping threshold level set at F616 and F617 before a trip occurs.
This function is enabled at F615.
Direct Access Number — F618
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.50
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 10.0
Units — Seconds
Overtorque Detection Hysteresis
Program ⇒ Protection ⇒ Overtorque Parameters
During a momentary overtorque condition, this parameter provides a torque
threshold level to which the overtorque condition must return within the time
setting of F618 or an Overtorque Trip will be incurred.
Direct Access Number — F619
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 10.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 100.00
Units — %
Cooling Fan Control
Program ⇒ Protection ⇒ Special Protection Parameters
This parameter sets the cooling fan run-time command.
Settings:
0 — Automatic
1 — Always On
Direct Access Number — F620
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Automatic
Changeable During Run — Yes
Cumulative Operation Time Alarm
Program ⇒ Protection ⇒ Special Protection Parameters
This parameter sets a run-time value that, once exceeded, closes a discrete
output contact. The output signal may be used to control external equipment or
used to engage a brake.
Associate the Total-operation-hours Alarm setting of Table 8 on pg. 241 to a
discrete output contactor.
Note: The time displayed is 1/10th of the actual time (0.1 hr. = 1.0 hr.).
Direct Access Number — F621
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 610.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 999.9
Units — Hours (X 10)
F616 F621
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 187
Abnormal Speed Detection Time
Program ⇒ Protection ⇒ Abnormal Speed Settings
This parameter sets the time that an overspeed condition must exist to cause a
trip.
This parameter functions in conjunction with the settings of F623 and F624.
Direct Access Number — F622
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.01
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.01
Maximum — 100.00
Units — Seconds
Over-speed Detection Frequency Upper Band
Program ⇒ Protection ⇒ Abnormal Speed Settings
This parameter sets the upper level of the Base Frequency range that, once
exceeded, will cause an Overspeed Detected alert.
This parameter functions in conjunction with the settings of F622 and F624.
Direct Access Number — F623
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0 (Disabled)
Maximum — 30.00
Units — Hz
Over-speed Detection Frequency Lower Band
Program ⇒ Protection ⇒ Abnormal Speed Settings
This parameter sets the lower level of the Base Frequency range that, once the
output speed falls below this setting, will cause a Speed Drop Detected alert.
This parameter functions in conjunction with the settings of F622 and F623.
Direct Access Number — F624
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00 (Disabled)
Maximum — 30.00
Units — Hz
Overvoltage Limit Operation Level
Program ⇒ Protection ⇒ Stall
This parameter sets the upper DC bus voltage threshold that, once exceeded,
will cause an Overvoltage Stall. An Overvoltage Stall increases the output
frequency of the drive during deceleration for a specified time in an attempt to
prevent an Overvoltage Trip.
If the overvoltage condition persists for over 4 mS, an Overvoltage Trip will
be incurred.
This parameter is enabled at F305.
Note: This parameter setting may increase deceleration times.
Direct Access Number — F626
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 100
Maximum — 150
Units — %
Undervoltage Trip
Program ⇒ Protection ⇒ Undervoltage/Ridethrough
This parameter Enables/Disables the Undervoltage Trip function.
With this parameter Enabled, the ASD will trip if the undervoltage condition
persists for a time greater than the F628 setting.
A user-selected contact may be actuated if so configured.
If Disabled the ASD will stop and not trip; the FL contact is not activated.
Settings:
0 — Disabled
1 — Enabled
Direct Access Number — F627
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — No
F622 F627
188 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Undervoltage Trip Detection Time
Program ⇒ Protection ⇒ Undervoltage/Ridethrough
This parameter sets the time that the undervoltage condition must exist to cause
an Undervoltage trip.
This parameter is enabled at F627.
Direct Access Number — F628
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.03
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.01
Maximum — 10.00
Units — Seconds
Regenerative Power Ridethrough Control Level
Program ⇒ Protection ⇒ Undervoltage/Ridethrough
This parameter is activated during regeneration. It is used to set the low end of
the DC bus voltage threshold that, once the bus voltage drops below this
setting, activates the setting of F302 (Ridethrough Mode).
Activation may be the result of a momentary power loss or an excessive load on
the bus voltage.
During a Ridethrough, regenerative energy is used to maintain the control
circuitry settings for the duration of the Ridethrough; it is not used to drive the
motor.
The motor(s) of the system are stopped and then restarted automatically or may
continue seamlessly if so configured.
See F302 for more information on this parameter.
Note: This parameter setting may increase deceleration times.
Direct Access Number — F629
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 55
Maximum — 100
Units — %
Brake Answer Wait Time
Program ⇒ Protection ⇒ Special Protection Parameters
This parameter is used in conjunction with the discrete input terminal setting
Brake Answerback Input (see Table 5 on pg. 236 for more information on this
feature).
After activating the discrete input terminal Braking Request, the setting of this
parameter starts a count-down timer in which 1) a Brake Answerback Input
response must be received or 2) the brake must release before the timer expires.
Should this timer setting expire before the Brake Answerback Input is
returned or the brake releases, a Brake Fault (E-11) is incurred. Otherwise, the
brake releases and normal motor operations resume.
Direct Access Number — F630
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0 (Disabled)
Maximum — 10.0
Units — Seconds
F628 F630
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 189
ASD Overload
Program ⇒ Protection ⇒ Overload
This parameter is used to protect the ASD from an overcurrent condition. The
standard overload rating of the H9 ASD is 150% operation for 60 seconds.
This setting allows for the overload protection to be switched from the standard
overload detection means (Thermal Detection and Overload) to thermal
detection only.
Settings:
0 — Thermal Detection + Overload
1 — Thermal Detection Only
The Thermal Detection Only selection is used when multiple devices are
installed horizontally as described on pg. 15. If the installation provides for no
space in between the adjacent devices the ASDs must be derated as described in
Figure 31 on pg. 190.
Direct Access Number — F631
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Thermal Detection +
Overload
Changeable During Run — No
F631 F631
190 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Figure 31. 230 and 460-Volt Carrier Frequency/Thermal Derating Specifications.
230V — 0.5 – 20 HP
460V — 1.0 – 25 HP
460V — 30 and 40 HP
230V — 25 – 60 HP
460V — 50 – 100 HP
230V — 75 HP and above
460V — 120 – 150 HP
460V — 175 HP and
above
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 191
V/I Analog Input Broken Wire Detection Level
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Input Special Functions
This parameter is enabled by providing a non-zero value here. This function
monitors the V/I input signal and if the V/I input signal falls below the level
specified here and remains there for a period of 0.3 seconds or more a trip will
be incurred (E-18).
This value is entered as 0% to 100% of the V/I input signal range.
Direct Access Number — F633
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 1
Maximum — 100
Units — %
Annual Average Ambient Temperature
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ Special Parameters
This parameter is used in conjunction with a discrete output terminal setting to
notify the operator of the remaining useful life of critical components of the
ASD system.
With a discrete output terminal set to Part Replacement Alarm (see Table 8 on
pg. 241) and the calculation derived from the parameter setting, maintenance
scheduling may be enhanced.
Settings:
1 — Under 10° C (50° F)
2 — Under 20° C (68° F)
3 — Under 30° C (86° F)
4 — Under 40° C (104° F)
5 — Under 50° C (122° F)
6 — Under 60° C (140° F)
Direct Access Number — F634
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Under 30°
Changeable During Run — No
Rush Relay Current Activation Time
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ Special Parameters⇒ Rush Relay Current
Activation Time
At system startup, this parameter sets a time-delay for the start of the Rush
Relay activation in an attempt to allow the DC bus voltage to reach the normal
operating level before outputting a signal to the motor.
Direct Access Number — F635
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 2.5
Units — Seconds
PTC1 Thermal Selection
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ Special Parameters⇒ PTC1 Thermal Selection
This parameter Enables/Disables the optional external thermal detection circuit
of the Expansion IO Card Option 1. A thermistor is connected from TH1+ to
TH1- of TB3 on the Expansion IO Card Option 1.
Should the thermistor resistance reading fall below 50Ω because of an over-
temperature condition or exceed 3000Ω because of an open circuit an External
Thermal Fault (OH2) will be incurred.
Note: While this parameter is Enabled, the system cannot be restarted
until the thermistor value recovers to the level of 1.8kΩ from an
over-temperature condition. An Auto-restart will not be initiated
subsequent to an External Thermal Trip (OH2). A manual
restart will be required in the event of an OH2 trip.
Settings:
0 — Disabled
1 — Detect Disconnect
Direct Access Number — F637
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — No
F633 F637
192 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
PTC2 Thermal Selection
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ Special Parameters⇒ PTC2 Thermal Selection
This parameter Enables/Disables the optional external thermal detection circuit
of the Expansion IO Card Option 2. A thermistor is connected from TH1+ to
TH1- of TB4 on the Expansion IO Card Option 2.
Should the thermistor resistance reading fall below 50Ω because of an over-
temperature condition or exceed 3000Ω because of an open circuit an External
Thermal Fault (OH2) will be incurred.
Note: While this parameter is Enabled, the system cannot be restarted
until the thermistor value recovers to the level of 1.8kΩ from an
over-temperature condition. An Auto-restart will not be initiated
subsequent to an External Thermal Trip (OH2). A manual
restart will be required in the event of an OH2 trip.
Settings:
0 — Disabled
1 — Detect Disconnect
Direct Access Number — F638
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — No
Braking Resistance Overload Time (10x rated torque)
Program ⇒ Protection ⇒ Dynamic Braking
This parameter sets the time that the braking resistor is allowed to sustain and
overload condition before a trip is incurred.
This feature is useful for applications that have a fluctuating load or for loads
that require a long deceleration time.
Direct Access Number — F639
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 5.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 600.0
Units — Seconds
Step-Out Current Detection Level
Program ⇒ Motor ⇒ PM Motor
This parameter is used with synchronous motor applications only.
Contact Toshiba Customer Service Department for information on this
parameter.
Direct Access Number — F640
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 100
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 10
Maximum — 150
Units — %
Step-Out Current Detection Time
Program ⇒ Motor ⇒ PM Motor
This parameter is used with synchronous motor applications only.
Contact Toshiba Customer Service Department for information on this
parameter.
Direct Access Number — F641
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 25.0
Units — Seconds
F638 F641
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 193
Adding Input Selection
Program ⇒ Feedback ⇒ Override Control
This parameter Enables/Disables the feature that allows for the external
adjustment of the Output Frequency.
Selecting either of the input methods listed enables this feature. The selected
input is used as a modifier of the programmed Output Frequency.
Settings:
0 — Disabled
1 — V/I
2 — RR
3 — RX
4 — Panel Keypad
5 — RS485 (2-wire)
6 — RS485 (4-wire)
7 — Communication Option Board
8 — RX2 Option (AI1)
9 — Option V/I
10 — UP/DOWN Frequency (terminal board)
11 — Pulse Input (option)
12 — Pulse Input (Motor CPU)
13 — Binary/BCD Input (option)
Direct Access Number — F660
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — Yes
Multiplying Input Selection
Program ⇒ Feedback ⇒ Override Control
This parameter Enables/Disables the feature that allows for the external
adjustment of the Output Frequency.
Selecting either of the input methods listed enables this feature. The selected
input is used as a multiplier of the programmed Output Frequency.
If operating using the LED Keypad Option and Setting is selected, the value
entered at F729 is used as the multiplier.
Settings:
0 — Disabled
1 — V/I
2 — RR
3 — RX
4 — F729 (setting)
5 — RX2 Option (AI1)
Direct Access Number — F661
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — No
F660 F661
194 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Selection of OUT Terminal
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Analog Output Terminals
This parameter is used to enable the OUT1 and OUT2 output terminals, or the
FP output terminal by selecting Logic Output or Pulse Train Output,
respectively.
Note: The Logic output and the Pulse Train output may not be used
simultaneously.
If Logic Output is selected the OUT1 and OUT2 (O1A/O1B and O2A/O2B)
output contacts of the Terminal Board are enabled to function as described in
parameter F130.
The OUT1 and OUT2 terminals may be used simultaneously and they may be
assigned different functions.
If Pulse Train Output is selected the FP output terminal of the Terminal Board
is enabled to function as configured in F676 and F677.
Settings:
0 — Logic Output
1 — Pulse Train Output
Direct Access Number — F669
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Pulse Train Output
Changeable During Run — No
AM Output Terminal Function
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Analog Output Terminals
This parameter is used to set the output function of the AM analog output
terminal. The AM analog output terminal produces an output current that is
proportional to the magnitude of the function assigned to this terminal. The
available assignments for this output terminal are listed in Table 6 on pg. 239.
Note: To read current at this terminal connect a 100 – 500
Ω
resistor from
the AM (+) terminal through the series Ammeter to the CC (-)
terminal.
The FM analog output has a maximum resolution of 1/1024 and a
maximum load rating of 500 ohms.
AM Terminal Setup Parameters
F670 — Set AM Function
F671 — Calibrate AM Terminal
F685 — Output Response Polarity Selection
F686 — Set Zero Level
Direct Access Number — F670
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Output Current
Changeable During Run — Yes
AM Output Terminal Adjustment
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Analog Output Terminals
This parameter is used to calibrate the AM analog output.
To calibrate the AM analog output, connect an ammeter as described at
parameter F670.
With the drive running at a known value (e.g., output frequency), adjust this
parameter until the assigned function (parameter F670) produces the desired
DC level output at the AM output terminal.
See F670 for more information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F671
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 512
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 1
Maximum — 1280
AM
F669 F671
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 195
MON1 Terminal Meter Selection
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Analog Output Terminals
This parameter is used to set the output function of the MON1 analog output
terminal. The available assignments for this output terminal are listed in Table 6
on pg. 239.
The MON1 analog output terminal produces an output voltage or current that is
proportional to the magnitude of the function assigned to this terminal.
Note: The Expansion IO Card Option 2 option board (P/N ETB004Z)
is required to use this terminal.
See the Expansion IO Card Option 2 instruction manual (P/N 58686) for
more information on the function of this terminal.
MON1 Terminal Setup Parameters
F672 — MON1 Output Function
F673 — MON1 Terminal Meter Adjustment
F688 — MON1 Voltage/Current Output Switching
F689 — MON1 Output Gradient Characteristic
F690 — MON1 Bias Adjustment Set Zero Level
Direct Access Number — F672
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Output Voltage
Changeable During Run — Yes
MON1 Terminal Adjustment
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Analog Output Terminals
This parameter is used to set the gain of the MON1 output terminal and is used
in conjunction with the settings of parameter F672.
See parameter F672 for more information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F673
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 512
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 1
Maximum — 1280
MON2 Terminal Meter Selection
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Analog Output Terminals
This parameter is used to set the output function of the MON2 analog output
terminal. The available assignments for this output terminal are listed in Table 6
on pg. 239.
The MON2 analog output terminal produces an output voltage or current that is
proportional to the magnitude of the function assigned to this terminal.
Note: The Expansion IO Card Option 2 option board (P/N ETB004Z)
is required to use this terminal.
See the Expansion IO Card Option 2 instruction manual (P/N 58686) for
more information on the function of this terminal.
MON2 Terminal Setup Parameters
F674 — MON2 Output Function
F675 — MON2 Terminal Meter Adjustment
F691 — MON2 Voltage/Current Output Switching
F692 — MON2 Output Gradient Characteristic
F693 — MON2 Bias Adjustment Set Zero Level
Direct Access Number — F674
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Output Frequency
Changeable During Run — Yes
F672 F674
196 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
MON2 Terminal Adjustment
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Analog Output Terminals
This parameter is used to set the gain of the MON2 output terminal and is used
in conjunction with the settings of parameter F674.
See parameter F674 for more information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F675
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 512
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 1
Maximum — 1280
FP Terminal Assignment
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Analog Output Terminals
This parameter sets the functionality of the FP output terminal to any one of the
user-selectable functions listed in Table 6 on pg. 239 and is enabled at
parameter F669.
As the assigned function changes in magnitude or frequency, the pulse count of
the FP output terminal pulse train changes in direct proportion to changes in the
assigned function.
Note: The duty cycle of the output pulse train remains at 65 ±5.0 µS.
This parameter is used in conjunction with parameter F669 and F677.
Direct Access Number — F676
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Output Frequency
Changeable During Run — Yes
Pulse Output Frequency
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Analog Output Terminals
This parameter scales the FP output terminal by setting the pulses-per-second
output signal of the FP terminal.
See F676 for more information on this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F677
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 3.84
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 1.00
Maximum — 43.20
Units — Pulses/Second
FM Voltage/Current Output Switching
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Analog Output Terminals
This parameter is used to select the type of output signal provided at the FM
terminal (i.e., voltage or current).
The output voltage and current range is 0 – 10 VDC and 0 – 20 mA,
respectively.
See F005 for more information on this setting.
Settings:
0 — 0 – 10V
1 — 0 – 20 mA
Direct Access Number — F681
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0–10V
Changeable During Run — No
FM Output Gradient Characteristic
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Analog Output Terminals
This parameter sets the output response polarity of the FM output terminal. The
FM output terminal response may be set to respond inversely (-) or directly (+)
to the input signal.
See F005 for more information on this setting.
Settings:
0 — Minus (Negative Gradient)
1 — Plus (Positive Gradient)
Direct Access Number — F682
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Plus
Changeable During Run — Yes
FP
F675 F682
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 197
FM Bias Adjustment
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Analog Output Terminals
This parameter setting is used to ensure that a zero-level input signal produces a
zero-level output at the FM terminal.
Set the function of F005 to zero and then set this parameter to zero for proper
operation.
See F005 for more information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F683
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — -10.0
Maximum — +100.0
Units — %
AM Output Gradient Characteristic
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Analog Output Terminals
This parameter sets the output response polarity of the AM output terminal.
The AM output terminal response may be set to respond inversely (-) or
directly (+) to the input signal.
See F670 for more information on this setting.
Settings:
0 — Minus (Negative Gradient)
1 — Plus (Positive Gradient)
Direct Access Number — F685
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Plus
Changeable During Run — Yes
AM Bias Adjustment
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Analog Output Terminals
This parameter setting is used to ensure that a zero-level input signal produces a
zero-level output at the AM terminal.
Set the function set at F670 to zero and then set this parameter to zero for
proper operation.
See F670 for more information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F686
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — -10.0
Maximum — +100.0
Units — %
MON 1 Voltage/Current Output Switching
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Analog Output Terminals
This parameter is used to set the output signal type of the MON1 output
terminal.
Settings
0 — -10V – +10V
1 — 0 – 10V
2 — 0 – 20 mA
Direct Access Number — F688
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 – 10V
Changeable During Run — Yes
MON 1 Output Gradient Characteristic
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Analog Output Terminals
This parameter sets the output response polarity of the MON1 output terminal.
The MON1 output terminal response may be set to respond inversely (-) or
directly (+) to the input signal.
See parameter F672 for more information on this setting.
Settings:
0 — Minus (Negative Gradient)
1 — Plus (Positive Gradient)
Direct Access Number — F689
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Plus
Changeable During Run — Yes
F683 F689
198 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
MON 1 Bias Adjustment
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Analog Output Terminals
This parameter setting is used to ensure that a zero-level input signal produces a
zero-level output at the MON1 terminal.
Set the assigned function of parameter F672 to zero and then set this parameter
to a zero output.
See parameter F672 for more information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F690
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — -10.0
Maximum — 100.0
Units — %
MON 2 Voltage/Current Output Switching
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Analog Output Terminals
This parameter is used to set the output signal type of the MON2 output
terminal.
See parameter F674 for more information on this setting.
Settings
0 — -10V – +10V
1 — 0 – 10V
2 — 0 – 20 mA
Direct Access Number — F691
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 – 10V
Changeable During Run — Yes
MON 2 Output Gradient Characteristic
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Analog Output Terminals
This parameter sets the output response polarity of the MON2 output terminal.
The MON2 output terminal response may be set to respond inversely (-) or
directly (+) to the input signal.
See parameter F672 for more information on this setting.
Settings:
0 — Minus (Negative Gradient)
1 — Plus (Positive Gradient)
Direct Access Number — F692
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Plus
Changeable During Run — Yes
MON 2 Bias Adjustment
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Analog Output Terminals
This parameter setting is used to ensure that a zero-level input signal produces a
zero-level output at the MON2 terminal.
Set the assigned function of parameter F674 to zero and then set this parameter
to a zero output.
See parameter F674 for more information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F693
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — -10.0
Maximum — 100.0
Units — %
Parameter Write Lockout
Program ⇒ Utilities ⇒ Prohibition
This parameter Enables/Disables the Run and Stop keys.
Settings:
0 — Enabled
1 — Disabled
Direct Access Number — F700
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Enabled
Changeable During Run — Yes
F690 F700
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 199
Display Units for Voltage and Current
Program ⇒ Utilities ⇒ Display Parameters
This parameter sets the unit of measurement for current and voltage values
displayed on the EOI.
Settings:
0 — %
1 — A/V
Direct Access Number — F701
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — %
Changeable During Run — Yes
Display Unit Multiplication Factor
Program ⇒ Utilities ⇒ Display Parameters
This parameter provides a multiplier for the displayed speed value shown on the
front panel display of the ASD.
This parameter may be used to display the rate that a commodity is being
processed by the driven load in process units (i.e., units/time).
Example: An output frequency of 100 Hz would be displayed as 50 Hz if
using a multiplier of 0.5 for this parameter.
Note: PID frequency-limiting parameters are not affected by this
setting (i.e., F364, F365, F367, and F368).
Direct Access Number — F702
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00 (OFF)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 200.00
Display Unit Selection
Program ⇒ Utilities ⇒ Display Parameters
This parameter is used in conjunction with F702 to set the method in which the
frequency is displayed on the front panel.
The multiplier setting of F702 will be applied to the display of all frequencies if
All Frequencies are selected at this parameter.
The multiplier setting of F702 will be applied to parameters F364, F365, F367,
and F368 ONLY if PID Process Data is selected at this parameter.
Settings:
0 — All Frequencies
1 — PID Process Data
Direct Access Number — F703
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — All Frequencies
Changeable During Run — Yes
Display Gradient Characteristic
Program ⇒ Utilities ⇒ Display Parameters
The ASD-displayed response to output speed changes will be displayed as
directly proportional or inversely proportional as a function of this parameter
setting.
Selecting Negative Gradient displays an increased output speed as going more
negative.
Selecting Positive Gradient displays an increased output speed as going more
positive.
Settings:
0 — Minus (Negative Gradient)
1 — Plus (Positive Gradient)
Direct Access Number — F705
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Plus
Changeable During Run — Yes
F701 F705
200 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Display Bias
Program ⇒ Utilities ⇒ Display Parameters
In conjunction with the setting of F702, this parameter sets the bias of the front
panel speed display.
The frequency entered here will be multiplied by the setting of F702 and then
displayed as the zero value on the front panel display.
Direct Access Number — F706
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (F011)
Units — Hz
Change Step Selection 1
Program ⇒ Utilities ⇒ Display Parameters
In conjunction with the parameter setting of F708, this parameter sets the
amount that the output speed will increase or decrease for each speed command
change entered from the front panel using the Rotary Encoder.
Direct Access Number — F707
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (F011)
Units — Hz
Change Step Selection 2
Program ⇒ Utilities ⇒ Display Parameters
The parameter is used to modify the degree that the setting of F707 affects the
output speed changes that are input from the front panel using the Rotary
Encoder.
Selecting a zero value here disables this parameter and the resulting non-zero
value of parameter setting F707 is output from the ASD.
Selecting a non-zero value here provides a dividend that will be used in the
following equation resulting in the actual output frequency applied to the motor.
Direct Access Number — F708
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 255
Operation Command Clear Selection When ST Off
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ Operation Panel Parameters
Upon deactivation of the ST terminal while operating in the Local mode, the
motor will halt — this parameter setting is used to allow for the reactivation of
the motor without user intervention upon the reactivation of the ST terminal.
Upon reactivation of the ST terminal in this condition the ASD will resume the
Run condition and the motor will start (1 — Retain Run Command).
This feature may be Disabled and the Run command must be re-initiated by the
user for ASD operation (0 — Clear Panel Run Command).
WHEN ENABLED THE ASD WILL RESUME THE RUN CONDITION
WHEN THE ST TERMINAL IS REACTIVATED.
Settings:
0 — Clear Panel Run Command
1 — Retain Panel Run Command
Direct Access Number — F719
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Retain Panel Run
Command
Changeable During Run — Yes
OutputFrequencyDisplayed InternallyCommandedFrequency F708
F707
-------------
×=
DANGER
F706 F706
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 201
Panel Stop Pattern
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ Operation Panel Parameters
While operating in the Local mode this parameter determines the method used
to stop the motor when the stop command is issued via the EOI.
The Decel Stop setting enables the Dynamic Braking system that is setup at
F304 or the DC Injection Braking system that is setup at F250, F251, and
F252.
The Coast Stop setting allows the motor to stop at the rate allowed by the
inertia of the load.
Settings:
0 — Deceleration Stop
1 — Coast Stop
Note: The Stop Pattern setting has no effect on the Emergency Off
settings of F603. This parameter may also be accessed by
pressing the ESC key from the Frequency Command screen.
Direct Access Number — F721
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Deceleration Stop
Changeable During Run — Yes
Panel Torque Command
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ Operation Panel Parameters
While operating using the LED Keypad Option this parameter sets the torque
command.
Direct Access Number — F725
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — -250.00
Maximum — +250.00
Panel Tension Torque Bias
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ Operation Panel Parameters
While operating using the LED Keypad Option this parameter sets the Torque
Bias.
Direct Access Number — F727
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — -250.00
Maximum — +250.00
Units — %
Panel Load Sharing Gain
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ Operation Panel Parameters
While operating using the LED Keypad Option this parameter is used to set
the Load Sharing Gain.
Direct Access Number — F728
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 100.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 250.00
Units — %
Panel Override Multiplication Gain
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ Operation Panel Parameters
While operating using the LED Keypad Option this parameter provides a
value to be used in the event that F729 (setting) is selected for the Frequency
Override Multiplying Input (F661).
Direct Access Number — F729
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — -100.00
Maximum — 100.00
Units — %
F721 F729
202 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Panel Frequency Lockout
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ Operation Panel Parameters
While operating using the LED Keypad Option this parameter Enables/
Disables the ability to change the frequency command value.
Settings:
0 — Unlocked
1 — Locked
Direct Access Number — F730
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Unlocked
Changeable During Run — Yes
Panel Emergency Off Lockout
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ Operation Panel Parameters
While operating using the LED Keypad Option this parameter Enables/
Disables the ability to provide an Emergency Off command.
Settings:
0 — Unlocked
1 — Locked
Direct Access Number — F734
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Unlocked
Changeable During Run — No
Panel Reset Lockout
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ Operation Panel Parameters
While operating using the LED Keypad Option this parameter Enables/
Disables the ability to initiate a Reset.
Settings:
0 — Unlocked
1 — Locked
Direct Access Number — F735
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Unlocked
Changeable During Run — Yes
Command Mode/Frequency Mode Change Lockout
Program ⇒ Utilities ⇒ Prohibition
This parameter Enables/Disables the ability to change the CMOD/FMOD
settings.
Note: Command Mode is abbreviated as CMOD.
Note: Frequency Mode is abbreviated as FMOD.
Settings:
0 — Unlocked
1 — Locked
Direct Access Number — F736
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Locked
Changeable During Run — Yes
Lockout All Keys
Program ⇒ Utilities ⇒ Prohibition
This parameter Enables/Disables EOI keypad operation.
Settings:
0 — Unlocked
1 — Locked
Direct Access Number — F737
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Unlocked
Changeable During Run — Yes
F730 F737
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 203
Trace Selection
Program ⇒ Utilities ⇒ Trace
In conjunction with parameter F741 – F745, this parameter is used to monitor
and store 4 ASD output waveform data points. The data may be read and stored
as a function of a trip (At Trip) or it may be initiated by the activation of a
discrete terminal activation (At Trigger). Set a discrete input terminal to Trace
Back Trigger Signal and activate the terminal to initiate the At Trigger read/
store function.
Table 9 on pg. 242 lists the items that may be selected for the data read/store
function along with the associated communication number for each selection.
The duration of the read/store cycle for the selected items is set at parameter
F741.
To acquire and store the data a communications device and a PC are required.
The H9 ASD supports the following communications protocols: RS485
(MODBUS-RTU) Toshiba Protocol, USB Toshiba Protocol, CC-Link, ProfiBus,
and DeviceNet (Refer to the manual of each protocol type for more
information).
Trace data may be viewed graphically via Program ⇒ Utilities ⇒ View Trace
Data.
Settings:
0 — None (disabled)
1 — At Trip
2 — At Trigger
Direct Access Number — F740
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — At Trip
Changeable During Run — Yes
Trace Cycle
Program ⇒ Utilities ⇒ Trace
This parameter sets the record time for the Trace Data events selected at F742
– F745.
See F740 for more information on this parameter setting.
Settings:
0 — 4 mS
1 — 20 mS
2 — 100 mS
3 — 1 Second
4 — 10 Seconds
Direct Access Number — F741
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 100 mS
Changeable During Run — Yes
Trace Data 1
Program ⇒ Utilities ⇒ Trace
This parameter is used to select the Trace Data 1 item from Table 9 on pg. 242
to be read and stored in accordance with the setup of parameters F740 and
F741.
See F740 for more information on this parameter setting.
Direct Access Number — F742
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Output Frequency
Changeable During Run — Yes
F740 F742
204 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Trace Data 2
Program ⇒ Utilities ⇒ Trace
This parameter is used to select the Trace Data 2 item from Table 9 on pg. 242
to be read and stored in accordance with the setup of parameters F740 and
F741.
See F740 for more information on this parameter setting.
Direct Access Number — F743
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Freq. Reference
Changeable During Run — Yes
Trace Data 3
Program ⇒ Utilities ⇒ Trace
This parameter is used to select the Trace Data 3 item from Table 9 on pg. 242
to be read and stored in accordance with the setup of parameters F740 and
F741.
See F740 for more information on this parameter setting.
Direct Access Number — F744
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Output Current
Changeable During Run — Yes
Trace Data 4
Program ⇒ Utilities ⇒ Trace
This parameter is used to select the Trace Data 4 item from Table 9 on pg. 242
to be read and stored in accordance with the setup of parameters F740 and
F741.
See F740 for more information on this parameter setting.
Direct Access Number — F745
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — DC Voltage
Changeable During Run — Yes
Baud Rate (RS485 2-wire)
Program ⇒ Communications ⇒ Communication Settings
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the communications network by
establishing the Baud Rate of the communications link.
The communications network includes other ASDs and Host/Control computers
that monitor the status of the ASD(s), transfers commands, and loads or
modifies the parameter settings of the ASD.
Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled (Off then On)
for the changes to take effect.
Settings:
0 — 9600
1 — 19200
2 — 38400
Direct Access Number — F800
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 19200
Changeable During Run — Yes
Units — bps
Parity (RS485 2- and 4-wire)
Program ⇒ Communications ⇒ Communication Settings
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the communications network by
establishing the Parity setting of the communications link.
The communications network includes other ASDs and Host/Control computers
that monitor the status of the ASD(s), transfers commands, and loads or
modifies the parameter settings of the ASD.
Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled (Off then On)
for the changes to take effect.
Settings:
0 — No Parity
1 — Even Parity
2 — Odd Parity
Direct Access Number — F801
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Even Parity
Changeable During Run — Yes
F743 F801
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 205
ASD Number
Program ⇒ Communications ⇒ Communication Settings
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the communications network by
assigning an identification (ID) number to each ASD in the communications
network.
The communications network includes other ASDs and Host/Control computers
that monitor the status of the ASD(s), transfers commands, and loads or
modifies the parameter settings of the ASD.
Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled (Off then On)
for the changes to take effect.
Direct Access Number — F802
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 247
Communications Time Out Time (RS485 2- and 4-wire)
Program ⇒ Communications ⇒ Communication Settings
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the communications network by
setting the time that no activity may exist over the communications link before
the link is severed (Time Out).
The communications network includes other ASDs and Host/Control computers
that monitor the status of the ASD(s), transfers commands, and loads or
modifies the parameter settings of the ASD.
Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled (Off then On)
for the changes to take effect.
Direct Access Number — F803
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0 (Off)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0 (Off)
Maximum — 100
Units — Seconds
Communications Time-Out Action (RS485 2- and 4-wire)
Program ⇒ Communications ⇒ Communication Settings
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the communications network by
determining the action to be taken in the event of a time-out (Time-Out
Action).
The communications network includes other ASDs and Host/Control computers
that monitor the status of the ASD(s), transfers commands, and loads or
modifies the parameter settings of the drive.
Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled (Off then On)
for the changes to take effect.
Settings:
(settings are for 2-wire/4-wire)
0 — No Action/No Action
1 — Alarm/No Action
2 — Trip/No Action
3 — No Action/Alarm
4 — Alarm/Alarm
5 — Trip/Alarm
6 — No Action/Trip
7 — Alarm/Trip
8 — Trip/Trip
Direct Access Number — F804
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Trip/Trip
Changeable During Run — Yes
F802 F804
206 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Send Wait Time (RS485 2-wire)
Program ⇒ Communications ⇒ Communication Settings
This parameter sets the RS485 (2-wire) response delay time.
Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled (Off then On)
for the changes to take effect.
Direct Access Number — F805
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 2.00
Units — Seconds
ASD-to-ASD Communications (RS485 2-wire)
Program ⇒ Communications ⇒ Communication Settings
The function of this parameter is 2-fold:
1) In a Master/Follower configuration and while communicating via RS485
2-wire, this parameter sets the ASD as the Master or the Follower.
2) This parameter determines the function of the ASD while operating as the
Master or the Follower. If operating as the Master ASD, an output parameter of
the Master ASD is used to control the Follower ASDs and is set here. If
operating as a Follower ASD, the ASD response if an error is incurred is set
here.
Note: Select a Follower function here if F826 is configured as a
Master Output controller for any other ASD in the system.
Otherwise, an EOI failure will result.
Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled (Off then On)
for the changes to take effect.
Settings:
0 — Follower (Decel Stop if error detected)
1 — Follower (continues operation if error detected)
2 — Follower (Emergency Off if error detected)
3 — Master (frequency command)
4 — Master (output frequency)
5 — Master (torque reference)
6 — Master (torque command)
Direct Access Number — F806
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Follower (Decel Stop)
Changeable During Run — Yes
RS485 2-Wire Protocol Selection
Program ⇒ Communications ⇒ Communication Reference Adjust
This parameter sets the RS485 (2-wire) communications protocol.
Settings:
0 — Toshiba
1 — Modbus
Direct Access Number — F807
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Toshiba
Changeable During Run — Yes
F805 F807
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 207
Frequency Point Selection
Program ⇒ Communications ⇒ Communication Reference Adjust
This parameter is used to set the communications reference for scaling.
See F811 — F814 for more information on this setting.
Note: Scaling the communications signal is not required for all
applications.
Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled (Off then On)
for the changes to take effect.
Settings:
0 — Disabled
1 — RS485 (2-wire)
2 — RS485 (4-wire)
3 — Communication Card
Direct Access Number — F810
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — Yes
Point 1 Setting
Program ⇒ Communications ⇒ Communication Reference Adjust
When enabled at F810, this parameter is used to allow the user to set the gain
and bias of the speed control input to the drive when the speed control signal is
received via the source selected at F810.
Gain and Bias Settings
When operating in the Speed Control mode and using one of the control
sources from Settings above, the settings that determine the gain and bias
properties of the input signal are:
•Communications Reference Speed Setpoint #1 (frequency) (F812),
• the communications input signal value that represents Communications
Reference Speed Setpoint #1 (frequency): F811,
•Communications Reference Speed Setpoint #2 (frequency) (F814), and
• the communications input signal value that represents Communications
Reference Speed Setpoint #2 (frequency): F813.
Once set, as the input signal value changes, the output frequency of the drive
will vary in accordance with the above settings.
This parameter sets the Communications Reference input value that represents
Communications Reference Speed Setpoint #1 (frequency). This value is
entered as 0 to 100% of the Communications Reference input value range.
Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled (Off then On)
for the changes to take effect.
Direct Access Number — F811
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 100
Units — %
Point 1 Frequency
Program ⇒ Communications ⇒ Communication Reference Adjust
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the Communications
Reference speed control input.
See F811 for more information on this setting.
This parameter sets Communications Reference Speed Setpoint #1.
Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled (Off then On)
for the changes to take effect.
Direct Access Number — F812
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (F011)
Units — Hz
F810 F812
208 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Point 2 Setting
Program ⇒ Communications ⇒ Communication Reference Adjust
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the Communications
Reference speed control input.
See F811 for more information on this setting.
This parameter sets the Communications Reference input value that represents
Communications Reference Speed Setpoint #2 (frequency). This value is
entered as 0 to 100% of the Communications Reference input value range.
Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled (Off then On)
for the changes to take effect.
Direct Access Number — F813
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 100
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 100
Units — %
Point 2 Frequency
Program ⇒ Communications ⇒ Communication Reference Adjust
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the Communications
Reference speed control input.
See F811 for more information on this setting.
This parameter sets the Communications Reference Speed Setpoint #2.
Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled (Off then On)
for the changes to take effect.
Direct Access Number — F814
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 60.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (F011)
Units — Hz
Baud Rate (RS485 4-wire)
Program ⇒ Communications ⇒ Communication Settings
This parameter sets the RSRS485 baud rate.
Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled (Off then On)
for the changes to take effect.
Settings:
0 — 9600 bps
1 — 19200 bps
2 — 38400 bps
Direct Access Number — F820
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 19200
Changeable During Run — Yes
RS485 Send Wait Time (RS485 4-wire)
Program ⇒ Communications ⇒ Communication Settings
This parameter sets the RS485 response delay time.
Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled (Off then On)
for the changes to take effect.
Direct Access Number — F825
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 2.00
Units — Seconds
F813 F825
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 209
ASD-to-ASD Communications (RS485 4-wire)
Program ⇒ Communications ⇒ Communication Settings
The function of this parameter is 2-fold:
1) In a Master/Follower configuration and while communicating via RS485
4-wire, this parameter sets the ASD as the Master or the Follower.
2) This parameter determines the function of the ASD while operating as the
Master or the Follower. If operating as the Master ASD, an output parameter of
the Master ASD is used to control the Follower ASDs and is set here. If
operating as a Follower ASD, the ASD response if an error is incurred is set
here.
Note: Select a Follower function here if F806 is configured as a
Master Output controller for any other ASD in the system.
Otherwise, an EOI failure will result.
Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled (Off then On)
for the changes to take effect.
Settings:
0 — Follower (Decel Stop if error detected)
1 — Follower (Continues operation if error detected)
2 — Follower (Emergency Off if error detected)
3 — Master (Frequency Command)
4 — Master (Output Frequency)
5 — Master (Torque Reference)
6 — Master (Output Torque)
Direct Access Number — F826
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Follower (Decel Stop)
Changeable During Run — Yes
RS485 4-Wire Protocol Selection (TSB/ModBus)
Program ⇒ Communications ⇒ Communication Settings
This parameter sets the communications protocol for ASD-to-ASD
communications.
Settings:
0 — Toshiba
1 — Modbus
Direct Access Number — F829
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Toshiba
Changeable During Run — Yes
Communications Option (DeviceNet/Profibus) Setting 1
Program ⇒ Communications ⇒ Communication Settings
While using the DeviceNet/Profibus communications protocol, this parameter
allows the user to select the read and write information communicated between
the ASD and the Host.
Read information may include the ASD fault status, ASD speed, ASD MAC
ID, etc. Write information may include Enable/Disable DeviceNet commands,
Forward run, ACC/DEC command, etc.
See the DeviceNet Option Instruction Manual (P/N 58683) for more
information on this parameter.
Settings:
0 – 7
Direct Access Number — F830
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0
Changeable During Run — Yes
F826 F830
210 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Communications Option (DeviceNet/Profibus) Setting 2
Program ⇒ Communications ⇒ Communication Settings
While using the DeviceNet/Profibus communications protocol, parameters
F831 – F836 allow the user to select the ASD memory location that holds the
Command/Frequency/Monitoring instructions to be applied to the ASD for
Communications Option Settings 2 – 7, respectively.
See the DeviceNet Option Instruction Manual (P/N 58683) for more
information on this parameter.
Settings:
0 — Disabled
1 — FA06 (ALCAN Command 1)
2 — FA23 (ALCAN Command 2)
3 — FA07 (ALCAN Frequency Command, 0.01 Hz)
4 — FA33 (Torque Command, 0.01%)
5 — FA50 (Terminal Output)
6 — FA51 (Analog Output Data from Comm. [FM])
7 — FA52 (Analog Output Data from Comm. [AM])
8 — F601 (Stall Prevention Level, %)
9 — F441 (Power Running Torque Limit 1 Level, 0.01%)
10 — F443 (Regen. Braking Torque Limit 1 Level, 0.01%)
11 — F460 (Speed Loop Proportional Gain)
12 — F461 (Speed Loop Stabilization Coefficient)
Direct Access Number — F831
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0000h
Changeable During Run — Yes
Communications Option (DeviceNet/Profibus) Setting 3
Program ⇒ Communications ⇒ Communication Settings
Same as F831. See F831 for information on this parameter
Direct Access Number — F832
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0000h
Changeable During Run — Yes
Communications Option (DeviceNet/Profibus) Setting 4
Program ⇒ Communications ⇒ Communication Settings
Same as F831. See F831 for information on this parameter
Direct Access Number — F833
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0000h
Changeable During Run — Yes
Communications Option (DeviceNet/Profibus) Setting 5
Program ⇒ Communications ⇒ Communication Settings
Same as F831. See F831 for information on this parameter
Direct Access Number — F834
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0000h
Changeable During Run — Yes
Communications Option (DeviceNet/Profibus) Setting 6
Program ⇒ Communications ⇒ Communication Settings
Same as F831. See F831 for information on this parameter
Direct Access Number — F835
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0000h
Changeable During Run — Yes
Communications Option (DeviceNet/Profibus) Setting 7
Program ⇒ Communications ⇒ Communication Settings
Same as F831. See F831 for information on this parameter
Direct Access Number — F836
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0000h
Changeable During Run — Yes
F831 F836
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 211
Communications Option (DeviceNet/Profibus) Setting 8
Program ⇒ Communications ⇒ Communication Settings
While using the DeviceNet/Profibus communications protocol, parameters
F841 – F846 allow the user to select the ASD memory location that holds the
Command/Frequency/Monitoring instructions to be applied to the ASD for
Communications Option Settings 8 – 13, respectively.
See the DeviceNet Option Instruction Manual (P/N 58683) for more
information on this parameter.
Settings:
0 — Disabled
1 — FD01 (ASD Status 1)
2 — FD00 (Output Frequency, 0.01 Hz)
3 — FD03 (Output Current, 0.01%)
4 — FD05 (Output Voltage, 0.01%)
5 — FC91 (ASD Alarm)
6 — FD22 (PID Feedback Value, 0.01 Hz)
7 — FD06 (Input Terminal Status)
8 — FD07 (Output Terminal Status)
9 — FE36 (V/I Input)
10 — FE35 (RR Input)
11 — FE37 (RX Input)
12 — FD04 (Input Voltage [DC Detection], 0.01%)
13 — FD16 (Real-time Speed Feedback
14 — FD18 (Torque, 0.01%)
15 — FE60 (My Monitor)
16 — FE61 (My Monitor)
17 — FE62 (My Monitor)
18 — FE63 (My Monitor)
19 — F880 (Free Notes)
20 — FD29 (Input Power, 0.01 kW)
21 — FD30 (Output Power, 0.01 kW)
22 — FE14 (Cumulative Operation Time, 0.01=1 Hour)
23 — FE40 (FM Terminal Output Monitor)
24 — FE41 (AM Terminal Output Monitor)
Direct Access Number — F841
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0000h
Changeable During Run — Yes
Communications Option (DeviceNet/Profibus) Setting 9
Program ⇒ Communications ⇒ Communication Settings
Same as F841. See F841 for information on this parameter
Direct Access Number — F842
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0000h
Changeable During Run — Yes
Communications Option (DeviceNet/Profibus) Setting 10
Program ⇒ Communications ⇒ Communication Settings
Same as F841. See F841 for information on this parameter
Direct Access Number — F843
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0000h
Changeable During Run — Yes
Communications Option (DeviceNet/Profibus) Setting 11
Program ⇒ Communications ⇒ Communication Settings
Same as F841. See F841 for information on this parameter
Direct Access Number — F844
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0000h
Changeable During Run — Yes
F841 F844
212 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Communications Option (DeviceNet/Profibus) Setting 12
Program ⇒ Communications ⇒ Communication Settings
Same as F841. See F841 for information on this parameter
Direct Access Number — F845
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0000h
Changeable During Run — Yes
Communications Option (DeviceNet/Profibus) Setting 13
Program ⇒ Communications ⇒ Communication Settings
Same as F841. See F841 for information on this parameter
Direct Access Number — F846
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0000h
Changeable During Run — Yes
Disconnection Detection Extended Time
Program ⇒ Communications ⇒ Communication Settings
This parameter is used to set the length of time that no communications activity
may exist before the communications link is disconnected.
Direct Access Number — F850
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 100.0
Units — Seconds
ASD Operation at Disconnect
Program ⇒ Communications ⇒ Communication Settings
This parameter is used to set the H9 ASD action to be carried out in the event of
the loss of communications.
Settings:
0 — Stop and Terminate Communication
1 — Do Nothing (continue programmed operation)
2 — Deceleration Stop
3 — Coast Stop
4 — Emergency Off
5 — Preset Speed (setting of F852)
Direct Access Number — F851
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Stop,
Communication Release
Changeable During Run — Yes
Preset Speed Operation Selection
Program ⇒ Communications ⇒ Communication Settings
This parameter is used in conjunction with parameter F806.
This parameter setting is used to set the Preset Speed selection to be used if
Preset Speed is selected at parameter F851.
Settings:
0 — Disabled
1 – 15 — Preset Speed Number
Direct Access Number — F852
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Communications Option Station Address Monitor
Program ⇒ Communications ⇒ Communication Settings
This parameter is used in the setup of the communications network by reading
the Media Access Code (MAC) address of the ASD that is connected to a node
of the communications system.
The MAC Address is set via DIP switches of the optional device.
See the DeviceNet Option Instruction Manual (P/N 58683) for more
information on this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F853
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 255
F845 F853
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 213
Communications Option Speed Switch Monitor DeviceNet/
CC-Link
Program ⇒ Communications ⇒ Communication Settings
This parameter is used in the setup of the communications network by reading
the hardware-specific settings of the option card being used with the ASD.
If using the DEV002Z Devicenet card, this parameter reads the hardware
switch SW300 setting of the Devicenet card. SW300 sets the baud rate and the
MAC address of the option card that is connected to a node of the
communications system.
See the DeviceNet Option Instruction Manual (P/N 58683) for more
information on this parameter or see the Instruction manual for the option being
used with the H9 ASD.
Direct Access Number — F854
Parameter Type — Hardware Selectable
Factory Default — Option-Specific
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 255
Block Write Data 1
Program ⇒ Communications ⇒ Communication Settings
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the communications network by
establishing the type of data to be written to the ASD of the communications
link.
The communications network includes other ASDs and Host/Control computers
that monitor the status of the ASD(s), transfers commands, and loads or
modifies the parameter settings of the ASD.
Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled (Off then On)
for the changes to take effect.
Settings:
0 — None
1 — FA00 (command 1)
2 — FA20 (command 2)
3 — FA01 (frequency)
4 — FA50 (TB output)
5 — FA51 (analog output)
Direct Access Number — F870
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — None
Changeable During Run — Yes
Block Write Data 2
Program ⇒ Communications ⇒ Communication Settings
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the communications network by
establishing the type of data to be written to the ASD of the communications
link.
The communications network includes other ASDs and Host/Control computers
that monitor the status of the ASD(s), transfers commands, and loads or
modifies the parameter settings of the ASD.
Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled (Off then On)
for the changes to take effect.
Settings:
0 — None
1 — FA00 (command 1)
2 — FA20 (command 2)
3 — FA01 (frequency)
4 — FA50 (TB output)
5 — FA51 (analog output)
Direct Access Number — F871
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — None
Changeable During Run — Yes
F854 F871
214 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Block Read Data 1
Program ⇒ Communications ⇒ Communication Settings
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the communications network by
establishing the type of data to be read from the ASD using the communications
link.
The communications network includes other ASDs and Host/Control computers
that monitor the status of the ASD(s), transfers commands, and loads or
modifies the parameter settings of the ASD.
Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled (Off then On)
for the changes to take effect.
Settings:
0 — None
1 — Status Information
2 — Output Frequency
3 — Output Current
4 — Output Voltage
5 — Alarm Information
6 — PID Feedback Value
7 — Input Terminal Status
8 — Output Terminal Status
9 — V/I
10 — RR
11 — RX
12 — DC Voltage
13 — PG Feedback
14 — Torque
15 — My Monitor 1
16 — My Monitor 2
17 — My Monitor 3
18 — My Monitor 4
19 — Free Memo
Direct Access Number — F875
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (None)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Block Read Data 2
Program ⇒ Communications ⇒ Communication Settings
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the communications network by
establishing the type of data to be read from the ASD of the communications
link.
See parameter F875 for more information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F876
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — None
Changeable During Run — Yes
Block Read Data 3
Program ⇒ Communications ⇒ Communication Settings
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the communications network by
establishing the type of data to be read from the ASD of the communications
link.
See parameter F875 for more information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F877
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — None
Changeable During Run — Yes
F875 F877
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 215
Block Read Data 4
Program ⇒ Communications ⇒ Communication Settings
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the communications network by
establishing the type of data to be read from the ASD of the communications
link.
See parameter F875 for more information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F878
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — None
Changeable During Run — Yes
Block Read Data 5
Program ⇒ Communications ⇒ Communication Settings
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the communications network by
establishing the type of data to be read from the ASD of the communications
link.
See parameter F875 for more information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F879
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — None
Changeable During Run — Yes
Free Notes
Program ⇒ Communications ⇒ Communication Settings
This is an unused parameter that has allocated memory space.
The space may be used at the discretion of the user.This space may be used to
store information or a note to be transferred using communications.
Direct Access Number — F880
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 65534
Network Option Reset Settings
Program ⇒ Communications ⇒ Communication Settings
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the communications network by
establishing the targets of a Reset command received via the communications
link.
Settings:
0 — Reset ASD only
1 — Reset Option Board and ASD
Direct Access Number — F899
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Reset ASD only
Changeable During Run — Yes
Input Function Target 1
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Unit 1
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by
selecting the functionality of the programmable Input Function Target 1
terminal.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable Input Function Target 1
terminal to any one of the user-selectable functions listed in Table 7 on pg. 240,
Table 8 on pg. 241, or Table 10 on pg. 243.
See F977 for more information on this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F900
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Input Function Command 1
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Unit 1
This parameter is used to assign a user-selected logical operator to two user-
selected Input Function Target variables, enable a counter/timer function, or
perform a hold/reset function.
Table 11 on pg. 245 lists the available selections. Their use and selection
requirements are described in an example at F977.
Direct Access Number — F901
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (NOP)
F878 F901
216 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Input Function Target 2
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Unit 1
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by
selecting the functionality of the programmable Input Function Target 2
terminal.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable Input Function Target 2
terminal to any one of the user-selectable functions listed in Table 7 on pg. 240,
Table 8 on pg. 241, or Table 10 on pg. 243.
See F977 for more information on this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F902
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Input Function Command 2
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Unit 1
This parameter is used to assign a user-selected logical operator to two user-
selected Input Function Target variables, enable a counter/timer function, or
perform a hold/reset function.
Table 11 on pg. 245 lists the available selections. Their use and selection
requirements are described in an example at F977.
Direct Access Number — F903
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (NOP)
Input Function Target 3
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Unit 1
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by
selecting the functionality of the programmable Input Function Target 3
terminal.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable Input Function Target 3
terminal to any one of the user-selectable functions listed in Table 7 on pg. 240,
Table 8 on pg. 241, or Table 10 on pg. 243.
See F977 for more information on this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F904
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Output Function Assigned
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Unit 1
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by
selecting the functionality of the Output Function Assigned terminal.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable Output Function
Assigned data location to one of the functions listed in the Input Setting field
of Table 7 on pg. 240.
Settings:
0 – 3099
See the My Function Instruction Manual (P/N 58692) and F977 for more
information on this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F905
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
F902 F905
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 217
Input Function Target 1
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Unit 2
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by
selecting the functionality of the programmable Input Function Target 1
terminal.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable Input Function Target 1
terminal to any one of the user-selectable functions listed in Table 7 on pg. 240,
Table 8 on pg. 241, or Table 10 on pg. 243.
See F977 for more information on this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F906
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Input Function Command 1
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Unit 2
This parameter is used to assign a user-selected logical operator to two user-
selected Input Function Target variables, enable a counter/timer function, or
perform a hold/reset function.
Table 11 on pg. 245 lists the available selections. Their use and selection
requirements are described in an example at F977.
Direct Access Number — F907
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (NOP)
Input Function Target 2
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Unit 2
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by
selecting the functionality of the programmable Input Function Target 2
terminal.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable Input Function Target 2
terminal to any one of the user-selectable functions listed in Table 7 on pg. 240,
Table 8 on pg. 241, or Table 10 on pg. 243.
See F977 for more information on this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F908
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Input Function Command 2
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Unit 2
This parameter is used to assign a user-selected logical operator to two user-
selected Input Function Target variables, enable a counter/timer function, or
perform a hold/reset function.
Table 11 on pg. 245 lists the available selections. Their use and selection
requirements are described in an example at F977.
Direct Access Number — F909
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (NOP)
Input Function Target 3
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Unit 2
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by
selecting the functionality of the programmable Input Function Target 3
terminal.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable Input Function Target 3
terminal to any one of the user-selectable functions listed in Table 7 on pg. 240,
Table 8 on pg. 241, or Table 10 on pg. 243.
See F977 for more information on this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F910
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
F906 F910
218 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Output Function Assigned
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Unit 2
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by
selecting the functionality of the Output Function Assigned terminal.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable Output Function
Assigned data location to one of the functions listed in the Input Setting field
of Table 8 on pg. 241.
Settings:
0 – 3099
See the My Function Instruction Manual (P/N 58692) and F977 for more
information on this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F911
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Input Function Target 1
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Unit 3
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by
selecting the functionality of the programmable Input Function Target 1
terminal.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable Input Function Target 1
terminal to any one of the user-selectable functions listed in Table 7 on pg. 240,
Table 8 on pg. 241, or Table 10 on pg. 243.
See F977 for more information on this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F912
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Input Function Command 1
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Unit 3
This parameter is used to assign a user-selected logical operator to two user-
selected Input Function Target variables, enable a counter/timer function, or
perform a hold/reset function.
Table 11 on pg. 245 lists the available selections. Their use and selection
requirements are described in an example at F977.
Direct Access Number — F913
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (NOP)
Input Function Target 2
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Unit 3
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by
selecting the functionality of the programmable Input Function Target 2
terminal.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable Input Function Target 2
terminal to any one of the user-selectable functions listed in Table 7 on pg. 240,
Table 8 on pg. 241, or Table 10 on pg. 243.
See F977 for more information on this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F914
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Input Function Command 2
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Unit 3
This parameter is used to assign a user-selected logical operator to two user-
selected Input Function Target variables, enable a counter/timer function, or
perform a hold/reset function.
Table 11 on pg. 245 lists the available selections. Their use and selection
requirements are described in an example at F977.
Direct Access Number — F915
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (NOP)
F911 F915
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 219
Input Function Target 3
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Unit 3
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by
selecting the functionality of the programmable Input Function Target 3
terminal.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable Input Function Target 3
terminal to any one of the user-selectable functions listed in Table 7 on pg. 240,
Table 8 on pg. 241, or Table 10 on pg. 243.
See F977 for more information on this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F916
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Output Function Assigned
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Unit 3
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by
selecting the functionality of the Output Function Assigned terminal.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable Output Function
Assigned data location to one of the functions listed in the Input Setting field
of Table 8 on pg. 241.
Settings:
0 – 3099
See the My Function Instruction Manual (P/N 58692) and F977 for more
information on this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F917
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
My Function Percent Data 1
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Data
This parameter is used to set the trigger threshold level of the analog signal of
the My Function Percent Data 1.
The analog signal is selected using the Input Setting number from Table 8 on
pg. 241.
Once the assigned output value reaches the threshold setting of this parameter
the output value is transferred to My Function Out 1.
See the My Function Instruction Manual (P/N 58692) and F977 for more
information on this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F918
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 200.00
Units — %
My Function Percent Data 2
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Data
This parameter is used to set the trigger threshold level of the analog signal of
the My Function Percent Data 2.
The analog signal is selected using the Input Setting number from Table 8 on
pg. 241.
Direct Access Number — F919
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 200.00
Units — %
F916 F919
220 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
My Function Percent Data 3
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Data
This parameter is used to set the trigger threshold level of the analog signal of
the My Function Percent Data 3.
The analog signal is selected using the Input Setting number from Table 8 on
pg. 241.
Direct Access Number — F920
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 200.00
Units — %
My Function Percent Data 4
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Data
This parameter is used to set the trigger threshold level of the analog signal of
the My Function Percent Data 4.
The analog signal is selected using the Input Setting number from Table 8 on
pg. 241.
Direct Access Number — F921
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 200.00
Units — %
My Function Percent Data 5
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Data
This parameter is used to set the trigger threshold level of the analog signal of
the My Function Percent Data 5.
The analog signal is selected using the Input Setting number from Table 8 on
pg. 241.
Direct Access Number — F922
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 200.00
Units — %
My Function Frequency Data 1
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Data
This parameter is used to set the trigger threshold level of the analog signal of
the My Function Frequency Data 1.
The analog signal is selected using the Input Setting number from Table 8 on
pg. 241.
Direct Access Number — F923
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 200.00
Units — %
My Function Frequency Data 2
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Data
This parameter is used to set the trigger threshold level of the analog signal of
the My Function Frequency Data 2.
The analog signal is selected using the Input Setting number from Table 8 on
pg. 241.
Direct Access Number — F924
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 200.00
Units — %
My Function Frequency Data 3
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Data
This parameter is used to set the trigger threshold level of the analog signal of
the My Function Frequency Data 1.
The analog signal is selected using the Input Setting number from Table 8 on
pg. 241.
Direct Access Number — F925
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 200.00
Units — %
F920 F925
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 221
My Function Frequency Data 4
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Data
This parameter is used to set the trigger threshold level of the analog signal of
the My Function Frequency Data 4.
The analog signal is selected using the Input Setting number from Table 8 on
pg. 241.
Direct Access Number — F926
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 200.00
Units — %
My Function Frequency Data 5
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Data
This parameter is used to set the trigger threshold level of the analog signal of
the My Function Frequency Data 5.
The analog signal is selected using the Input Setting number from Table 8 on
pg. 241.
Direct Access Number — F927
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 200.00
Units — %
My Function Time Data 1
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Data
This parameter is used to set the response delay of the My Function Time
Data 1 terminal.
The applied discrete input signal must be present at the input terminal of the H9
ASD for the time setting here for a system response.
Discrete terminal input activation that does not equal or exceed this setting will
be ignored.
Direct Access Number — F928
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.01
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.01
Maximum — 600.00
Units — Seconds
My Function Time Data 2
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Data
This parameter is used to set the response delay of the My Function Time
Data 2 terminal.
The applied discrete input signal must be present at the input terminal of the H9
ASD for the time setting here for a system response.
Discrete terminal input activation that does not equal or exceed this setting will
be ignored.
Direct Access Number — F929
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.01
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.01
Maximum — 600.00
Units — Seconds
My Function Time Data 3
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Data
This parameter is used to set the response delay of the My Function Time
Data 3 terminal.
The applied discrete input signal must be present at the input terminal of the H9
ASD for the time setting here for a system response.
Discrete terminal input activation that does not equal or exceed this setting will
be ignored.
Direct Access Number — F930
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.01
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.01
Maximum — 600.00
Units — Seconds
F926 F930
222 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
My Function Time Data 4
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Data
This parameter is used to set the response delay of the My Function Time
Data 4 terminal.
The applied discrete input signal must be present at the input terminal of the H9
ASD for the time setting here for a system response.
Discrete terminal input activation that does not equal or exceed this setting will
be ignored.
Direct Access Number — F931
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.01
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.01
Maximum — 600.00
Units — Seconds
My Function Time Data 5
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Data
This parameter is used to set the response delay of the My Function Time
Data 5 terminal.
The applied discrete input signal must be present at the input terminal of the H9
ASD for the time setting here for a system response.
Discrete terminal input activation that does not equal or exceed this setting will
be ignored.
Direct Access Number — F932
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.01
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.01
Maximum — 600.00
Units — Seconds
My Function Count Data 1
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Data
This parameter is used to set the pulse-count threshold value used to trigger the
discrete output COUNT1 (ON Timer).
COUNT1 (ON Timer) outputs a 1 upon reaching the setting of this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F933
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 9999
Units — Pulses
My Function Count Data 2
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Data
This parameter is used to set the pulse-count threshold value used to trigger the
discrete output COUNT2 (ON Timer).
COUNT2 (ON Timer) outputs a 1 upon reaching the setting of this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F934
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 9999
Units — Pulses
Input Function Target 1
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Unit 4
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by
selecting the functionality of the programmable Input Function Target 1
terminal.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable Input Function Target 1
terminal to any one of the user-selectable functions listed in Table 7 on pg. 240,
Table 8 on pg. 241, or Table 10 on pg. 243.
See F977 for more information on this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F935
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
F931 F935
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 223
Input Function Command 1
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Unit 4
This parameter is used to assign a user-selected logical operator to two user-
selected Input Function Target variables, enable a counter/timer function, or
perform a hold/reset function.
Table 11 on pg. 245 lists the available selections. Their use and selection
requirements are described in an example at F977.
Direct Access Number — F936
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (NOP)
Input Function Target 2
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Unit 4
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by
selecting the functionality of the programmable Input Function Target 2
terminal.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable Input Function Target 2
terminal to any one of the user-selectable functions listed in Table 7 on pg. 240,
Table 8 on pg. 241, or Table 10 on pg. 243.
See F977 for more information on this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F937
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Input Function Command 2
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Unit 4
This parameter is used to assign a user-selected logical operator to two user-
selected Input Function Target variables, enable a counter/timer function, or
perform a hold/reset function.
Table 11 on pg. 245 lists the available selections. Their use and selection
requirements are described in an example at F977.
Direct Access Number — F938
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (NOP)
Input Function Target 3
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Unit 4
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by
selecting the functionality of the programmable Input Function Target 3
terminal.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable Input Function Target 3
terminal to any one of the user-selectable functions listed in Table 7 on pg. 240,
Table 8 on pg. 241, or Table 10 on pg. 243.
See F977 for more information on this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F939
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Output Function Assigned
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Unit 4
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by
selecting the functionality of the Output Function Assigned terminal.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable Output Function
Assigned data location to one of the functions listed in the Input Setting field
of Table 8 on pg. 241.
Settings:
0 – 3099
See the My Function Instruction Manual (P/N 58692) and F977 for more
information on this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F940
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
F936 F940
224 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Input Function Target 1
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Unit 5
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by
selecting the functionality of the programmable Input Function Target 1
terminal.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable Input Function Target 1
terminal to any one of the user-selectable functions listed in Table 7 on pg. 240,
Table 8 on pg. 241, or Table 10 on pg. 243.
See F977 for more information on this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F941
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Input Function Command 1
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Unit 5
This parameter is used to assign a user-selected logical operator to two user-
selected Input Function Target variables, enable a counter/timer function, or
perform a hold/reset function.
Table 11 on pg. 245 lists the available selections. Their use and selection
requirements are described in an example at F977.
Direct Access Number — F942
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (NOP)
Input Function Target 2
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Unit 5
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by
selecting the functionality of the programmable Input Function Target 2
terminal.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable Input Function Target 2
terminal to any one of the user-selectable functions listed in Table 7 on pg. 240,
Table 8 on pg. 241, or Table 10 on pg. 243.
See F977 for more information on this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F943
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Input Function Command 2
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Unit 5
This parameter is used to assign a user-selected logical operator to two user-
selected Input Function Target variables, enable a counter/timer function, or
perform a hold/reset function.
Table 11 on pg. 245 lists the available selections. Their use and selection
requirements are described in an example at F977.
Direct Access Number — F944
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (NOP)
Input Function Target 3
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Unit 5
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by
selecting the functionality of the programmable Input Function Target 3
terminal.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable Input Function Target 3
terminal to any one of the user-selectable functions listed in Table 7 on pg. 240,
Table 8 on pg. 241, or Table 10 on pg. 243.
See F977 for more information on this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F945
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
F941 F945
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 225
Output Function Assigned
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Unit 5
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by
selecting the functionality of the Output Function Assigned terminal.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable Output Function
Assigned data location to one of the functions listed in the Input Setting field
of Table 8 on pg. 241.
Settings:
0 – 3099
See the My Function Instruction Manual (P/N 58692) and F977 for more
information on this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F946
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Input Function Target 1
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Unit 6
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by
selecting the functionality of the programmable Input Function Target 1
terminal.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable Input Function Target 1
terminal to any one of the user-selectable functions listed in Table 7 on pg. 240,
Table 8 on pg. 241, or Table 10 on pg. 243.
See F977 for more information on this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F947
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Input Function Command 1
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Unit 6
This parameter is used to assign a user-selected logical operator to two user-
selected Input Function Target variables, enable a counter/timer function, or
perform a hold/reset function.
Table 11 on pg. 245 lists the available selections. Their use and selection
requirements are described in an example at F977.
Direct Access Number — F948
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (NOP)
Input Function Target 2
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Unit 6
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by
selecting the functionality of the programmable Input Function Target 2
terminal.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable Input Function Target 2
terminal to any one of the user-selectable functions listed in Table 7 on pg. 240,
Table 8 on pg. 241, or Table 10 on pg. 243.
See F977 for more information on this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F949
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Input Function Command 2
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Unit 6
This parameter is used to assign a user-selected logical operator to two user-
selected Input Function Target variables, enable a counter/timer function, or
perform a hold/reset function.
Table 11 on pg. 245 lists the available selections. Their use and selection
requirements are described in an example at F977.
Direct Access Number — F950
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (NOP)
F946 F950
226 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Input Function Target 3
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Unit 6
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by
selecting the functionality of the programmable Input Function Target 3
terminal.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable Input Function Target 3
terminal to any one of the user-selectable functions listed in Table 7 on pg. 240,
Table 8 on pg. 241, or Table 10 on pg. 243.
See F977 for more information on this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F951
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Output Function Assigned
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Unit 6
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by
selecting the functionality of the Output Function Assigned terminal.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable Output Function
Assigned data location to one of the functions listed in the Input Setting field
of Table 8 on pg. 241.
Settings:
0 – 3099
See the My Function Instruction Manual (P/N 58692) and F977 for more
information on this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F952
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Input Function Target 1
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Unit 7
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by
selecting the functionality of the programmable Input Function Target 1
terminal.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable Input Function Target 1
terminal to any one of the user-selectable functions listed in Table 7 on pg. 240,
Table 8 on pg. 241, or Table 10 on pg. 243.
See F977 for more information on this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F953
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Input Function Command 1
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Unit 7
This parameter is used to assign a user-selected logical operator to two user-
selected Input Function Target variables, enable a counter/timer function, or
perform a hold/reset function.
Table 11 on pg. 245 lists the available selections. Their use and selection
requirements are described in an example at F977.
Direct Access Number — F954
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (NOP)
F951 F954
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 227
Input Function Target 2
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Unit 7
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by
selecting the functionality of the programmable Input Function Target 2
terminal.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable Input Function Target 2
terminal to any one of the user-selectable functions listed in Table 7 on pg. 240,
Table 8 on pg. 241, or Table 10 on pg. 243.
See F977 for more information on this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F955
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Input Function Command 2
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Unit 7
This parameter is used to assign a user-selected logical operator to two user-
selected Input Function Target variables, enable a counter/timer function, or
perform a hold/reset function.
Table 11 on pg. 245 lists the available selections. Their use and selection
requirements are described in an example at F977.
Direct Access Number — F956
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (NOP)
Input Function Target 3
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Unit 7
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by
selecting the functionality of the programmable Input Function Target 3
terminal.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable Input Function Target 3
terminal to any one of the user-selectable functions listed in Table 7 on pg. 240,
Table 8 on pg. 241, or Table 10 on pg. 243.
See F977 for more information on this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F957
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Output Function Assigned
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Unit 7
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by
selecting the functionality of the Output Function Assigned terminal.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable Output Function
Assigned data location to one of the functions listed in the Input Setting field
of Table 8 on pg. 241.
Settings:
0 – 3099
See the My Function Instruction Manual (P/N 58692) and F977 for more
information on this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F958
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
F955 F958
228 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Analog Input Function Target 11
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Analog
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by
selecting the functionality of the programmable Analog Input Function Target
11 terminal.
The function selected at F961 may be adjusted using the input analog control
signal selected here.
Settings:
0 — Disabled (None)
1 — V/I
2 — RR
3 — RX
4 — Optional RX2+, RX2-
5 — Optional V/I
Direct Access Number — F959
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Analog Function Assigned Object 11
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Analog
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by
selecting the functionality to which the adjustment of F959 is applied.
Settings:
0 — Disabled (None)
1 — Acceleration Rate
2 — Upper Limit Frequency
3 — Acceleration Multiplication Factor
4 — Deceleration Multiplication Factor
5 — Manual Torque Boost
6 — Over Current Stall (F601)
7 — Thermal Protection
8 — Speed Loop P Gain (F460)
9 — Drooping Gain (F320)
10 — PID P Gain (F362)
See the My Function Instruction Manual (P/N 58692) for a complete
description of the setup requirements and operational information of the Analog
Function Assigned Object parameter.
Direct Access Number — F961
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Analog Input Function Target 21
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Analog
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by
selecting the functionality of the programmable Analog Input Function Target
21 terminal.
The function selected at F964 may be adjusted using the input analog control
signal selected here.
Settings:
0 — Disabled (None)
1 — V/I
2 — RR
3 — RX
4 — Optional RX2+, RX2-
5 — Optional V/I
Direct Access Number — F962
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
F959 F962
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 229
Analog Function Assigned Object 21
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Analog
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by
selecting the functionality to which the adjustment of F962 is applied.
Settings:
0 — Disabled (None)
1 — Acceleration Rate
2 — Upper Limit Frequency
3 — Acceleration Multiplication Factor
4 — Deceleration Multiplication Factor
5 — Manual Torque Boost
6 — Over Current Stall (F601)
7 — Thermal Protection
8 — Speed Loop P Gain (F460)
9 — Drooping Gain (F320)
10 — PID P Gain (F362)
See the My Function Instruction Manual (P/N 58692) for a complete
description of the setup requirements and operational information of the Analog
Function Assigned Object parameter.
Direct Access Number — F964
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Monitor Output Function 11
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Monitor
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by
establishing the function that is to be recorded and output as the Peak,
Minimum, or Average value as selected at parameter F966.
Select the Monitor Display Input Setting number from Table 10 on pg. 243 to
output the corresponding function.
Use the Communication Number if operating using communications.
See the My Function Instruction Manual (P/N 58692) for a complete
description of the setup requirements and operational information of the
Monitor Output Function parameter.
Direct Access Number — F965
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 2000
Changeable During Run — Yes
Monitor Output Function Command 11
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Monitor
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by allowing
the user to select the Peak, Minimum, or Normal (Avg.) value of the
parameter F965 selection to be recorded and output as a monitored function.
Settings:
0 — Normal
1 — Peak
2 — Minimum
See the My Function Instruction Manual (P/N 58692) for a complete
description of the setup requirements and operational information of the
Monitor Output Function parameter.
Direct Access Number — F966
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Normal
Changeable During Run — Yes
F964 F966
230 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Monitor Output Function 21
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Monitor
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by
establishing the function that is to be recorded and output as the Peak,
Minimum, or Average value as selected at parameter F968.
Select the Monitor Display Input Setting number from Table 10 on pg. 243 to
output the corresponding function.
Use the Communication Number if operating using communications.
See the My Function Instruction Manual (P/N 58692) for a complete
description of the setup requirements and operational information of the
Monitor Output Function parameter.
Direct Access Number — F967
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 2000
Changeable During Run — Yes
Monitor Output Function Command 21
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Monitor
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by allowing
the user to select the Peak, Minimum, or Normal (Avg.) value of the
parameter F967 selection to be recorded and output as a monitored function.
Settings:
0 — Normal
1 — Peak
2 — Minimum
See the My Function Instruction Manual (P/N 58692) for a complete
description of the setup requirements and operational information of the
Monitor Output Function parameter.
Direct Access Number — F968
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Normal
Changeable During Run — Yes
Monitor Output Function 31
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Monitor
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by
establishing the function that is to be recorded and output as the Peak,
Minimum, or Average value as selected at parameter F970.
Select the Monitor Display Input Setting number from Table 10 on pg. 243 to
output the corresponding function.
Use the Communication Number if operating using communications.
See the My Function Instruction Manual (P/N 58692) for a complete
description of the setup requirements and operational information of the
Monitor Output Function parameter.
Direct Access Number — F969
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 2000
Changeable During Run — Yes
F967 F969
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 231
Monitor Output Function Command 31
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Monitor
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by allowing
the user to select the Peak, Minimum, or Normal (Avg.) value of the
parameter F969 selection to be recorded and output as a monitored function.
See the My Function Instruction Manual (P/N 58692) for a complete
description of the setup requirements and operational information of the
Monitor Output Function parameter.
Settings:
0 — Normal
1 — Peak
2 — Minimum
Direct Access Number — F970
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Normal
Changeable During Run — Yes
Monitor Output Function 41
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Monitor
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by
establishing the function that is to be recorded and output as the Peak,
Minimum, or Average value as selected at parameter F971.
Select the Monitor Display Input Setting number from Table 10 on pg. 243 to
output the corresponding function.
Use the Communication Number if operating using communications.
See the My Function Instruction Manual (P/N 58692) for a complete
description of the setup requirements and operational information of the
Monitor Output Function parameter.
Direct Access Number — F971
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 2000
Changeable During Run — Yes
Monitor Output Function Command 41
Program ⇒ My Function ⇒ My Function Monitor
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by allowing
the user to select the Peak, Minimum, or Normal (Avg.) value of the
parameter F971 selection to be recorded and output as a monitored function.
Settings:
0 — Normal
1 — Peak
2 — Minimum
See the My Function Instruction Manual (P/N 58692) for a complete
description of the setup requirements and operational information of the
Monitor Output Function parameter.
Direct Access Number — F972
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Normal
Changeable During Run — Yes
F970 F971
232 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Virtual Input Terminal 1 Selection
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Input Terminals
This parameter is used to set the functionality of the Virtual Input Terminal 1.
As a virtual terminal, it exists only in memory and is considered to always be in
its True (connected to CC) state.
It is often practical to assign a function to this terminal that the user desires to
be maintained regardless of external conditions or operations.
This parameter sets the programmable Virtual Input Terminal 1 terminal to
one of the functions that are listed in Table 5 on pg. 236.
In addition, the input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
Direct Access Number — F973
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Unassigned
Changeable During Run — No
Virtual Input Terminal 2 Selection
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Input Terminals
This parameter is used to set the functionality of the Virtual Input Terminal 2.
As a virtual terminal, it exists only in memory and is considered to always be in
its True (connected to CC) state.
It is often practical to assign a function to this terminal that the user desires to
be maintained regardless of external conditions or operations.
This parameter sets the programmable Virtual Input Terminal 2 terminal to
one of the functions that are listed in Table 5 on pg. 236.
In addition, the input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
Direct Access Number — F974
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Unassigned
Changeable During Run — No
Virtual Input Terminal 3 Selection
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Input Terminals
This parameter is used to set the functionality of the Virtual Input Terminal 3.
As a virtual terminal, it exists only in memory and is considered to always be in
its True (connected to CC) state.
It is often practical to assign a function to this terminal that the user desires to
be maintained regardless of external conditions or operations.
This parameter sets the programmable Virtual Input Terminal 3 terminal to
one of the functions that are listed in Table 5 on pg. 236.
In addition, the input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
Direct Access Number — F975
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Unassigned
Changeable During Run — No
Virtual Input Terminal 4 Selection
Program ⇒ Terminal ⇒ Input Terminals
This parameter is used to set the functionality of the Virtual Input Terminal 4.
As a virtual terminal, it exists only in memory and is considered to always be in
its True (connected to CC) state.
It is often practical to assign a function to this terminal that the user desires to
be maintained regardless of external conditions or operations.
This parameter sets the programmable Virtual Input Terminal 4 terminal to
one of the functions that are listed in Table 5 on pg. 236.
In addition, the input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
Direct Access Number — F976
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Unassigned
Changeable During Run — No
F973 F976
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 233
My Function Selection
Program ⇒ My Function
This parameter Enables/Disables the configured My Function feature of the
H9 ASD.
Settings:
0 — None (Disabled)
1 — My Function with Terminal Board Signal (discrete terminal activation)
2 — My Function Always On
My Function
The My Function feature is configured using the settings of F900 to F977 and
is used to enhance the programmability of the H9 ASD by performing two
programmable functions: 1) the Combined Terminal Function, and 2) Logic
Operations.
Combined Terminal Function
Assigning more than one function to a discrete input terminal provides two
advantages: it effectively expands the number of input terminals, and reduces
the number of cables required to support the input/output functions (e.g.,
assigning ST and F to one terminal). Using Virtual Terminals 1 – 4 (F973 –
F976) are required to use this function.
In the example below, the ST terminal assignment and the F terminal
assignment will be combined as one terminal to illustrate this feature. However,
any two of the discrete input terminal assignments listed in Table 5 on pg. 236
may be combined in this manner.
Setup (example)
1. Disable the My Function parameter at F977 to prevent the system from
starting upon completion of the setup.
2. Assign the ST function to the S1 terminal (F115).
3. Assign the F function to Virtual Input Terminal 1 (F973).
4. Set Input Function Target 1 to 5 (F900). This setting assigns S1 as the
control input terminal.
5. Set Output Function Assigned to 21 (F905). This setting is a command
that writes the F115 selection (S1) to Virtual Input Terminal 1, activating
both.
6. Enable the My Function parameter at F977 by selecting My Function
Always On or selecting My Function With TB Signal.
If set to My Function Always On, the combination of ST and F are
always On (both are connected to CC only during the S1 activation).
If set to My Function With TB Signal, set a discrete input terminal to My
Function Run Signal and connect it to CC to enable My Function.
Connect S1 to CC to activate the ST+F function. A disconnection at either
terminal will terminate the My Function programming (discrete input
terminal My Function Run Signal is Anded with discrete input terminal
S1).
Connect S1 to CC and the F-to-CC + the ST-to-CC functions will be carried
out using only S1.
With the aforementioned setup completed, provide a Frequency Command
(F004) and the motor will run at the commanded frequency.
(Continued on pg. 234)
Direct Access Number — F977
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — None (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — No
This parameter must always be set to
None at the start of the My Function
setup and remain set to None until all
of the My Function parameter
settings have been confirmed as
being correct.
If enabled for normal operation using
settings 1 or 2, the motor may start
and engage the driven equipment
unexpectedly upon receiving a Run
signal during the My Function setup.
DANGER
F977 F977
234 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Combined Terminal Function (Cont.)
Output terminals may also be combined to produce one output response to
multiple conditions using the computational operators of Table 11 on pg. 245.
Assigning more than one function to a discrete output terminal provides two
advantages: it effectively expands the number of input terminals, and reduces
the number of cables required to support the input/output functions (e.g.,
assigning Low Speed Detection and Low Current Detection to one output
terminal). Using Virtual Terminals 1 – 4 (F973 – F976) are required to use
this function.
In the example below, the Low Speed Signal (detection) terminal assignment
and the Low Current Detection terminal assignment will be combined as one
terminal output to illustrate this feature. However, any two of the discrete
output terminal assignments listed in Table 8 on pg. 241 may be combined in
this manner.
Setup (example)
1. Disable the My Function parameter at F977 to prevent the system from
starting upon completion of the setup.
2. From Program ⇒ Direct Access ⇒ Unknown Numbers, select Enabled.
3. Set the OUT1 terminal (F130) to My Function Output 1 (222).
4. Set Input Function Target 1 (F900) to 1004 (Low Speed Signal
detection). See Table 8 on pg. 241 for a complete listing of available
settings.
5. Set Input Function Target 2 (F902) to 1026 (Low Current Alarm). See
Table 8 on pg. 241 for a complete listing of available settings.
6. Set Input Function Command 1 (F901) to AND (3). This setting assigns
an operator to the Input Function Target 1 and the Input Function
Target 2 settings.
7. Set Output Function Assigned (F905) to 1222. This setting will transfer
the results of the logical AND to My Function Output 1 (OUT1).
8. Enable the My Function parameter at F977 by selecting My Function
Always On.
With the aforementioned setup completed in the example, once the Low Speed
Signal AND the Low Current Alarm are active, the OUT1 terminal is
activated for the duration of the Low Speed/Low Current condition.
See the My Function Instruction Manual (P/N 58692) for a complete
description of the setup requirements and operational information of the My
Function parameter.
Direct Access Number — F977
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — None (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — No
This parameter must always be set to
None at the start of the My Function
setup and remain set to None until all
of the My Function parameter
settings have been confirmed as
being correct.
If enabled for normal operation using
settings 1 or 2, the motor may start
and engage the driven equipment
unexpectedly upon receiving a Run
signal during the My Function setup.
DANGER
F977 F977
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 235
Traverse Selection
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ Traverse
This parameter setting is used in the setup of the Traverse control mode of
operation and is used in conjunction with the discrete terminal activation of the
Traverse Permission Signal.
This parameter is used to enable the Traverse function. The Traverse function
is activated via the discrete input terminal (see Table 5 on pg. 236).
See the Traverse Control Instruction Manual (P/N 58693) for more
information on this feature.
Settings:
0 — Disabled
1 — Enabled
Direct Access Number — F980
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — No
Traverse Acceleration Time
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ Traverse
This parameter setting is used in the setup of the Traverse control mode of
operation. This setting establishes the acceleration rate used during the
Traverse function.
See the Traverse Control Instruction Manual (P/N 58693) for more
information on this feature.
Direct Access Number — F981
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 25.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 120.0
Units — Seconds
Traverse Deceleration Time
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ Traverse
This parameter setting is used in the setup of the Traverse control mode of
operation. This setting establishes the deceleration rate used during the
Traverse function.
See the Traverse Control Instruction Manual (P/N 58693) for more
information on this feature.
Direct Access Number — F982
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 25.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 120.0
Units — Seconds
Traverse Step
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ Traverse
This parameter setting is used in the setup of the Traverse control mode of
operation. This setting is used as a multiplier to establish the amount that the
frequency is increased or decreased while using the Traverse function.
See the Traverse Control Instruction Manual (P/N 58693) for more
information on this feature.
Direct Access Number — F983
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 10.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 25.0
Units — %
Traverse Jump Step
Program ⇒ Special ⇒ Traverse
This parameter setting is used in the setup of the Traverse control mode of
operation. This setting is used as a multiplier to establish the amount that the
frequency is increased or decreased while using the Traverse function when a
short burst of rapid speed change is required.
See the Traverse Control Instruction Manual (P/N 58693) for more
information on this feature.
Direct Access Number — F984
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 10.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 50.0
Units — %
F980 F984
236 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Table 5. Discrete Input Terminal assignment selections and descriptions.
Sel. No. Terminal Selection Descriptions
NO NC
01Unassigned — No operation.
23Forward — Provides a Forward run command.
45Reverse — Provides a Reverse run command.
67Standby — Enables the Forward and Reverse operation commands.
89Reset — Resets the device and any active faults.
10 11 Preset Speed 1 — Preset Speed 1 is used as the LSB of the 4-bit nibble that is used to select a Preset Speed.
12 13 Preset Speed 2 — Preset Speed 2 is used as the second bit of the 4-bit nibble that is used to select a Preset Speed.
14 15 Preset Speed 3 — Preset Speed 3 is used as the third bit of the 4-bit nibble that is used to select a Preset Speed.
16 17 Preset Speed 4 — Preset Speed 4 is used as the MSB of the 4-bit nibble that is used to select a Preset Speed.
18 19 Jog — This terminal activates a Jog for the duration of the activation. The Jog settings may be configured at F260 –
F262.
20 21 Emergency Off — Terminates the output signal from the drive and may apply a brake if so configured. The braking
method may be selected at F603.
22 23 DC Braking — Upon activation the drive outputs a DC current that is injected into the windings of the motor to
quickly brake the motor.
24 25
A/D 1 — Accel/Decel Switching 1 — Used in conjunction with Accel/Decel Switching 2. Activate or deactivate this
terminal to toggle to and from the Accel/Decel profile 1 through 4.
Accel/Decel profiles are comprised of the Accel/Decel settings, Pattern, and Switching Frequency, respectively.
See F504 for more information on this terminal setting.
26 27
A/D 2 — Accel/Decel Switching 2 — Used in conjunction with Accel/Decel Switching 1. Activate or deactivate this
terminal to toggle to and from the Accel/Decel profile 1 through 4.
Accel/Decel profiles are comprised of the Accel/Decel settings, Pattern, and Switching Frequency, respectively.
See F504 for more information on this terminal setting.
28 29
V/f Switching 1/V/f Switching 2 — Activating combinations of discrete input terminals V/f Switching 1 and 2
allow for the selection of a V/f switching profile as listed below.
30 31
Note: NO/NC = Normally Open/Normally Closed.
V/f Switching Terminal V/f Selection
#1 #2
00 1
01 2
10 3
11 4
1 = Terminal Activated
The 1–4 settings of the V/f Switching
selections are performed at parameters F170 –
F181.
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 237
32 33
Torque Limit Switching 1/Torque Limit Switching 2 — Activating combinations of discrete input terminals
Torque Limit Switching 1 and 2 allow for the selection of a torque limit switching profile as listed below.
34 35
36 37 PID Off — Turns off PID control.
38 39 Pattern Operation Group 1 — Initiates the Pattern #1 Pattern Run.
40 41 Pattern Operation Group 2 — Initiates the Pattern #2 Pattern Run.
42 43 Pattern Operation Continuation — Initiates a continuation of the last Pattern Run from its stopping point.
44 45 Pattern Operation Trigger — Initiates the first Preset Speed of a Pattern Run and initiates each subsequent
enabled Preset Speed with continued activations.
46 47 External Over-heat — Causes an Over-Heat Trip (OH).
48 49 Local Priority (cancels serial priority) — Overrides any serial control and returns the Command and Frequency
control to the settings of F003 and F004.
50 51 Hold (3-wire stop) — Decelerates the motor to a stop.
52 53 PID Differentiation/Integration Clear — Clears the PID value.
54 55 PID Forward/Reverse Switching — Toggles the gradient characteristic of the feedback response of the V/I
terminal during PID-controlled operation.
56 57 Forced Continuous Run — Ignore PID control settings for the duration of activation.
58 59 Specified Speed Operation — Runs speed as commanded by the Frequency Mode setting.
60 61 Dwell Signal — Used in conjunction with the Acceleration/Deceleration Suspend function (F349) — suspends the
Accel/Decel function for the duration of the activation.
62 63 Power Failure Synchronized Signal — Activates the Synchronized Accel/Decel function of the Regenerative
Power Ridethrough feature. See F302 for more information on this terminal setting.
64 65 My Function Run — Activates the configured My Function feature. See F977 for more information on this
parameter.
66 67 Autotuning Signal — Initiates the Autotune function. Set F400 to Autotuning by Input Terminal Signal.
68 69
Speed Gain Switching — Toggles the ASD operating mode from and to Speed Control and Torque Control.
Speed Control operation references parameter settings F460 and F461. Torque Control operation references
parameter settings F462 and F463.
70 71 Servo Lock — Holds the motor at 0 Hz until a Run command is received.
72 73 Simple Positioning — While operating in the Positioning Control mode, activation initiates the Stop command.
See F381 for more information on this terminal setting.
74 75 kWH Display Clear — Clears the kWH meter display.
76 77 Trace Back Trigger— Initiates the data Read/Store function of the Trace Selection parameter. See F740 for more
information on this feature.
78 79 Light-Load High-Speed Disable — Terminates the Light-load High-speed operation.
Note: NO/NC = Normally Open/Normally Closed.
Table 5. Discrete Input Terminal assignment selections and descriptions.
Sel. No. Terminal Selection Descriptions
NO NC
Torque Limit
Switching Terminal Torque Limit Selection
#1 #2
00 1
01 2
10 3
11 4
1 = Terminal Activated
The 1–4 settings of the torque limit switching
selections are performed at parameters F440 –
F449.
238 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
86 87 Binary Write — Writes the status of the discrete input terminals to the control board during binary input speed
control.
88 89 UP/DOWN Frequency (up) — Increases the speed of the motor for the duration of activation until reaching the
Upper Limit setting or increases the speed of the motor in steps (see F264 for more information on this feature).
90 91 UP/DOWN Frequency (down) — Decreases the speed of the motor for the duration of activation until reaching the
Lower Limit setting or decreases the speed of the motor in steps (see F264 for more information on this feature).
92 93 UP/DOWN Frequency (clear) — While operating in the Up/Down Frequency speed control mode this terminal
initiates a 0 Hz output command. If operating with an activated UP/DOWN Frequency (up or down) terminal, the
output goes to the Lower Limit (F013) setting.
98 99 Forward/Reverse — This setting operates in conjunction with another terminal being set to the Run/Stop function.
When configured to Run (Run/Stop to CC), the make or break of this connection to CC changes the direction of the
motor.
100 101 Run/Stop — This terminal enables the motor to run when activated and disables the motor when deactivated.
102 103 Commercial Power/ASD Switching — Initiates the ASD-to-Commercial Power switching function.
See parameter F354 for more information on this feature.
104 105 Frequency Reference Priority Switching — Toggles frequency control to and from the settings of F004 and
F207.
106 107 V/I Terminal Priority — Assigns Speed control to the V/I Terminal and overrides the F004 setting.
108 109 Command Terminal Board Priority — Assigns Command control to the Terminal Board and overrides the F003
setting.
110 111 Edit Enable — Allows for the override of the lockout parameter setting (F700) allowing for parameter editing.
112 113 Control Switching — Toggles the system to and from the speed control and the torque control modes.
122 123 Fast Deceleration — Using dynamic braking (if enabled and supported), stops the motor at the fastest rate allowed
by the load.
124 125 Preliminary Excitation — Applies an excitation current to the motor (holds shaft stationary) for the duration of the
activation.
126 127
Brake Request — Braking Request — Initiates the brake release command. This setting requires that another
discrete input terminal be set to Brake Answerback Input to complete the brake release command and to convey the
status of the braking system to the user or to a dependent subsystem.
Once the braking release function is initiated, the Trouble Internal Timer begins to count down (Trouble Internal
Timer value is set at F630). Should the count-down timer expire before the brake releases or before the Brake
Answerback Input is returned, fault E-11 will occur. Otherwise, the brake releases the motor and normal motor
operations resume.
The Braking Release function is primarily used at startup; but, may be used when the brake is applied while the motor
is running.
130 131
Brake Answerback Input — Brake Answerback Input — This setting is required when the Braking Request
function is used. The function of this input terminal is to receive the returned the status of the braking system. The
returned status is either Released or Not Released.
If Released is returned within the time setting of F630, normal system function resumes.
If Not Released is returned or if the F630 time setting times out before either signal is returned, then fault E-11 occurs.
The returned signal may also be used to notify the user or control a dependent subsystem.
134 135 Traverse Permission Signal — Enables/Disables the Traverse function. See parameter F980 for more information
on this feature.
Note: NO/NC = Normally Open/Normally Closed.
Table 5. Discrete Input Terminal assignment selections and descriptions.
Sel. No. Terminal Selection Descriptions
NO NC
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 239
Table 6. Output terminal assignments for the FP, AM, FM, MON1, and MON2 output terminals and selections for the Standard
Monitor Display items.
Sel.
No.
Output Meter Terminal
Assignments and Display Item
Selections
Sel.
No.
Output Meter Terminal
Assignments and Display Item
Selections
0Output Frequency 30 100% Meter Adjust Value
1Frequency Reference 31 Data from Communications
2Output Current 32 185% Meter Adjust Value
3DC Bus Voltage 33 250% Meter Adjust Value
4Output Voltage 34 Input Watt Hour
5Compensated Frequency 35 Output Watt Hour
6Speed Feedback (realtime) 45 Gain Display
7Speed Feedback (1 sec filter) 46 My Function Monitor 1 Without Sign
8Torque 47 My Function Monitor 2 Without Sign
9Torque Command 48 My Function Monitor 3 With Sign
11 Torque Current 49 My Function Monitor 4 With Sign
12 Excitation Current 50 Signed Output Frequency
13 PID Feedback Value 51 Signed Frequency Reference
14 Motor Overload Ratio 52 Signed Compensated Frequency
15 ASD Overload Ratio 53 Signed Speed Feedback (realtime)
16 DBR Overload Ratio 54 Signed Speed Feedback (1 sec filter)
17 DBR Load Ratio 55 Signed Torque
18 Input Power 56 Signed Torque Command
19 Output Power 58 Signed Torque Current
23 Option V/I Input 59 Signed PID Feedback Value
24 RR Input 60 Signed RX Input
25 V/I Input 61 Signed RX2 Option (AI1) Input
26 RX Input 62 Signed 100% Meter Adjust Value
27 RX2 Option (AI1) Input 63 Signed 185% Meter Adjust Value
28 FM Output 64 Signed 250% Meter Adjust Value
29 AM Output
240 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Table 7. My Function Input Target selections.
Selection/
Communications
Number Terminal Assignment Selection/
Communications
Number Terminal Assignment
0Unassigned 17 B12
1Forward 18 B13
2Reverse 19 B14
3Standby 20 B15
4Reset 21 Virtual Input Terminal 1
5S1 22 Virtual Input Terminal 2
6S2 23 Virtual Input Terminal 3
7S3 24 Virtual Input Terminal 4
8S4 25 Internal Terminal 1
9LI1 26 Internal Terminal 2
10 LI2 27 Internal Terminal 3
11 LI3 28 Internal Terminal 4
12 LI4 29 Internal Terminal 5
13 LI5 30 Internal Terminal 6
14 LI6 31 Internal Terminal 7
15 LI7 32 Internal Terminal 8
16 LI8
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 241
Table 8. Terminal assignments and the associated My Function Input Setting (Input Function Target) and Parameter Setting
numbers for the FLA/B/C, O1A/O1B (OUT1), O2A/O2B (OUT2), OUT3–OUT6, R1–R4 terminals.
Discrete Output Terminal Assignment Selections
Input
Setting Param
Setting Function Input
Setting Param
Setting Function
1000 0Lower Limit Frequency 1086 86 Error Code Output 4
1002 2Upper Limit Frequency 1088 88 Error Code Output 5
1004 4Low Speed Signal 1090 90 Error Code Output 6
1006 6Acceleration/Deceleration Completion 1092 92 Specified Data Output 1
1008 8Speed Reach Signal 1094 94 Specified Data Output 2
1010 10 Failure FL (All trips) 1096 96 Specified Data Output 3
1012 12 Failure FL (Except EF, OCL, EPHO, OL2) 1098 98 Specified Data Output 4
1014 14 Overcurrent (OC) Alarm 1100 100 Specified Data Output 5
1016 16 ASD Overload (OL1) Alarm 1102 102 Specified Data Output 6
1018 18 Motor Overload (OL2) Alarm 1104 104 Specified Data Output 7
1020 20 Overheat Alarm 1106 106 Light Load
1022 22 Overvoltage Alarm 1108 108 Heavy Load
1024 24 Main Circuit (MOFF) Undervoltage Alarm 1110 110 Positive Torque Limit
1026 26 Low Current Alarm 1112 112 Negative Torque Limit
1028 28 Overtorque Alarm 1114 114 External Rush Suppression Relay Activated
1030 30 DBR Overload Alarm 1118 118 Completion of Stop Positioning
1032 32 Emergency Off Active 1120 120 L-STOP
1034 34 Retry Active 1122 122 Power Failure Synchronized Operation
1036 36 Pattern Operation Switching Output 1124 124 Traverse in Progress
1038 38 PID Deviation Limit 1126 126 Traverse Deceleration Active
1040 40 Run/Stop 1128 128 Part Replacement Alarm
1042 42 Serious Failure (OCA, OCL, EF, phase failure, etc.) 1130 130 Overtorque Alarm
1044 44 Light failure (OL, OC1, 2, 3, OP) 1132 132 Frequency Command ½ Selection
1046 46 Commercial Power/ASD Switching Output 1 1134 134 Failure FL (Except Emergency Off)
1048 48 Commercial power/ASD switching Output 2 1222 222 My Function Output 1
1050 50 Cooling Fan ON/OFF 1224 224 My Function Output 2
1052 52 Jogging Operation Active (jog run active) 1226 226 My Function Output 3
1054 54 Panel/Terminal Board Operation Switching 1228 228 My Function Output 4
1056 56 Cumulative Run-time Alarm 1230 230 My Function Output 5
1058 58 ProfiBus/DeviceNet/CC-Link Communication Error 1232 232 My Function Output 6
1060 60 Forward/Reverse Switching 1234 234 My Function Output 7
1062 62 Ready for Operation 1 1236 236 My Function Output 8
1064 64 Ready for Operation 2 1238 238 My Function Output 9
1068 68 Brake Release (BR) 1240 240 My Function Output 10
1070 70 Alarm Status Active 1242 242 My Function Output 11
1072 72 Forward Speed Limit (torque control) 1244 244 My Function Output 12
1074 74 Reverse Speed Limit (torque control) 1246 246 My Function Output 13
1076 76 ASD Healthy Output 1248 248 My Function Output 14
1078 78 RS485 Communication Error 1250 250 My Function Output 15
1080 80 Error Code Output 1 1252 252 My Function Output 16
1082 82 Error Code Output 2 1254 254 Always OFF
1084 84 Error Code Output 3
Note: Only positive logic is available for the listed parameters.
242 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Table 9. Trace Back Data Selections.
Selection
Number Comm. Number Trace (Monitor) Function Resolution
/Unit
0FD00 Output Frequency 0.01 Hz
1FD02 Frequency Reference 0.01 Hz
2FD03 Output Current 0.01%
3FD04 DC Bus Voltage 0.01%
4FD05 Output Voltage 0.01%
5FD15 Compensated Frequency 0.01 Hz
6FD16 Speed Feedback (realtime) 0.01 Hz
7FD17 Speed Feedback (1 sec filter) 0.01 Hz
8FD18 Torque 0.01%
9FD19 Torque Command 0.01%
11 FD20 Torque Current 0.01%
12 FD21 Excitation Current 0.01%
13 FD22 PID Feedback Value 0.01 Hz
14 FD23 Motor Overload Ratio 0.01%
15 FD24 ASD Overload Ratio 0.01%
16 FD25 DBR Overload Ratio 1%
17 FD28 DBR Load Ratio 1%
18 FD29 Input Power 0.01 kW
19 FD30 Output Power 0.01 kW
23 FE39 V/I Option (AI2) 1%
24 FE35 RR Input 0.01%
25 FE36 V/I Input 0.01%
26 FE37 RX Input 0.01%
27 FE38 RX2 Option (AI1) 1%
28 FE40 FM Output 0.01%
29 FE41 AM Output 0.01%
30 FE51 Signed 100% Meter Adjust Value 1%
31 FA51 Communication Data N/A
32 FE50 Signed 185% Meter Adjust Value 1%
33 FE67 Signed 250% Meter Adjust Value 1%
34 FE76 Input Watt-hour 0.01kWhr
35 FE77 Output Watt-hour 0.01kWhr
45 0006/0671 FM/AM Gain Display 1
46 FE60 My Function Monitor 1 (Unsigned Value) 1
47 FE61 My Function Monitor 2 (Unsigned Value) 1
48 FE62 My Function Monitor 3 (Signed Value) 1
49 FE63 My Function Monitor 4 (Signed Value) 1
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 243
Table 10. Input Function Target selections and the associated Communications Number.
Input Setting/Communication
Number Function Resolution
/Unit
FM/AM/FP
Input Setting Comm.
Number
Monitor
Display Input
Setting
Comm.
Number
2000 FD00 3000 FE00 Output Frequency 0.01 Hz
2002 FD02 3002 FE02 Frequency Reference 0.01 Hz
2003 FD03 3003 FE03 Output Current 0.01%
2004 FD04 3004 FE04 DC Bus Voltage 0.01%
2005 FD05 3005 FE05 Output Voltage 0.01%
2015 FD15 3015 FE15 Compensated Frequency 0.01 Hz
2016 FD16 3016 FE16 Speed Feedback (realtime) (See Note 1) 0.01 Hz
2017 FD17 3017 FE17 Speed Feedback (1 sec filter) (See Note 1) 0.01 Hz
2018 FD18 3018 FE18 Torque (See Note 2) 0.01%
2019 FD19 3019 FE19 Torque Command (See Note 2) 0.01%
2020 FD20 3020 FE20 Torque Current (See Note 2) 0.01%
2021 FD21 3021 FE21 Excitation Current 0.01%
2022 FD22 3022 FE22 PID Feedback Value 0.01 Hz
2023 FD23 3023 FE23 Motor Overload Ratio 0.01%
2024 FD24 3024 FE24 ASD Overload Ratio 0.01%
2025 FD25 3025 FE25 DBR Overload Ratio 1%
2028 FD28 3028 FE28 DBR Load Ratio 1%
2029 FD29 3029 FE29 Input Power 0.01 kW
2030 FD30 3030 FE30 Output Power 0.01 kW
3031 FE31 Pattern Operation Group Number 0.1
3032 FE32 Pattern Operation Cycles Remaining 1
3033 FE33 Pattern Operation Preset Speed Number 1
3034 FE34 Pattern Operation Preset Speed Time Remaining 0.1
2050 FD50 Light-Load High-Speed Load Torque Monitor 1 0.01%
2051 FD51 Light-Load High-Speed Load Torque Monitor 2 0.01%
3035 FE35 RR Input 1%
3036 FE36 V/I Input 1%
3037 FE37 RX Input (See Note 2) 1%
3038 FE38 RX2 Option (AI1) Input (See Note 2) 1%
3039 FE39 RX2 Option (AI1) Input 1%
3040 FE40 FM Output 1
3041 FE41 AM Output 1
Note 1: If no PG feedback is used an estimated speed value is displayed.
Note 2: My Function cannot process negative values — A negative value is processed by My Function as an absolute
value.
244 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
3050 FE50 Communication Data Output 2
3051 FE51 Communication Data Output 1
3052 FE52 Communication Data Output 3
3060 FE60 My Function Monitor 1 (Output of Unsigned Value)
3061 FE61 My Function Monitor 2 (Output of Unsigned Value)
3062 FE62 My Function Monitor 3 (Output of Signed Value)
3063 FE63 My Function Monitor 4 (Output of Signed Value)
3066 FE66 Expansion I/O Card 1 CPU Version
3067 FE67 Expansion I/O Card 2 CPU Version
3076 FE76 Integral Input Power 0.01 kW
3077 FE77 Integral Output Power 0.01 kW
3084 FE84 16-Bit BIN/BCD Input Value 1
Table 10. (Continuation) Input Function Target selections and the associated Communications Number.
Input Setting/Communication
Number Function Resolution
/Unit
FM/AM/FP
Input Setting Comm.
Number
Monitor
Display Input
Setting
Comm.
Number
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 245
Table 11. My Function Operator selections.
My Function Computational Selections
Input
Function
Command
Function Name Function Description
0NOP (No Operation) Disables the My Function feature.
1ST Execute data read/transfer.
2STN Execute inverted data read/transfer.
3AND Logical product of A AND B.
4ANDN Logical product of A AND B.
5OR Logical sum of A OR B.
6ORN Logical sum of A OR B.
7EQ Compares data — Outputs 1 if Equal; 0 if not Equal.
8NE Compares data — Outputs 0 if Equal; 1 if not Equal.
9GT Compares data — Outputs 1 if A>B; 0 if A≤B.
10 GE Compares data — Outputs 1 if A≥B; 0 if A<B.
11 LT Compares data — Outputs 1 if A<B; 0 if A≥B.
12 LE Compares data — Outputs 1 if A≤B; 0 if A>B.
13 ASUB Outputs absolute difference between A and B — |A–B|
14 ON (Timer) Enables the On response time delay settings of My Function Time Data 1 – 5
(F928 – F932) for My Function Data.
15 OFF (Timer) Enables the Off response time delay settings of My Function Time Data 1 – 5
(F928 – F932) for My Function Data.
16 COUNT1 (Timer) Outputs a 1 upon reaching the pulse count setting of F933.
17 COUNT2 (Timer) Outputs a 1 upon reaching the pulse count setting of F934.
18 HOLD Outputs the peak output value since powering up or since the last reset.
19 SET Sets data.
20 RESET Resets data.
246 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Alarms, Trips, and Troubleshooting
Alarms and Trips
This section lists the available user-notification codes of the EOI display and provides information that
assists the user in the event that a Fault is incurred. The User Notification codes are displayed as an
indication that a system function or system condition is active (i.e., ATN, DB, and DBON). The code is
displayed on the EOI for the duration of the activation.
If a user setting or an H9 ASD parameter has been exceeded, or if a data transfer function produces an
unexpected result, a condition that is referred to as a Fault is incurred.
An Alarm is an indication that a Fault is imminent if existing operating conditions continue unchanged.
An Alarm may be associated with an output terminal to notify the operator of the condition remotely,
close a contact, or engage a brake. At the least, an Alarm will cause an alarm code to appear on the EOI
display. Table 13 lists the 16 possible Alarm codes that may be displayed during operation of the
H9 ASD.
In the event that the condition that caused the Alarm does not return to its normal operating level within a
specified time, the ASD Faults and a Trip is incurred (Fault and Trip are sometimes used
interchangeably).
A Trip is a safety feature (the result of a Fault) that disables the H9 ASD system and removes the 3-phase
power to the motor in the event that a subsystem of the ASD is malfunctioning, or one or more of the
variables listed below exceeds its normal range (time and/or magnitude).
• Current,
• Voltage,
•Speed,
• Temperature,
• Torque, or
• Load.
See Table 14 on pg. 250 for a listing of the potential Trips and the associated probable causes.
The operating conditions at the time of the trip may be used to help determine the cause of the trip. Listed
below are operating conditions that may be used to assist the operator in correcting the problem or that the
H9 ASD operator should be prepared to discuss when contacting the Toshiba Customer Support Center for
assistance.
• What trip information is displayed?
• Is this a new installation?
• Has the system ever worked properly and what are the recent modifications (if any)?
• What is the ASD/Motor size?
• What is the CPU version and revision level?
• What is the EOI version?
• Does the ASD trip when accelerating, running, decelerating, or when not running?
• Does the ASD reach the commanded frequency?
• Does the ASD trip without the motor attached?
• Does ASD trip with an unloaded motor?
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 247
User Notification Codes
The User Notification codes appear in the top right corner of the Frequency Command screen while the
associated function is active.
User Notification codes notify the user of active functions that are usually only momentary under normal
conditions and are active for the duration of activation only. User notification events are not error
conditions and only convey active system functions to the user.
Table 12. User Notification codes.
Alarms
Table 13 lists the alarm codes that may be displayed during operation of the H9 ASD. Each alarm code
listed is accompanied by a description and a possible cause. In the event that the source of the malfunction
cannot be determined, contact your Toshiba Sales Representative for further information on the condition
and for an appropriate course of action.
The Alarms are listed in the top-down order that they are checked for activation. Only the first to be
detected will be displayed on the Frequency Command screen.
Table 13. H9 ASD Alarms.
LED Function Description
Atn Autotune active Atn indicates that the Autotune function is active.
dbOn DC Braking This code conveys the DC Injection function being carried out. The display shows db when
braking and shows dbOn when the motor shaft stationary function is being carried out.
LED
Display LCD
Display Description Possible Causes
CM1 Comm1 Error Internal communications error. • Improperly programmed ASD.
• Improper communications settings.
• Improperly connected cables.
CM2 Comm2 Error External communications error.
EEmergency Off Output signal from the ASD is
terminated and a brake may be
applied if so configured.
• Stop|Reset pressed twice at the EOI.
• EOFF command received remotely.
• ASD reset required.
MOFF Main
Undervoltage
Undervoltage condition at the
3-phase AC input to the ASD.
• Low 3-phase commercial voltage.
248 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
OC Over Current ASD output current greater than
F601 setting.
• Defective IGBT (U, V, or W).
• ASD output to the motor is connected incorrectly.
Disconnect the motor and retry.
• ASD output phase-to-phase short.
• The ASD is starting into a spinning motor.
• Motor/machine jammed.
• Mechanical brake engaged while the ASD is starting or
while running.
• Accel/Decel time is too short.
• Voltage Boost setting is too high.
• Load fluctuations.
• ASD operating at an elevated temperature.
*OH Overheat ASD ambient temperature
excessive.
• ASD is operating at an elevated temperature.
• ASD is too close to heat-generating equipment.
• Cooling fan vent is obstructed (see Mounting the H9
ASD on pg. 15).
• Cooling fan is inoperative.
• Internal thermistor is disconnected.
OJ Timer Run-time counter exceeded. •Type Reset required; select Clear run timer.
*OLI ASD Overload Load requirement in excess of
the capability of the ASD.
• The carrier frequency is too high.
• An excessive load.
• Acceleration time is too short.
• DC damping rate is set too high.
• The motor is starting into a spinning load after a
momentary power failure.
• The ASD is improperly matched to the application.
OLM Motor Overload Load requirement in excess of
the capability of the motor.
• V/f parameter improperly set.
• Motor is locked.
• Continuous operation at low speed.
• The load is in excess of what the motor can deliver.
*OLR Resistor
Overload Excessive current at the
Dynamic Braking Resistor.
• Deceleration time is too short.
• DBR configuration improperly set.
LED
Display LCD
Display Description Possible Causes
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 249
*OP Overvoltage DC bus voltage exceeds
specifications.
• ASD attempting to start into a spinning motor after a
momentary power loss.
• Incoming commercial power is above the specified
range.
• Decel time is too short.
• Voltage spikes at the 3-phase input; install inductive
filter.
• DBR required.
• DBR resistance value is too high.
• DBR function is turned off.
• Overvoltage Stall feature is turned off.
• System is regenerating.
• Load instability.
• Disable the Ridethrough function (F302).
OT Overtorque Torque requirement is in excess
of the setting of F616 or F617
for a time longer than the setting
of F618.
• ASD is not correctly matched to the application.
•F616 or F617 setting is too low.
• Obstructed load.
*POFF Control
Undervoltage Undervoltage condition at the 5,
15, or the 24 VDC supply.
• Defective Control board.
• Excessive load on power supply.
• Low input voltage.
PtSt Reference Point Two speed-reference frequency
setpoint values are too close to
each other.
• Two speed reference frequency setpoints are too close to
each other (increase the difference).
UC Undercurrent With the Low-current Trip
(F610) parameter enabled, the
output current of the ASD is
below the level defined at F611
and remains there for a time
longer than the setting of F612.
this function sets the low-current trip threshold
* Reset ignored if active.
LED
Display LCD
Display Description Possible Causes
250 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Trips/Faults
A Trip is a H9 ASD response to a Fault (though, Fault and Trip are sometimes used interchangeably). A
Trip is a safety feature that disables the ASD system in the event that a subsystem of the ASD is
malfunctioning or a parameter setting has been exceeded.
Listed in Table 14 are the Faults that may result in a Trip and the possible causes. When a Trip is
incurred the system displays the Fault screen. The Fault screen identifies the active Fault.
A more user-friendly indication of the active Fault will be displayed at the LCD screen.
Table 14
LED Display LCD Display Possible Causes
EEmergency Off • Emergency Off command received via EOI or remotely.
E-10 Sink/Source Setting
Error
• Improperly positioned Sink/Source jumper on the Terminal board or on an
option device (see J100 at the Terminal PCB of the ASD).
•Sink/Source configuration is incorrect.
E-11 Brake Sequence
Response Error
•F630 is set to a non-zero value.
• Braking sequence discrete input and output terminals are not setup properly.
E-12 Encoder Signal-Loss
Error
• ASD is configured to receive a signal from a shaft-mounted encoder and no
signal is being received while running.
• Disconnection at the Encoder circuit.
• Motor is stopped and is generating torque via torque limit control.
• ASD is not configured properly.
E-13 Over Speed • Result of a motor speed that is greater than the commanded speed when
using an encoder for speed control.
• Improper encoder connection or setup information.
• Defective encoder.
E-17 Key Failure • Same key input for 20 seconds or more.
E-18 Terminal Input Error • V/I signal loss.
• Terminal Board failure.
• P24 overcurrent condition.
•F633 setting is too high.
E-19 CPU Communication
Error
• CPU data Transmit/Receive error.
E-20 V/f Control Error • Torque processing error.
• Make service call.
E-21 CPU Processing
Error
• Software processed incorrectly.
• Make service call.
E-22 Logic Input Voltage
Error
• Incorrect voltage applied to the discrete input terminals.
E-23 Optional Expansion
Input Terminal Board
1 Error
• Optional Expansion Input Terminal Board 1 is defective.
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 251
E-24 Optional Expansion
Input Terminal Board
2 Error
• Optional Expansion Input Terminal Board 2 is defective.
E-25 Stop Positioning
Retention Error
• Load movement while stopped.
•F381 setting is too low.
• Encoder malfunction.
• Creep speed is too high.
E-26 CPU2 Fault •CPU malfunction.
• Control board malfunction.
E-50/E-51 Sink/Source Setting
Error
• Improperly positioned Sink/Source jumper on the Terminal board or on an
option device (see J100 at the Terminal PCB of the ASD).
•Sink/Source configuration is incorrect.
EEP1 EEPROM Fault • EEPROM write malfunction.
• Make a service call.
EEP2/EEP3 EEPROM Data Fault • EEPROM read malfunction.
• Make a service call.
EF1/EF2
(Earth) Ground Fault
• Ground fault at the motor.
• Ground fault at the output of the ASD.
• Current leakage to Earth Ground.
EPHI Input Phase Failure • 3-phase input to the ASD is low or missing at the R, S, or T input terminals.
EPHO Output Phase Failure • 3-phase output from the ASD is low or missing at the U, V, or W output
terminals or at the input to the motor.
ERR2 RAM Fault • Internal RAM malfunction.
• Make a service call.
ERR3 ROM Fault • Internal ROM malfunction.
• Make a service call.
ERR4
CPU Fault
•CPU malfunction.
• Control board malfunction.
• Make a service call.
ERR5 Communication
Error
• Communication time out error.
• Communication malfunction.
• Improper or loose connection.
• Improper system settings.
ERR6 Gate Array Fault • Main Gate Array is defective.
ERR7 Low Current • Improper Low Current detection level settings at F609 – F612.
ERR8 Option Device Fault • Check installation, connections, and option device manual.
ERR9 Flash Memory Fault • Flash memory malfunction.
• Make a service call.
LED Display LCD Display Possible Causes
252 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
ETN Autotune Error •Autotune readings that are significantly inconsistent with the configuration
information.
• A non-3-phase motor is being used.
• Incorrect settings at F400 or F413.
• Using a motor that has a significantly smaller rating than the ASD.
• ASD output cabling is too small, too long, or is being housed in a cable tray
with other cables that are producing an interfering EMF.
• Motor is running during the Autotune function.
ETN1 •F402 adjustment required (Motor temperature is too high).
•F410 adjustment required (Motor Constant 1 improperly set).
ETN2 •F412 adjustment required (Motor Constant 3 improperly set).
ETN3 • Autotune setting F400 is set to Auto Calculation and there is a problem with
the Motor Constant readings.
ETYP Typeform Error • Firmware information (typeform) loaded into the Gate Driver board is
inconsistent with the device in which the firmware is being used.
•The Gate Driver board has been replaced.
•The Gate Driver board is defective.
None No Errors • No active faults.
OC1 Overcurrent During
Acceleration
• Improper V/f setting.
• Restart from a momentary power outage.
• The ASD is starting into a rotating motor.
• ASD/Motor not properly matched.
• Phase-to-phase short (U, V, or W).
•Accel time too short.
•Voltage Boost setting is too high.
• Motor/machine jammed.
• Mechanical brake engaged while the ASD is running.
• ASD current exceeds 340% of the rated FLA on ASDs that are 100 HP or
less during acceleration. On ASDs that are greater than 100 HP, this fault
occurs when the ASD current exceeds 320% of the rated FLA during
acceleration.
OC1P Overheat During
Acceleration
• Cooling fan inoperative.
• Ventilation openings are obstructed.
• Internal thermistor is disconnected.
• Acceleration time is too short.
• Improper V/f setting.
• ASD or the motor is improperly matched to the application.
LED Display LCD Display Possible Causes
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 253
OC2 Overcurrent During
Deceleration
• Phase-to-phase short (U, V, or W).
• Deceleration time is too short.
• Motor/machine jammed.
• Mechanical brake engaged while the ASD is running.
• ASD current exceeds 340% of the rated FLA on ASDs that are 100 HP or
less during deceleration. On ASDs that are greater than 100 HP, it occurs
when the ASD current exceeds 320% of the rated FLA during deceleration.
OC2P Overheat During
Deceleration
• Cooling fan inoperative.
• Ventilation openings are obstructed.
• Internal thermistor is disconnected.
• Deceleration time is too short.
• DC Injection current is too high.
• ASD or the motor is improperly matched to the application.
OC3 Overcurrent During
Run
• Load fluctuations.
• ASD is operating at an elevated temperature.
• ASD current exceeds 340% of the rated FLA on ASDs that are 100 HP or
less during a fixed-speed run or if during a fixed-speed run the ASD
overheats. On ASDs that are greater than 100 HP, it occurs when the ASD
current exceeds 320% of the rated FLA on a fixed-speed run.
OC3P Overheat During Run • Cooling fan inoperative.
• Ventilation openings are obstructed.
• Internal thermistor is disconnected.
• Improper V/f setting.
• ASD or the motor is improperly matched to the application.
OCA1 or OCL U-Phase Overcurrent • Low impedance at the U lead of the ASD output.
OCA2 or OCL V-Phase Overcurrent • Low impedance at the V lead of the ASD output.
OCA3 or OCL W-Phase Overcurrent • Low impedance at the W lead of the ASD output.
OCR Dynamic Braking
Resistor Overcurrent
• ASD inability to discharge the bus voltage during regeneration.
• No dynamic braking resistor (DBR) installed.
• Deceleration time is too short.
• Improper DBR setup information.
• Defective IGBT7 (or IGBT7 ckt.).
• 3-phase input voltage is above specification.
OH Overheat • Cooling fan inoperative.
• Ventilation openings are obstructed.
• Internal thermistor is disconnected.
OH2 External Overheat • Excessive-heat signature received at the TB3 – TH1(+) and TH1(-)
terminals. See F637 for setup information.
LED Display LCD Display Possible Causes
254 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
OL1 ASD Overload • Acceleration time is too short.
• DC Injection current is too high.
• Improper V/f setting.
• Motor running during restart.
• ASD or the motor is improperly matched to the application.
OL2 Motor Overload • Improper V/f setting.
• Motor is locked.
• Continuous operation at low speed.
• Load requirement exceeds ability of the motor.
• Startup frequency setting adjustment required.
OLR Dynamic Braking
Resistor Overload
• Deceleration time is too short.
• DBR setting adjustment required.
• Overvoltage Stall setting adjustment required.
OP1 Overvoltage During
Acceleration
• Motor running during restart.
OP2 Overvoltage During
Deceleration
• Deceleration time is too short.
• DBR value is too high.
• DBR required (DBR setup required).
• Stall protection is disabled.
• 3-phase input voltage is out of specification.
• Input reactance required.
OP3 Overvoltage During
Run
• Load fluctuations.
• 3-Phase input voltage out of specification.
• DBR required (DBR setup required).
OT Overtorque • A torque requirement by the load in excess of the setting of F616 or F617 for
a time longer than the setting of F618.
• The ASD is improperly matched to the application.
• The load is obstructed.
SOUT Step-Out
(for PM Motor Only)
• Motor shaft is locked.
• Output phase is open.
• Operating a reciprocating load.
UP1 Main Power
Undervoltage
• Input 3-phase voltage is too low.
• Momentary power failure longer than the time setting of F628.
UP2 Control Power
Undervoltage
• This fault is caused by an undervoltage condition at the 5, 15, or the 24 VDC
supply.
• 3-phase input voltage low.
LED Display LCD Display Possible Causes
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 255
Viewing Trip Information
In the event that the condition causing an Alarm does not return to the normal operating level within a
specified time, the H9 ASD Faults and a Trip is incurred.
When a trip occurs, the resultant error information may be viewed either from the Trip History screen
(Program ⇒ Utilities ⇒ Trip History) or from the Monitor screen.
Trip History
The Trip History screen records the system parameters for up to 20 trips. The recorded trips are
numbered from zero to 19. Once the Trip History record reaches trip number 19, the oldest recorded trip
will be deleted with each new record stored (first-in first-out). The Trip # field may be selected and
scrolled through to view the recorded trip information for a given trip number. The monitored parameters
are listed in Table 15 as At-trip Recorded Parameters (parameter readings at the time that the trip
occurred).
Table 15. Trip History Record Parameters.
Trip Record at Monitor Screen
The at-trip condition of the last 4 incurred trips may be viewed at the Monitor Screen. The Monitor
Screen displays the records of up to four trips and catalogs each trip as Past Trip #1 through Past Trip #4
(see pg. 43). Once reset (Type Reset), the trip records are erased. If no trips have occurred since being
powered up or since the last reset, None is displayed for each trip record.
The Monitor Screen at-trip record is erased when the H9 ASD is reset.
Note: An improper H9 ASD setup may cause some trips — reset the ASD to the Factory
Default settings before pursuing a systemic malfunction (Program ⇒ Utilities ⇒ Type
Reset ⇒ Reset to Factory Settings).
Clearing a Trip
Once the cause of the trip has been corrected, performing a Reset re-enables the H9 ASD for normal
operation.
The record of a trip may also be cleared using either of the following methods:
• Cycling power (trip info may be saved via F602 if desired),
• Pressing the Stop|Reset key twice,
• Remotely via the communications channel,
• Momentarily connecting terminal RES to CC of the Terminal Board, or
• Via Program ⇒ Utilities ⇒ Type Reset ⇒ Clear Past Trip (clears Monitor Screen records only).
At-trip Recorded Parameters
1) Trip Number 8) Frequency Reference 15) Feedback (1 sec.) 22) ASD Overload
2) Trip Type 9) Bus Voltage 16) Torque 23) DBR Overload
3) Time and Date 10) Discrete Input Status 17) Torque Reference 24) Motor Load
4) Frequency at Trip 11) OUT1/OUT2/FL Status 18) Torque Current 25) ASD Load
5) Output Current 12) Timer 19) Excitation Current 26) DBR Load
6) Output Voltage 13) Post Compensation Frequency 20) PID Value 27) Input Power
7) Direction 14) Feedback (inst.) 21) Motor Overload 28) Output Power
Trip records are comprised of the full list of monitored parameters (28).
256 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Enclosure Dimensions and Conduit Plate
Information
The H9 ASD part numbering convention is as indicated below.
The enclosure dimensions for each typeform and the associated conduit plate type are listed in Tables 16
and 17.
The conduit plates that are referenced in Tables 16 and 17 are shown in Figures 35, 36, and 37.
H9 Part Numbering Convention.
Note: The Type 1 enclosed versions of these drives meet or exceed the specification UL 50-
1995, the Standard for Heating and Cooling Equipment, and complies with the
applicable requirements for installation in a compartment handling conditioned air.
Note: All Toshiba ASD enclosures carry an IP20 rating.
Enclosure Dimensions
Table 16. 230-Volt H9 ASD Systems.
Model Number
VT130H9U
Enclosure
Figure
Number
A
Height
(in/mm)
B
Width
(in/mm)
C
Depth
(in/mm)
D
Mounting Hole
Height
(in/mm)
E
Mounting Hole
Width
(in/mm)
R
Mounting Hole
Diameter
(in/mm)
Conduit
Plate
(Figure 35,
36, and 37)
2035
Figure 32
12.4/315 6.1/155 6.6/168 8.7/221 4.5/114
0.24/6.10
Figure 35-A
2055
2080 15.0/381 6.9/175 6.6/168 11.1/282 6.2/158 Figure 35-B
2110 Figure 35-C
2160
19.3/490 9.1/231 7.6/193 15.2/386 8.3/211 Figure 35-D2220
2270
2330
Figure 33
25.9/658 11.1/282 13.2/335 25.0/635
8.0/203
0.24/6.10 Figure 35-E
2400
33.1/841 14.3/363 15.0/381 32.3/820 0.38/9.65 Figure 36-G
2500
2600
2750
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 257
Table 17. 460-Volt H9 ASD Systems.
210K Figure 34 51.7/1313 14.6/371 17.6/447 50.2/1275 9.2/234 0.69/17.53 Figure 36-I
212K 53.1/1349 15.7/399 17.6/447 51.7/1313 9.9/252
Model Number
VT130H9U
Enclosure
Figure
Number
A
Height
(in/mm)
B
Width
(in/mm)
C
Depth
(in/mm)
D
Mounting Hole
Height
(in/mm)
E
Mounting Hole
Width
(in/mm)
R
Mounting Hole
Diameter
(in/mm)
Conduit
Plate
(Figure 35,
36, and 37)
4055
Figure 32
12.4/315 6.1/155 6.6/168 8.7/221 4.5/114
0.24/6.10
Figure 35-B
4080
4110 15.0/381 6.9/175
11.1/282
6.2/158 Figure 35-C
4160 15.1/384 8.3/211 7.6/193 7.5/191 Figure 35-D
4220
4270 19.3/490 9.1/231 7.6/193 15.2/386 8.3/211 0.24/6.10 Figure 35-E
4330
4400
Figure 33
25.9/658 11.1/282 13.2/335 25.0/635
8.0/203
Figure 35-F
4500 30.8/782 11.1/282 14.3/363 29.7/754
0.38/9.65
Figure 36-H
4600
4750
36.1/917 14.3/363 15.3/389 35.3/897 Figure 36-I410K
412K
415K
Figure 34
51.7/1313 14.6/371
17.6/447
50.2/1275 9.2/234
0.69/17.53
Figure 36-J
420K 53.1/1349 15.7/399 51.7/1313 9.9/252 Figure 36-K
425K 63.1/1603 15.0/381 61.6/1565 Figure 36-L
430K 68.5/1740 18.9/480 67.0/1701 13.8/351 Figure 37-M435K
440K 70.0/1778 25.6/650 68.5/1740 21.3/541
Table 16.Table Continuation 230-Volt H9 ASD Systems.
Model Number
VT130H9U
Enclosure
Figure
Number
A
Height
(in/mm)
B
Width
(in/mm)
C
Depth
(in/mm)
D
Mounting Hole
Height
(in/mm)
E
Mounting Hole
Width
(in/mm)
R
Mounting Hole
Diameter
(in/mm)
Conduit
Plate
(Figure 35,
36, and 37)
258 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Figure 32. See Tables 16 and 17 for actual dimensions.
Figure 33. See Tables 16 and 17 for actual dimensions.
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 259
Figure 34. See Tables 16 and 17 for actual dimensions.
260 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Figure 35. See Tables 16 and 17 for the associated device. Dimensions are in in/cm.
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 261
Figure 36. See Tables 16 and 17 for the associated device. Dimensions are in in/cm.
262 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Figure 37. See Table 17 for the associated device. Dimensions are in in/cm.
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 263
Current/Voltage Specifications
Table 18. 230 Volt UL Type-1/IP-20 Chassis standard ratings table.
Model
Number
VT130H9U
100% Output
Current
Continuous
Overload Current
120% for 60
Seconds
Input Voltage
3-Ph 50/60
± 2 Hz
Output Voltage
3-Ph Variable
Frequency
Typical
Motor HP
2035 9.6 A 11.5 A
200 – 240 VAC
(±10%)
Input Voltage
Level (Max.)
3.0
2055 15.2 A 18.2 A 5.0
2080 22 A 26 A 7.5
2110 28 A 34 A 10
2160 42 A 50 A 15
2220 54 A 65 A 20
2270 68 A 82 A 25
2330 80 A 96 A 30
2400 104 A 125 A 40
2500 130 A 156 A 50
2600 154 A 185 A 60
2750 192 A 230 A 75
210K 248 A 298 A 100
212K 312 A 374 A 125
264 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Table 19. 460 Volt UL Type-1/IP-20 Chassis standard ratings table.
Model
Number
VT130H9U
100% Output
Current
Continuous
Overload Current
120% for 60
Seconds
Input Voltage
3-Ph 50/60
± 2 Hz
Output Voltage
3-Ph Variable
Frequency
Typical
Motor HP
4055 7.6 A 9.0 A
380 – 480 VAC
(±10%)
Input Voltage
Level (Max.)
5.0
4080 11 A 13 A 7.5
4110 14 A 17 A 10
4160 21 A 25 A 15
4220 27 A 32 A 20
4270 34 A 41 A 25
4330 40 A 48 A 30
4400 52 A 62 A 40
4500 65 A 78 A 50
4600 77 A 92 A 60
4750 96 A 115 A 75
410K 124 A 149 A 100
412K 156 A 187 A 125
415K 180 A 216 A 150
420K 240 A 288 A 200
425K 302 A 362 A 250
430K 361 A 433 A 300
435K 414 A 497 A 350
440K 477 A 572 A 400
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 265
Cable/Terminal/Torque Specifications
Installation should conform to the 2005 National Electrical Code Article 110 (NEC) (Requirements for Electrical
Installations), all regulations of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration, and any other
applicable national, regional, or industry codes and standards.
Note: The following ratings are guidelines and shall not be the sole determining factor of the
lug or wire size used with the H9 ASD. Application-specific applicables, wire insulation
type, conductor material, and local and regional regulations are but a few of the
considerations when selecting the actual lug and wire type to be used with the H9 ASD.
Note: Cable/Terminal specifications are based on the rated current of the H9 ASD and Do
Not include the 10% Service Factor.
Note: Use only 75° C copper wire/cable for motor and power connections.
For further installation information see the section titled Installation and Connections on pg. 14.
Note: (*) Indicates that the item is one of a set of two parallel cables.
Table 20. 230-Volt H9 ASD Cable/Terminal/Torque Specifications.
Model
Number
VT130H9U
MCP Rating
(Amps)
Wire/Cable Size Lug Size Range Terminal
Board Torque
AWG or kcmil
Input/Output Power Wire-Size/Lug-Capacity for
Input/Output Power
TB1 – 4
Terminals 3Ø-Input 3Ø-Output
Recommended Maximum 3Ø-Input 3Ø-Output In-Lbs./Nm
2035 30 14 10 14 to 8
20
(3-core shield)
5.3/0.6
11.5/1.3
2055 30 10 10
2080 50 8 8 12 to 8 17.7/2.0
2110 50 8 8
2160 75 6 3
8 to 3 21/2.42220 100 4 3
2270 125 3 3
2330 150 2 2 12 to 1/0 4 to 1/0 50/5.7 53/6
2400 175 1/0 4/0
6 to 250 2 to 300 275/31 168/19
2500 200 2/0 4/0
2600 250 3/0 4/0
2750 300 4/0 4/0
210K 400 *3/0 *1/0 6 to 250 275/31
212K 500 *250 *250
266 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Note: (*) Indicates that the item is one of a set of two parallel cables.
Note: (**) Indicates that the item is one of a set of three parallel cables.
Table 21. 460-Volt H9 ASD Cable/Terminal/Torque Specifications.
Model
Number
VT130H9U
MCP Rating
(Amps)
Wire/Cable Size Lug Size Range Terminal
Board Torque
AWG or kcmil
Input/Output Power Wire-Size/Lug-Capacity
for Input/Output Power
TB1 – 4
Terminals 3Ø-Input 3Ø-Output
Recommended Maximum 3Ø-Input 3Ø-Output In-Lbs./Nm
4055 15 14 10 14 to 8
20
(3-core shield)
Torque to 5.3/0.6
11.5/1.3
4080 20 12 10
4110 30 10 812 to 8 17.7/2.0
4160 30 8 4 10 to 4
21/2.4
4220 50 8 4
4270 75 4 3 8 to 3
4330 75 6 3
4400 100 4 2
12 to 1/0 4 to 1/0 50/5.7 53/6.04500 100 3 2
4600 125 2 2
4750 175 1/0 4/0
6 to 250 1 to 300 275/31 168/19410K 200 2/0 4/0
412K 250 4/0 4/0
415K 300 *1/0 *4/0
6 to 250 275/31420K 400 *3/0 *250
425K 500 *250 *250
430K 600 *300 *350 4 to 350 375/42.4435K 700 *350 *350
440K 800 **250 **350 0 to 500 6 to 350
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 267
Short Circuit Protection Recommendations
Table 22. 230/240 and 400/480-Volt ASD recommended circuit breaker selection.
Model Number
VT130H9U HP Continuous Output Current
(Amps) Circuit Breaker Part Number
2035 3.0 10.0 HLL36025
2055 5.0 17.5 HLL36025
2080 7.5 27.5 HLL36040
2110 10 33.0 HLL36050
2160 15 54.0 HLL36070
2220 20 66.0 HLL36090
2270 25 76.0 HLL36100
2330 30 90.0 HLL36100
2400 40 120 HLL36125
2500 50 152 HLL36150
2600 60 176 JLL36200
2750 75 221
Contact Toshiba Customer Service210K 100 285
212K 125 365
4055 510.5 HLL36025
4080 7.5 14.3 HLL36040
4110 10 17.6 HLL36050
4160 15 27.7 HLL36070
4220 20 33.0 HLL36090
4270 25 41.0 HLL36100
4330 30 48.0 HLL36100
4400 40 66.0 HLL36125
4500 50 79.0 HLL36150
4600 60 94.0 JLL36200
4750 75 116 JLL36225
410K 100 160 JLL36250
412K 125 179 LIL36300
415K 150 215 LIL36300
420K 200 259 LIL36400
425K 250 314 LIL36400
430K 300 387
Contact Toshiba Customer Service
435K 350 434
440K 400 495
268 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Dynamic Braking Resistor Wire/Cable
Specifications
Thermal protection for the DBR circuit (see Figure 38. on pg. 269) or an input contactor that will open the
input 3-phase power circuit (see on pg. 269) to the H9 ASD in the event that a DBR over-temperature
condition occurs is a requirement. If a DBR failure occurs or should a power source over-voltage
condition occur the DBR thermal protection circuitry will prevent hazardous DBR temperatures.
To use the Dynamic Braking function the following requirements must be met — 1) Enable the DBR
function, 2) selected a Resistance Value, and 3) set the Continuous Braking Wattage value at F304,
F308, and F309, respectively.
Set the Braking Resistance Overload Time at parameter F639 to establish how long the braking resistor
is allowed to sustain the overload condition before a trip is incurred (the factory default setting is 5
seconds).
Light-duty and Heavy-Duty resistors vary from a few ohms to several hundred ohms. The appropriate
resistance size will be typeform- and application-specific. Contact your Toshiba Sales Representative or
the Toshiba Customer Service Department for more information on your specific DBR requirements.
Heavy duty DBRs should be wired using the same gauge wire as the motor leads. Light duty DBRs may
use one wire size smaller (AWG or kcmil) than the motor leads.
Because the heat generated by the DBR will affect the cooling capacity of the heat sink, the resistor pack
should be mounted above or to the side of the ASD — Never below the ASD. Maintain a minimum of six
inches between the resistor pack and the ASD unit.
The total wire length from the ASD to the DBR should not exceed ten feet.
The wiring from the ASD to the DBR should be twisted approximately two twists per foot throughout the
length of the wire.
If EMI/RFI noise is of concern, the DBR wiring should be three-core screened cable. The screen should
connect to the ASD enclosure and the resistor enclosure.
Though the in-line DBR fuse and the thermal relay are designed into the system to prevent a catastrophic
DBR over-current condition, they are both intended to be used as backup protection ONLY.
A proper typeform-specific and application-specific system setup that includes using the appropriate
Dynamic Braking Resistor and Overload settings will be required.
CAUTION
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 269
Figure 38.
Figure 39.
Braking Resistor circuit with a thermal fuse.
Shown below is the connection diagram using an MCCB with a Trip Coil (TC) in lieu of an input
contactor. A control transformer is required for 400-volt models only. The primary MC is opened in
the event of a DBR over-current detection. With no power supplied to the ASD the failure will not
be displayed on the EOI; see the Trip History for failure information once restarted.
270 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
H9 ASD Optional Devices
The ASD may be equipped with several options which are used to expand the functionality of the ASD.
Table 23 lists the available options and their functions.
Table 23. H9 Optional devices and functions.
Part Identifier Device Name Device Function
ASD-CAB-USB H9 USB Communication Cable Used to connect the ASD to a PC via the USB port of the
PC.
ASD-EOI-HH-G9 Display Module Docking Station Used to flash the 9-series display module.
ASD-MTG-KIT9 9-Series EOI Remote Mounting Kit Hardware used to mount 9-series ASD EOI remotely.
ASD-TB1-SIM9 ASD Input/Output Signal Simulator Used to simulate the ASD I/O monitor and control signals.
DEV002Z DeviceNet Module
Allows the H9 ASD to communicate via DeviceNet with
other DeviceNet-supported equipment including a host
computer.
ETB003Z Expansion I/O Board 1 Expands the Input/Output functionality of the H9 ASD.
ETB004Z Expansion I/O Board 2 Expands the Input/Output functionality of the H9 ASD.
PDP002Z ProfiBus DP Module
Allows the H9 ASD to communicate via ProfiBus with
other ProfiBus-supported equipment including a host
computer.
USB001Z USB-to-Serial Converter
Allows for the USB port of a computer to be used as a
communications port for monitoring and controlling the
H9 ASD.
VEC007Z PG Vector Feedback Board Allows for the use of Vector Control using a sensor (for
use with a 5-volt encoder).
VEC004Z PG Vector Feedback Board Allows for the use of Vector Control using a sensor (for
use with a 12-volt encoder).
VEC005Z PG Vector Feedback Board Allows for the use of Vector Control using a sensor (for
use with a 15-volt encoder).
VEC006Z PG Vector Feedback Board Allows for the use of Vector Control using a sensor (for
use with a 24-volt encoder).
Note: See the user manual of the applicable option for further information on each item.
Index
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 271
Symbols
0 Hz Command Output, 125
0 Hz Dead Band Signal, 124
16-Bit Binary/BCD Input, 87
A
Abnormal Speed Detection Time, 187
Abnormal Speed Settings, 52
Acc/Dec #1 – #4 Settings, 56
Acc/Dec Pattern 1, 165
Acc/Dec Pattern 1 – 4, 167
Acc/Dec Pattern 2, 166
Acc/Dec Special, 56
Accel/Decel #1 Settings, 46
Accel/Decel Operation After Torque Limit, 159
Accel/Decel Suspend, 144
Accel/Decel Switching Frequency 1, 167
Acceleration, 80
Acceleration Suspend Frequency, 145
Acceleration Suspend Time, 145
Acceleration Time 1, 80
Acceleration Time 2, 164
Acceleration Time 3, 168
Acceleration Time 4, 169
Acceleration/Deceleration Pattern 3, 169
Acceleration/Deceleration Pattern 4, 170
Acceleration/Deceleration Switching Frequency 2, 169
Acceleration/Deceleration Switching Frequency 3, 170
Adding Input Selection, 193
AI2, 88
AI2 (Option V/I) Input Bias, 163
AI2 (Option V/I) Input Gain, 163
Alarm Prohibition, 50
Alarms, 246, 247
Always ON 1 Terminal 1, 88
AM, 21, 23
AM Bias Adjustment, 197
AM Output, 43
AM Output Gradient Characteristic, 197
AM Output Terminal Adjustment, 194
AM Output Terminal Function, 194
AM/FM Output, 25
Analog Filter, 54
Analog Function Assigned Object 11, 228
Analog Function Assigned Object 21, 229
Analog Input Filter, 109
Analog Input Function Target 11, 228
Analog Input Function Target 21, 228
Analog Output Terminals, 47
Annual Average Ambient Temperature, 191
ASD Capacity, 13
ASD Input Phase Failure Detection, 184
ASD Load, 43
ASD Number, 205
ASD OL (Overload) Trip, 43
ASD Operation at Disconnect, 212
ASD Output Phase Failure Detection, 183
ASD Overload, 43, 189, 254
ASD-side Switching Wait Time, 147
ASD-to-ASD Communications (2-wire), 206, 209
Atn, 247
At-trip Recorded Parameters, 255
Auto Accel/Decel, 71
Auto Restart, 133
Automatic Acceleration/Deceleration, 76
Automatic Function Selection, 85
Automatic Light-Load High-Speed
Operation Frequency, 141
Automatic Torque Boost, 76
Autotune Error, 252
Autotuning, 10
Autotuning 1, 151
Autotuning 2, 152
B
Base Frequency 1, 81
Base Frequency 2, 98
Base Frequency 3, 99
Base Frequency 4, 100
Base Frequency Voltage, 52
Base Frequency Voltage 1, 152
Base Frequency Voltage 2, 98
Base Frequency Voltage 3, 99
Base Frequency Voltage 4, 100
Baud Rate (2-wire RS485), 204
Baud Rate (4-wire RS485), 208
Bezel Mounting Hardware, 33
BIN Input Point 1 Frequency, 121
BIN Input Point 1 Setting, 120
BIN Input Point 2 Frequency, 121
BIN Input Point 2 Setting, 121
Block Read Data 1, 214
Block Read Data 2, 214
Block Read Data 3, 214
Block Read Data 4, 215
Block Read Data 5, 215
Block Write Data 1, 213
272 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Block Write Data 2, 213
Brake Answer Wait Time, 188
Braking Mode Selection, 142
Braking Resistance Overload Time
(10x rated torque), 192
Braking Time Learning Function, 144
C
Cable/Terminal Specifications, 265
Carrier Frequency, 56
Carrier Frequency Control Mode, 138
Carrier Frequency/Thermal derating, 190
CC, 21
CCA, 21
Change Step Selection 1, 200
Change Step Selection 2, 200
Changed From Default, 51, 74
Changed From Default screen, 74
Charge LED, 9, 16
Circuit breaker configuration, 15
Clearing a Trip, 255
Clock Setup, 50
CM1, 247
CM2, 247
CMOD/FMOD Change Lockout, 202
Command Control Selections, 39
Command Mode, 77
Command Mode and Frequency Mode Control, 36
Command Source, 72
Commercial Power Switching Freq. Hold Time, 147
Commercial Power Switching Wait Time, 147
Commercial Power/ASD Output Switching, 146
Commercial Power/ASD Switching Frequency, 147
Communication Adjustments, 64
Communication Error, 251
Communication Settings, 64
Communications, 64
Communications Option (DeviceNet/Profibus)
Setting 1, 209
Communications Option (DeviceNet/Profibus)
Setting 2, 210
Communications Option (DeviceNet/Profibus)
Setting 8, 211
Communications Option Speed Switch
Monitor DeviceNet/CC-Link, 213
Communications Option Station Address Monitor, 212
Communications setting changes, 74
Communications Time Out Time
(2- and 4-wire RS485), 205
Communications Time-Out Action
(2- and 4-wire RS485), 205
Compensation Frequency, 43
Concerns about this publication, 1
Conduit Plate Information, 256
Connecting the ASD, 16
Connection Diagram, 26
Continuous Dynamic Braking Capacity, 137
Contrast, 51
Control Power Undervoltage, 254
Cooling Fan Control, 186
CPU Fault, 251
Crane/Hoist Settings, 56
Creeping Frequency, 143
Creeping Time, 144
Cumulative Operation Time Alarm, 186
Current Control Proportional Gain, 160
Current/Voltage, 263
Current/Voltage Specifications, 263
Customer Support, 2
D
dbOn, 247
DBR Load, 43
DBR OL (Overload) Trip, 43
DBR over-current, 269
DBR Overload, 43
DC Bus Voltage, 43
DC Injection Braking, 52
DC Injection Braking Current, 124
DC Injection Braking Start Frequency, 124
DC Injection Braking Time, 125
Deceleration Suspend Frequency, 145
Deceleration Suspend Time, 145
Deceleration Time 1, 80
Deceleration Time 2, 164
Deceleration Time 3, 169
Deceleration Time 4, 170
Default Setting Changes, 74
Direct Access, 49
Direction, 45
Disconnection Detection Extended Time, 212
Discrete Input, 21, 25
Discrete Input Terminal Assignment, 236
Discrete Input Terminals, 45
Discrete Output, 21
Display Bias, 200
Display Gradient Characteristic, 199
Display Installation Note, 32
Display Parameters, 49
Display Unit Multiplication Factor, 199
Display Unit Selection, 199
Display Units for Voltage and Current, 199
Disposal, 3
Drive Characteristics, 13
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 273
Drooping, 139
Drooping Control, 60
Drooping Gain, 139
Drooping Insensitive Torque, 140
Drooping Output Filter, 140
Dynamic Braking, 52, 136
Dynamic Braking Resistance, 137
Dynamic Braking Resistor Overcurrent, 253
Dynamic Braking Resistor Overload, 254
E
E, 250
E-10, 250
E-11, 250
E-12, 250
E-13, 250
E-17, 250
E-18, 250
E-19, 250
E-20, 250
E-21, 250
E-22, 250
E-23, 250
E-24, 251
E-25, 251
E-26, 251
EEP1, 251
EEP2, 251
EEP3, 251
EEPROM Data Fault, 251
EEPROM Fault, 251
EF1, 251
EF2, 251
Electronic Operator Interface, 28
Electronic Operator Interface features, 29
Emergency Off, 30, 250
Emergency Off DC Injection Application Time, 183
Emergency Off Mode Settings, 183
Emergency Off Settings, 52
EMG, 247
Enclosure Dimensions, 256
Encoder Loss, 250
End Frequency, 124
EOI Command Screen, 42
EOI Operation, 28
EOI Remote Mounting, 28
EPHI, 251
EPHO, 251
Equipment Inspection, 3
ERR2, 251
ERR3, 251
ERR4, 251
ERR5, 251
ERR6, 251
ERR7, 251
ERR8, 251
ERR9, 251
ESC Key, 29
ETN, 252
ETN1, 252
ETN2, 252
ETN3, 252
ETYP, 252
Excitation Current, 44
Exciting Strengthening Coefficient, 153
Extender Cables, 33
External Overheat, 253
F
F, 21, 22
Fan Control, 186
Fault, 246
Fault Relay (shown faulted), 25
Faults, 246
Feedback, 60
Feedback (1 second), 43
Feedback (inst), 43
Feedback Settings, 60
FLA, 21, 24
FLA, B, and C switching relationship, 24
Flash Memory Fault, 251
FLB, 24
FLC, 21, 24
FM, 21, 23
FM Bias Adjustment, 197
FM Output, 43
FM Output Gradient Characteristic, 196
FM Output Terminal Adjustment, 78
FM Output Terminal Function, 78
FM Voltage/Current Output Switching, 196
FMOD, 104, 202
Forward Run/Reverse Run Disable, 138
Forward Speed Limit Input, 155
Forward Speed Limit Level, 155
Forward/Reverse DC Injection Braking Priority, 125
Forward/Reverse Disable, 54
Forward/Reverse Run Priority Selection, 86
Forward/Reverse Run Selection, 79
FP, 21, 23
FP Output, 25
FP Terminal Assignment, 196
Free Notes, 215
Frequency, 54
Frequency at Trip, 43
274 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Frequency Command Mode, 41
Frequency Command Screen, 31, 73
Frequency Control, 57
Frequency Control Selections, 39
Frequency Mode 1, 77
Frequency Mode 2, 108
Frequency Mode Control, 36
Frequency Mode Priority Switching Frequency, 108
Frequency Point Selection, 207
Frequency Priority Selection, 104
Frequency Reference, 43
Frequency Reference Source, 72
Frequency Setting, 41
Frequency Settings, 46
Fundamental, 46
G
Gate Array Fault, 251
General Safety Information, 1
Ground Fault, 251
Grounding Capacitor Switch, 18
H
H9 Optional Devices, 270
H9 Part Numbering Convention, 256
Handling and Storage, 3
Heavy-Load Torque During Constant
Power Running, 142
Heavy-Load Torque During Power Running, 142
I
I/O and Control, 21
I/O Circuit Configurations, 25
IICC, 21, 23, 26, 105, 107
Important Notice, 4
Initial Setup, 70
Initial UP/DOWN Frequency, 129
Initial UP/DOWN Frequency Rewriting, 129
Input Function Command 1, 215, 217, 218,
223, 224, 225, 226
Input Function Command 2, 216, 217, 218,
223, 224, 225, 227
Input Function Target 1, 215, 217, 218,
222, 224, 225, 226
Input Function Target 2, 216, 217, 218,
223, 224, 225, 227
Input Function Target 3, 216, 217, 219,
223, 224, 226, 227
Input Phase Failure, 251
Input Phase Failure Detection, 184
Input Power, 44
Input Special Functions, 47
Input Terminal 1 (F) Function, 88
Input Terminal 1 (F) Response Time, 95
Input Terminal 10 (LI2) Function, 90
Input Terminal 11 (LI3) Function, 90
Input Terminal 12 (LI4) Function, 91
Input Terminal 13 – 20 Response Time, 96
Input Terminal 13 (LI5) Function, 91
Input Terminal 14 (LI6) Function, 91
Input Terminal 15 (LI7) Function, 92
Input Terminal 16 (LI8) Function, 92
Input Terminal 17 (B12) Function, 96
Input Terminal 18 (B13) Function, 96
Input Terminal 19 (B14) Function, 97
Input Terminal 2 (R) Function, 88
Input Terminal 2 (R) Response Time, 95
Input Terminal 20 (B15) Function, 97
Input Terminal 3 (ST) Function, 88
Input Terminal 3 (ST) Response Time, 95
Input Terminal 4 (RES) Function, 89
Input Terminal 4 (RES) Response Time, 96
Input Terminal 5 – 12 Response Time, 96
Input Terminal 5 (S1) Function, 89
Input Terminal 6 (S2) Function, 89
Input Terminal 7 (S3) Function, 89
Input Terminal 8 (S4) Function, 89
Input Terminal 9 (LI1) Function, 90
Input Terminal Delays, 47
Input Terminal Priority, 87
Input Terminals, 48
Installation and Connections, 14
Installation Notes, 14
Installation Precautions, 4
Introduction, 4
J
Jog Frequency, 126
Jog Settings, 54
Jog Stop Pattern, 127
Jump Frequencies, 57
Jump Frequency 1, 130
Jump Frequency 1 Bandwidth, 131
Jump Frequency 2, 131
Jump Frequency 2 Bandwidth, 131
Jump Frequency 3, 131
Jump Frequency 3 Bandwidth, 131
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 275
K
Keypad ASD-MTG-KIT Dimensions (mounting), 35
Keypad Installation Precautions, 33
Keypad Remote Mounting, 33
Keypad Remote Mounting using the ASD-MTG-KIT, 35
Keypad Remote Mounting w/o the ASD-MTG-KIT, 34
L
LCD Display, 29, 31
Lead Length Specifications, 20
LED Character/Font Information, 30
LED Display, 29, 30
LED/LCD Display Information, 30
Light Load Conditions, 11
Light-Load High-Speed Learning Function, 140
Light-Load High-Speed Operation, 140
Light-Load High-Speed Operation Detection Time, 141
Light-Load High-Speed Operation
Heavy-Load Detection Time, 141
Light-Load High-Speed Operation Load Wait Time, 141
Light-Load High-Speed Operation Switching
Lower-Limit Frequency, 141
Line Power Switching, 48
Linear acceleration, 165
Load Moment of Inertia 1, 160
Load Moment of Inertia 2, 161
Load Sharing Gain Input, 155
Load-produced Negative Torque, 12
Local mode, 29
Local|Remote Key, 29
Lockout, 69
Lockout All Keys, 202
Low Current, 251
Low Current Detection Current Hysteresis Width, 184
Low Current Detection Threshold, 185
Low Current Settings, 52
Low Current Trip, 184
Low Current Trip Threshold Time, 185
Low Speed Operation, 10
Lower Limit Frequency, 71, 81
Low-Speed Signal Output Frequency, 86
Lug Size, 265, 266
M
Main Monitor Selections, 45
Manual Torque Boost 1, 82
Manual Torque Boost 2, 98
Manual Torque Boost 3, 99
Manual Torque Boost 4, 100
Manual Torque Limit Settings, 59
Maximum Frequency, 80
MCP Rating, 265, 266
Mode Key, 29
MOFF, 247
MON 1 Bias Adjustment, 198
MON 1 Output Gradient Characteristic, 197
MON 1 Voltage/Current Output Switching, 197
MON 2 Bias Adjustment, 198
MON 2 Output Gradient Characteristic, 198
MON 2 Voltage/Current Output Switching, 198
MON1 Terminal Adjustment, 195
MON1 Terminal Meter Selection, 195
MON2 Terminal Adjustment, 196
MON2 Terminal Meter Selection, 195
Monitor Mode, 43
Monitor Output Function 11, 229
Monitor Output Function 21, 230
Monitor Output Function 31, 230
Monitor Output Function 41, 231
Monitor Output Function Command 11, 229
Monitor Output Function Command 21, 230
Monitor Output Function Command 31, 231
Monitor Output Function Command 41, 231
Monitor Screen, 31
Motor Settings, 58
Motor 150% Overload Time Limit, 184
Motor Braking, 12
Motor Characteristics, 10
Motor connection diagram, 17
Motor Constant 1, 153
Motor Constant 2, 153
Motor Constant 3, 153
Motor Constant 4, 153
Motor Current Rating, 72
Motor Load, 43
Motor OL (Overload) Trip, 43
Motor Overload, 254
Motor Overload Protection Configuration, 82
Motor Overload Protection Level 1, 182
Motor Overload Protection Level 2, 98
Motor Overload Protection Level 3, 99
Motor Overload Protection Level 4, 100
Motor Overload Real, 43
Motor Rated Capacity, 152
Motor Rated Current, 152
Motor Rated RPM, 152
Motor Set #1, 46
Motor Set #2, 58
Motor Set #3, 58
Motor Set #4, 58
Motor Shaft Fixing Control, 125
Motor/Load Combinations, 11
Mounting the ASD, 15
Multiplying Input Selection, 193
276 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
My Function Count Data 1, 222
My Function Count Data 2, 222
My Function Frequency Data 1, 220
My Function Frequency Data 2, 220
My Function Frequency Data 4, 221
My Function Frequency Data 5, 221
My Function Percent Data 1, 219
My Function Percent Data 3, 220
My Function Percent Data 4, 220
My Function Percent Data 5, 220
My Function Selection, 233
My Function Time Data 1, 221
My Function Time Data 2, 221
My Function Time Data 3, 221
My Function Time Data 4, 222
My Function Time Data 5, 222
N
NERR, 252
Network Option Reset Settings, 215
Number of PG Input Phases, 150
Number of PG Input Pulses, 150
O
O1A/B, 21
O2A/B, 23
OC, 248
OC1, 252
OC1P, 252
OC2, 253
OC2P, 253
OC3, 253
OC3P, 253
OCA1, 253
OCA2, 253
OCA3, 253
OCL, 253
OCR, 253
OH, 248, 253
OH2, 253
OJ, 248
OL1, 254
OL2, 254
OLI, 248
OLM, 248
OLR, 248, 254
OP, 249
OP1, 254
OP2, 254
OP3, 254
Operation (Local), 73
Operation Above 60 Hz, 10
Operation Command Clear Selection When ST Off, 200
Operation Mode, 65
Operation Panel Parameters, 58
Operational and Maintenance Precautions, 9
Option V/I Terminal Voltage/Current Selection, 88
Options, 270
OT, 249, 254
OUT Terminal, 194
OUT1, 21, 23
Out1 Out2 FL, 45
OUT1/OUT2 Output, 25
OUT2, 23
Output Current, 43
output disconnect, 8
Output Function Assigned, 216, 218, 219, 223,
225, 226, 227
Output Phase Failure, 251
Output Phase Failure Detection, 183
Output Power, 44
Output Terminal 1 (OUT1) Function, 92
Output Terminal 10 (R3) Function, 97
Output Terminal 11 (R4) Function, 97
Output Terminal 2 (OUT2) Function, 92
Output Terminal 3 (FL) Function, 93
Output Terminal 4 (OUT3) Function, 93
Output Terminal 5 (OUT4) Function, 93
Output Terminal 6 (R1) Function, 94
Output Terminal 7 (OUT5) Function, 94
Output Terminal 8 (OUT6) Function, 94
Output Terminal 9 (R2) Function, 95
Output Terminals, 49
Output Voltage, 43
Over Speed, 250
Overcurrent During Acceleration, 252
Overcurrent During Deceleration, 253
Overcurrent During Run, 253
Over-current Protection, 13
Overheat, 253
Overheat During Acceleration, 252
Overheat During Deceleration, 253
Overheat During Run, 253
Overload, 52, 53
Overload Protection, 10
Overload Reduction Starting Frequency, 184
Override Control, 61
Override mode, 38
Override Operation, 38
Over-speed Detection Frequency Lower Band, 187
Over-speed Detection Frequency Upper Band, 187
Overtorque, 254
Overtorque Detection Hysteresis, 186
Overtorque Detection Level (Negative Torque), 186
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 277
Overtorque Detection Level (Positive Torque), 186
Overtorque Detection Time, 186
Overtorque Parameters, 53
Overtorque Trip, 185
Overvoltage During Acceleration, 254
Overvoltage During Deceleration, 254
Overvoltage During Run, 254
Overvoltage Limit Operation, 136
Overvoltage Limit Operation Level, 187
P
P24, 21, 23
P24 Output, 25
PA/+, 16
Panel Emergency Off Lockout, 202
Panel Frequency Lockout, 202
Panel Load Sharing Gain, 201
Panel Operation Jog Mode, 127
Panel Override Multiplication Gain, 201
Panel Reset Lockout, 202
Panel Stop Pattern, 201
Panel Tension Torque Bias, 201
Panel Torque Bias, 143
Panel Torque Command, 201
Panel Torque Gain, 143
Parameter Write Lockout, 198
Parity (2- and 4-wire RS485), 204
Password, 69
Past Trip #1, 44
Past Trip #2, 44
Past Trip #3, 44
Past Trip #4, 44
Pattern 1 Repeat, 171
Pattern 2 Repeat, 174
Pattern Group 1 Selection 1, 172
Pattern Group 1 Selection 2, 173
Pattern Group 1 Selection 3, 173
Pattern Group 1 Selection 4, 173
Pattern Group 1 Selection 5, 173
Pattern Group 1 Selection 6, 174
Pattern Group 1 Selection 7, 174
Pattern Group 1 Selection 8, 174
Pattern Group 2 Selection 1, 175
Pattern Group 2 Selection 2, 175
Pattern Group 2 Selection 3, 175
Pattern Group 2 Selection 4, 175
Pattern Group 2 Selection 5, 176
Pattern Group 2 Selection 6, 176
Pattern Group 2 Selection 7, 176
Pattern Group 2 Selection 8, 176
Pattern Group Cycle, 44
Pattern Group Number, 44
Pattern Group Preset, 44
Pattern Operation Mode, 170
Pattern Run, 65
Pattern Time, 44
PC/-, 16
Permanent Magnet (PM) Motor Constant 1, 164
Permanent Magnet (PM) Motor Constant 2, 164
PG Disconnection Detection, 151
PG Input Point 1 Frequency, 122
PG Input Point 1 Setting, 122
PG Input Point 2 Frequency, 123
PG Input Point 2 Setting, 123
PG Settings, 61
PG Type/Connection Error, 250
Phase Loss, 53
PID Control Switching, 147
PID Control Wait Time, 149
PID Deviation Lower Limit, 149
PID Deviation Upper Limit, 148
PID Feedback, 44
PID Feedback Delay Filter, 148
PID Feedback Differential (D) Gain, 149
PID Feedback Integral (I) Gain, 148
PID Feedback Proportional (P) Gain, 148
PID Feedback Signal, 148
PID Output Lower Limit, 150
PID Output Upper Limit, 149
PM Motor, 164
PO, 16
POFF, 249
Point 1 Frequency, 207
Point 1 Setting, 207
Point 2 Frequency, 208
Point 2 Setting, 208
Power Connections, 16
Power Factor Correction, 11
Power running, 142
Power Running Stall Continuous Trip
Detection Time, 159
Power Running Torque Limit 1, 157
Power Running Torque Limit 1 Level, 157
Power Running Torque Limit 2 Level, 158
Power Running Torque Limit 3 Level, 158
Power Running Torque Limit 4 Level, 159
PP, 21, 23
PP Output, 25
Preset Speed 1, 83
Preset Speed 1 Operation Mode, 180
Preset Speed 10, 132
Preset Speed 10 Operation Mode, 181
Preset Speed 11, 132
Preset Speed 11 Operation Mode, 181
Preset Speed 12, 132
Preset Speed 12 Operation Mode, 181
278 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Preset Speed 13, 132
Preset Speed 13 Operation Mode, 181
Preset Speed 14, 132
Preset Speed 14 Operation Mode, 182
Preset Speed 15, 133
Preset Speed 15 Operation Mode, 182
Preset Speed 2, 83
Preset Speed 2 Operation Mode, 180
Preset Speed 3, 84
Preset Speed 3 Operation Mode, 180
Preset Speed 4, 84
Preset Speed 4 Operation Mode, 181
Preset Speed 5, 84
Preset Speed 5 Operation Mode, 181
Preset Speed 6, 84
Preset Speed 6 Operation Mode, 181
Preset Speed 7, 84
Preset Speed 7 Operation Mode, 181
Preset Speed 8, 131
Preset Speed 8 Operation Mode, 181
Preset Speed 9, 132
Preset Speed 9 Operation Mode, 181
Preset Speed Operation Mode, 179
Preset Speed Operation Selection, 212
Preset Speeds, 54
Primary Menus, 31
Process Decreasing Rate, 150
Process Increasing Rate, 150
Process Lower Limit, 149
Process Upper Limit, 149
Program Menu, 31
Program Mode Menu Navigation, 46
Prohibition, 49
Protection, 52
PTC1 Thermal Selection, 191
PTC2 Thermal Selection, 192
PtSt, 249
Pulse Output Frequency, 196
Pulse Width Modulation, 10
PWM Carrier Frequency, 133
Q
Qualified Personnel, 2
R
R, 21, 22
R/L1, 16
RAM Fault, 251
Random Mode, 138
Reach Settings, 49
Real-time Clock Setup, 50
Regenerative Braking Torque Limit 1, 158
Regenerative Braking Torque Limit 1 Level, 158
Regenerative Braking Torque Limit 2 Level, 158
Regenerative Braking Torque Limit 3 Level, 159
Regenerative Braking Torque Limit 4 Level, 159
Regenerative Power Ridethrough Control Level, 188
Regenerative Power Ridethrough Mode, 134
Release Time, 143
Remote Keypad Required Hardware, 33
Remote mode, 29
RES, 21, 22
Reset, 50, 79
Restore User Settings, 75
Retain Trip Record at Power Down, 182
Retry Selection, 135
Retry/Restart, 53
Reverse Speed Limit Input, 156
Reverse Speed Limit Input Level, 156
Ridethrough Time, 137
ROM Fault, 251
Root menu mapping, 41
Root Menus, 41
Rotary Encoder, 29
Rotation in Specified Direction ONLY, 157
RR, 21, 22, 44
RR Input, 25
RR Input Bias, 162
RR Input Gain, 162
RR Input Point 1 Frequency, 110
RR Input Point 1 Rate, 112
RR Input Point 1 Setting, 110
RR Input Point 2 Frequency, 111
RR Input Point 2 Rate, 112
RR Input Point 2 Setting, 111
RS485 4-Wire Protocol Selection (TSB/ModBus), 209
RS485 Protocol Selection, 206
RS485 Send Wait Time (RS485 4-wire), 208
Run Frequency, 123
Run Frequency Hysteresis, 124
Run Key, 29
Run Time, 43
Rush Relay Current Activation Time, 191
RX, 21, 23, 44
RX Input, 25
RX Input Bias, 162
RX Input Gain, 162
RX Input Point 1 Frequency, 113
RX Input Point 1 Rate, 115
RX Input Point 1 Setting, 113
RX Input Point 2 Frequency, 114
RX Input Point 2 Rate, 115
RX Input Point 2 Setting, 114
RX2, 44
H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 279
RX2 (AI1) Input Bias, 163
RX2 (AI1) Input Gain, 163
RX2 (AI1) Input Point 1 Frequency, 117
RX2 (AI1) Input Point 1 Rate, 118
RX2 (AI1) Input Point 1 Setting, 116
RX2 (AI1) Input Point 2 Frequency, 117
RX2 (AI1) Input Point 2 Rate, 119
RX2 (AI1) Input Point 2 Setting, 117
S
S/L2, 16
S1, 21, 22
S2, 21, 22
S3, 21, 22
S4, 21, 22
Save User Settings, 75
Second Speed Loop Proportional Gain, 160
Second Speed Loop Stabilization Coefficient, 161
Send Wait Time (2-wire), 206
Setpoints, 59
Short Circuit Detection At Start, 185
Short Circuit Protection, 267
Simple Positioning Completion Range, 151
Sink, 24
Sink/Source Setting Error, 250, 251
Slip Frequency Gain, 151
Source, 24
SOUT, 254
S-Pattern 1, 165
S-Pattern 2, 165
S-Pattern Acceleration Lower Limit Adjustment, 168
S-Pattern Acceleration Upper Limit Adjustment, 168
S-Pattern Deceleration Lower Limit Adjustment, 168
S-Pattern Deceleration Upper Limit Adjustment, 168
Special, 56
Special Parameters, 57
Special Protection Parameters, 53
Speed 1 Operation Time, 177
Speed 10 Operation Time, 178
Speed 11 Operation Time, 178
Speed 12 Operation Time, 178
Speed 13 Operation Time, 179
Speed 14 Operation Time, 179
Speed 15 Operation Time, 179
Speed 2 Operation Time, 177
Speed 3 Operation Time, 177
Speed 4 Operation Time, 177
Speed 5 Operation Time, 177
Speed 6 Operation Time, 177
Speed 7 Operation Time, 178
Speed 8 Operation Time, 178
Speed 9 Operation Time, 178
Speed at 0% Drooping Gain, 139
Speed at F320 Drooping Gain, 139
Speed Limit (torque=0) Band, 157
Speed Limit (torque=0) Center Value, 156
Speed Limit (torque=0) Center Value Reference, 156
Speed Loop Proportional Gain, 160
Speed Loop Stabilization Coefficient, 160
Speed PID Switching Frequency, 161
Speed Reach Detection Band, 86
Speed Reach Frequency, 86
Speed Reference Setpoints, 55, 56
ST, 21, 22
Stall, 53
Stall Prevention During Regeneration, 160
Stall Prevention Factor 1, 154
Stall Prevention Level, 182
Standard Mode Selection, 46
Start Frequency, 123
Startup and Test, 27
Startup Wizard Parameter Requirements, 71
Stepout Current Detection Level, 192
Stepout Current Detection Time, 192
Stop|Reset Key, 30
SU+, 21, 23
Supply Voltage Correction, 137
SW301, 23
Switching Load Torque During Power Running, 142
Switching Load Torque During
Regenerative Braking, 142
Synchronized Acceleration Time, 139
Synchronized Deceleration Time, 138
System Configuration and Menu Options, 41
System Grounding, 18
System Integration Precautions, 7
System Operation, 70
T
T/L3, 16
Tension Torque Bias Input, 154
Terminal, 47
Terminal Board, 21, 24
Terminal Descriptions, 22
Thermal derating, 190
Time Limit For Lower-Limit Frequency Operation, 125
Torque, 44, 59
Torque Bias Input Selection, 143
Torque Command Selection, 154
Torque Control, 59, 60
Torque Current, 44
Torque Limit Settings, 60
Torque Reference, 44
Torque Speed Limiting, 60
280 H9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Trace, 49, 50
Trace Cycle, 203
Trace Data 1, 203
Trace Data 2, 204
Trace Data 3, 204
Trace Data 4, 204
Trace Selection, 203
Traverse, 58
Traverse Acceleration Time, 235
Traverse Deceleration Time, 235
Traverse Jump Step, 235
Traverse Selection, 235
Traverse Step, 235
Trip Code, 44
Trip History, 255
Trip History (read-only), 50, 51
Trip Record at Monitor Screen, 255
Trip Settings, 53
Trouble Shooting, 246
Type Reset, 50, 79
Typeform Error, 252
U
U/T1, 16
UC, 249
UL 1995, 256
Undervoltage Trip, 187
Undervoltage Trip Detection Time, 188
Undervoltage/Ridethrough, 53
UP/DOWN Frequency (down) Frequency Step, 129
UP/DOWN Frequency (down) Response Time, 129
UP/DOWN Frequency (up) Frequency Step, 129
UP/DOWN Frequency (up) Response Time, 128
UP/DOWN Frequency Functions, 54
Up/Down Frequency Operation, 130
UP1, 254
UP2, 254
U-Phase Overcurrent, 253
Upper Limit Frequency, 71, 81
User Notification Codes, 247
User Notification codes, 246
Utilities, 49
V
V/f Five-Point Setting Frequency 1, 101
V/f Five-Point Setting Frequency 2, 102
V/f Five-Point Setting Frequency 3, 103
V/f Five-Point Setting Frequency 4, 103
V/f Five-Point Setting Frequency 5, 104
V/f Five-Point Setting Voltage 1, 102
V/f Five-Point Setting Voltage 2, 103
V/f Five-Point Setting Voltage 3, 103
V/f Five-Point Setting Voltage 4, 103
V/f Five-Point Setting Voltage 5, 104
V/f Pattern, 81
V/I, 44, 54
V/I (I), 23
V/I (V), 23
V/I Analog Input Broken Wire Detection Level, 191
V/I Input, 25
V/I Input Bias, 161
V/I Input Gain, 161
V/I Input Point 1 Frequency, 106
V/I Input Point 1 Rate, 107
V/I Input Point 1 Setting, 105
V/I Input Point 2 Frequency, 106
V/I Input Point 2 Rate, 108
V/I Input Point 2 Setting, 106
V/I Settings, 54
V/I terminal, 44
V/T2, 16
Vector Control, 13
Vector Motor Model, 59
Version (read-only), 51
VI/II terminal, 44
Viewing Trip Information, 255
Virtual Input Terminal 1 Selection, 232
Virtual Input Terminal 2 Selection, 232
Virtual Input Terminal 3 Selection, 232
Virtual Input Terminal 4 Selection, 232
Voltage and Frequency Rating of the Motor, 71
Volts per Hertz Setting, 72
V-Phase Overcurrent, 253
W
W/T3, 16
Wizard Finish, 73
W-Phase Overcurrent, 253
TOSHIBA
TOSHIBA INTERNATIONAL CORPORATION
INDUSTRIAL DIVISION
13131 West Little York Road, Houston, TX 77041
TEL: (713) 466-0277 — FAX: (713) 466-8773
Printed in the U.S.A.

Navigation menu